Western Telematic Network Card M User Manual

WTI Part No. 13762  
Rev. H  
MPC Series  
Managed Power Controllers  
Models Covered:  
MPC-8H-1  
MPC-8H-2  
MPC-16H-1  
MPC-16H-2  
MPC-18H-1  
MPC-18H-2  
MPC-20VS20-1  
MPC-20VS20-2  
MPC-20VD20-2  
MPC-20VS30-2  
MPC-20VD30-2  
MPC-20VS16-3  
MPC-20VD16-3  
MPC-20VS32-3  
MPC-20VD32-3  
MPC-20V-1  
MPC-20V-2  
MPC-DISPLAY  
MPC-20VD20-1  
MPC-20VS30-1  
MPC-20VD30-1  
Firmware Version 1.6 and Higher  
User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warnings and Cautions  
Disconnect Power  
If any of the following events are noted, immediately disconnect the unit from the outlet  
and contact qualified service personnel:  
1. If the power cord becomes frayed or damaged.  
2. If liquid has been spilled into the device or if the device has been exposed to rain  
or water.  
Two Power Supply Cables  
Note that some MPC series units feature two separate power circuits, and a separate  
power supply cable for each power circuit. If your MPC unit includes two power supply  
cables, make certain to disconnect both power supply cables from their power source  
before attempting to service or remove the unit.  
Detached 15-Amp “Starter” Cable(s)  
If the MPC unit includes a detached, 125 VAC, 15 Amp “Starter” Cable(s,) this allows  
you to connect the MPC to power for bench testing and initial start up is adequate for  
applications that only require 15 Amps. For 20-Amp power switching applications,  
please refer to the WTI Power Cable guide supplied with the unit, or use appropriate 20-  
Amp cables.  
Units with Attached Power Supply Cable(s)  
For MPC units that include attached power supply cable(s), the socket outlet(s) shall be  
installed near the equipment and shall be accessible.  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Agency Approvals  
FCC Part 15 Regulation  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital  
device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide  
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated  
in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio  
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction  
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this  
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the  
user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following  
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device  
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired  
operation  
WARNING: Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by  
the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate  
the equipment  
EMC, Safety, and R&TTE Directive Compliance  
The CE mark is affixed to this product to confirm compliance with the following  
European Community Directives:  
Council Directive 89/336/EEC of 3 May 1989 on the approximation of the laws  
of Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility;  
and  
Council Directive 73/23/EEC of 19 February 1973 on the harmonization of  
the laws of Member States relating to electrical equipment designed for use  
within certain voltage limits;  
and  
Council Directive 1999/5/EC of 9 March on radio equipment and  
telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their  
conformity.  
Industry Canada - EMI Information  
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table of Contents  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
5. Basic Configuration (continued)  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Appendices  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
List of Figures  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Introduction  
WTI’s MPC series Managed Power Controllers allow secure, remote metering and  
management of AC powered rack mount equipment via SSL, SSH, SNMP, web  
browser, telnet, external modem or local terminal. The MPC can monitor power to your  
equipment, and automatically notify you when changes in current levels, temperature,  
circuit breaker status or other factors exceed user-defined threshold values.  
The MPC features two separate power circuits with up to 20 Amps input feed handling  
capacity per branch circuit, and is available in a horizontal, rack mount version with  
eight or sixteen switched outlets, or as a “zero unit” vertical mount model with 20  
switched outlets.  
Power Metering and Management:  
The MPC can constantly measure current consumption, temperature levels, ping  
response and other factors. If the MPC detects that user defined thresholds for these  
values have been exceeded, the unit can promptly notify you via email, SNMP, Syslog,  
LED or audible alarm. When temperature and current readings exceed user defined  
critical values, the MPC can also intelligently shed the current load by temporarily  
shutting down nonessential devices; when readings return to acceptable levels, the  
MPC can restore power to those devices to return to normal operating conditions.  
In addition, the MPC can also notify you when the Invalid Access Lockout has  
been triggered, when one of the MPC circuit breakers is open, or when a loss of  
communication with the optional auxiliary units is detected. The MPC also records  
current consumption data to a convenient log file, which can be retrieved in ASCII, XML,  
or CSV format or displayed in graph format.  
Security and Co-Location Features:  
Secure Shell (SSHv2) encryption and address-specific IP security masks help to prevent  
unauthorized access to command and configuration functions.  
The MPC also provides four different levels of security for user accounts: Administrator,  
SuperUser, User and ViewOnly. The Administrator level provides complete access to  
all plug functions, operating features and configuration menus. The SuperUser level  
allows switching and rebooting of all plugs but does not allow access to configuration  
functions. The User level allows access to only a select group of Administrator-defined  
plugs. The ViewOnly level allows you to check plug status and unit status, but does not  
allow switching or rebooting of outlets or access to configuration menus.  
The MPC includes full Radius support, LDAP capability, TACACS capability, MIB  
capability, DHCP and an invalid access lockout feature. An Audit Log records all user  
access, login and logout times and command actions.  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction  
Convenient, Durable Design:  
The MPC is available with an optional remote display panel, which can be used to show  
the status of MPC units installed in hard-to-reach spots, deep inside equipment racks.  
When additional outlets are needed, each MPC unit can also be connected to up to  
three Auxiliary/Remote MPC units, allowing control of up to 80 outlets via a single IP  
Address .  
Model Numbers  
The MPC series includes a variety of horizontal and vertical models to accommodate the  
power distribution needs of almost any rack mount application.  
Input  
Feeds  
Input  
Voltage  
Max. Load  
per Outlet  
Max. Load  
per Input  
Max. Load  
per Unit  
Model No.  
MPC-8H-1  
2 ea, 20 Amp  
2 ea, 16 Amp  
2 ea, 20 Amp  
2 ea, 16 Amp  
1 ea, 20 Amp  
1 ea, 16 Amp  
2 ea, 20 Amp  
2 ea, 16 Amp  
1 ea, 20 Amp  
1 ea, 16 Amp  
2 ea, 20 Amp  
2 ea, 20 Amp  
1 ea, 30 Amp  
1 ea, 30 Amp  
2 ea, 30 Amp  
2 ea, 30 Amp  
1 ea, 16 Amp  
2 ea, 16 Amp  
1 ea, 32 Amp  
2 ea, 32 Amp  
100 to 120 VAC  
100 to 240 VAC  
100 to 120 VAC  
100 to 240 VAC  
100 to 120 VAC  
100 to 240 VAC  
100 to 120 VAC  
100 to 240 VAC  
100 to 120 VAC  
100 to 240 VAC  
100 to 120 VAC  
100 to 240 VAC  
100 to 120 VAC  
100 to 240 VAC  
100 to 120 VAC  
100 to 240 VAC  
100 to 240 VAC  
100 to 240 VAC  
100 to 240 VAC  
100 to 240 VAC  
16 Amps  
10 Amps  
16 Amps  
10 Amps  
16 Amps  
10 Amps  
16 Amps  
15 Amps  
16 Amps  
15 Amps  
16 Amps  
15 Amps  
20 Amps  
15 Amps  
20 Amps  
15 Amps  
10 Amps  
10 Amps  
10 Amps  
10 Amps  
16 Amps *  
16 Amps *  
16 Amps *  
16 Amps *  
16 Amps *  
16 Amps *  
16 Amps *  
16 Amps *  
16 Amps *  
16 Amps *  
16 Amps *  
16 Amps *  
24 Amps *  
24 Amps *  
24 Amps *  
24 Amps *  
16 Amps  
32 Amps *  
32 Amps *  
32 Amps *  
32 Amps *  
16 Amps *  
16 Amps *  
32 Amps *  
32 Amps *  
16 Amps *  
16 Amps *  
32 Amps *  
32 Amps *  
24 Amps *  
24 Amps *  
48 Amps *  
48 Amps *  
16 Amps  
MPC-8H-2  
MPC-16H-1  
MPC-16H-2  
MPC-18H-1  
MPC-18H-2  
MPC-20V-1  
MPC-20V-2  
MPC-20VS20-1  
MPC-20VS20-2  
MPC-20VD20-1  
MPC-20VD20-2  
MPC-20VS30-1  
MPC-20VS30-2  
MPC-20VD30-1  
MPC-20VD30-2  
MPC-20VS16-3  
MPC-20VD16-3  
MPC-20VS32-3  
MPC-20VD32-3  
16 Amps  
32 Amps  
32 Amps  
32 Amps  
32 Amps  
64 Amps  
* In accordance with UL requirements for branch circuits, this value has been  
de-rated to 80%.  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction  
Typographic Conventions  
^(e.g. ^X)  
Indicates a control character. For example, the text "^X" (Control X)  
indicates the [Ctrl] key and the [X] key must be pressed  
simultaneously.  
COURIER FONT  
Indicates characters typed on the keyboard.  
For example, /ACor /ON A2.  
[Bold Font]  
Text set in bold face and enclosed in square brackets indicates a  
specific key. For example, [Enter] or [Esc].  
< >  
[ ]  
Indicates required keyboard entries. For Example: /P <n>.  
Indicates optional keyboard entries. For Example: /P [n].  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Unit Description  
2.1. MPC-H Series - Front Panel  
1
2
3
4
5
www.wti.com  
MPC-16H  
REMOTE AUX 1  
AMPS  
VOLTS  
KWATTS  
TEMP  
A1 A2 A3 A4  
A5 A6 A7 A8  
B1 B2 B3 B4  
B5 B6 B7 B8  
8.8.8  
8.8.8  
Managed Power  
Controller  
AUDIBLE  
ALARM  
DISPLAY  
SELECTION  
DEFAULT  
PLUGS  
INPUT  
A
INPUT  
B
PLUGS  
ON  
AUX 2  
AUX 3  
CONSOLE PORT  
6
7
8
9
Figure 2.1: MPC-H Series - Front Panel (Model MPC-16H Shown)  
As shown in Figure 2.1, the MPC-H Series Front Panel includes the following  
components:  
1. Power Circuit A - Indicator Lights: LED indicators, which light when power is  
applied to the corresponding outlet on Power Circuit A.  
Note: MPC-18H series units feature a single power circuit (branch.)  
Accordingly, MPC-18H units also include only one set of Indicator lights and  
only one Digital Display.  
2. Power Circuit A - Digital Display: An LED digital readout, which can be used  
to show Amps, Kilowatts, Volts or Temperature for Power Circuit A. Note that the  
Display Selection Button is used to determine which of these values will appear on  
the digital display..  
3. Display Selection Button and Indicators: Determines which measurement will  
appear on the Digital Displays for Circuits A and B. Each time the Display Selection  
Button is pressed, the Digital Displays will toggle between Amps, Kilowatts, Volts,  
Temperature, Total Kilowatts and Total Amps. Please refer to Section 2.4 for  
additional button functions.  
4. Power Circuit B - Digital Display: Same as Item 2 above, except displays values  
for Power Circuit B. (Not present on MPC-18H series units.)  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Unit Description  
5. Power Circuit B - Indicator Lights: Same as Item 1 above, except the LEDs light  
to indicate On/Off status of Power Circuit B outlets. (Not present on MPC-18H  
series units.).  
6. Link Ports: Four RJ45 connectors, which can be used to link the MPC unit to up  
to three other MPC or BPM units, plus the optional MPC-DISPLAY, status display  
panel. When your MPC unit is linked to other MPC units, this allows control of  
up to four MPC units (one local unit, plus three remote units) via one IP address.  
If necessary, the Link Ports can also be reconfigured as RS232 serial ports (as  
described in Section 5.8.2) to allow communication with attached devices. The  
MPC includes three AUX Ports and one Remote Port; the remote port is intended  
for connection to the MPC-DISPLAY unit, and the AUX Ports are intended for  
connection to additional MPC units.  
7. Console Port: A DB9, RS232 serial port (DTE), which can be used for connection  
to a local terminal or external modem, as described in Section 4. For a description  
of the Console Port interface, please refer to Appendix B.1.  
8. Default Button: This button can be used to either reset the unit to default  
parameters or to perform several other functions, described in Section 2.4.  
9. Audible Alarm Button and LED: When any of the Alarms discussed in Section 7  
are triggered, this LED will light, and the MPC will emit an audible alarm signal. To  
turn off the audible alarm single, press the Audible Alarm Button once. Please refer  
to Section 2.4 for additional button functions.  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Unit Description  
1
2
3
6
4
5
3
BUS  
A
BUS  
A
A-1  
B-1  
A-2  
B-2  
A-3  
B-3  
A-4  
B-4  
A-5  
B-5  
A-6  
B-6  
A-7  
B-7  
A-8  
B-8  
ACT LINK  
ALARM  
A
B
BUS  
B
BUS  
B
10/100 BaseT  
6
7
8
Figure 2.2: MPC-H Series - Back Panel (Model MPC-16H-1 Shown)  
2.2. MPC-H Series - Back Panel  
As shown in Figure 2.2, the MPC-H Series Back Panel includes the following  
components:  
1. Power Circuit A - Power Inlet: An IEC320-C20 AC inlet which supplies power to  
MPC control functions and the Circuit A” outlets. Also includes cable keeper  
(not shown.)  
Note: MPC-18H series units feature a single Power Inlet.  
2. Power Circuit B - Power Inlet: An IEC320-C20 AC inlet which supplies power to  
MPC control functions and the Circuit “B” outlets. Also includes cable keeper  
(not shown.) (Not present on MPC-18H series units.)  
3. Power Circuit A - Circuit Breaker(s): Note that on MPC-16H and MPC-18H  
models, there are two circuit breakers for each power circuit. The circuit breakers  
are rated as follows:  
MPC-8H-1, MPC-16H-1 and MPC-18H-1: 20 Amp Circuit Breaker(s).  
MPC-8H-2, MPC-16H-2 and MPC-18H-2: 16 Amp Circuit Breaker(s).  
4. Power Circuit A - Switched Outlets: AC Outlets that can be switched On, Off or  
rebooted in response to user commands:  
MPC-8H-1: Four (4) each, NEMA 5-20R Outlets.  
MPC-8H-2: Four (4) each, IEC320-C13 Outlets.  
MPC-16H-1: Eight (8) each, NEMA 5-20R Outlets.  
MPC-16H-2: Eight (8) each, IEC320-C13 Outlets.  
MPC-18H-1: Eight (8) each, NEMA 5-20R Outlets.  
MPC-18H-2: Eight (8) each, IEC320-C13 Outlets.  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Unit Description  
5. Power Circuit B - Switched Outlets: Same as Item 4 above. (Not present on  
MPC-18H series units.)  
6. Power Circuit B - Circuit Breaker(s): Same as Item 3 above. (Not present on  
MPC-18H series units.)  
7. Alarm Indicator Lights: Two LEDs which light when an alarm condition is detected  
at the corresponding power circuit. For information on Alarm Configuration, please  
refer to Section 7. Note that MPC-18H series units include only one Alarm Indicator  
Light.  
8. Network Port: An RJ45 Ethernet port for connection to your 100Base-T, TCP/IP  
network. Note that the MPC features a default IP address (192.168.168.168). This  
allows you to connect to the unit without first assigning an IP address. Note that the  
Network Port also includes two, small LED indicators for Link and Data Activity. For  
more information on Network Port configuration, please refer to Section 5.9.  
2.3. MPC-V Series - Hardware Description  
As shown in Figure 2.3, MPC-V Series units include the following components:  
1. Default Button: This button can be used to either reset the unit to default  
parameters or to perform several other functions, as described in Section 2.4.  
2. Audible Alarm Button and LED: Two LEDs which light when an alarm condition  
is detected at the corresponding power circuit. For information on Alarm  
Configuration, please refer to Section 7. Please refer to Section 2.4 for additional  
button functions Note that MPC-V series units that include only one power inlet will  
also include only one Alarm LED.  
3. Display Selection Button and Indicators: Determines which measurement will  
appear on the Digital Displays for Circuits A and B. Each time the Display Selection  
Button is pressed, the Digital Displays will toggle between Amps, Kilowatts, Volts,  
Temperature, Total Kilowatts and Total Amps. When either "Total Kilowatts" or "Total  
Amps" are selected, the MPC will display the total for Circuits A and B combined.  
An LED indicator will light to show which measurement is currently selected.  
Please refer to Section 2.4 for additional button functions. Note that the "Total  
Kilowatts and "Total Amps" displays are not available on all MPC-V series units, and  
that MPC-V series units that include only one power inlet, will also include only one  
Digital Display.  
4. Link Ports: Four RJ45 connectors, which can be used to link the MPC unit to up  
to three other MPC or BPM units, plus the optional MPC-DISPLAY, status display  
panel. When your MPC unit is linked to other MPC units, this allows control of up  
to four MPC units (one local unit, plus three remote units) via one IP address. If  
necessary, the Link Ports can also be reconfigured for use as RS232 serial ports  
(as described in Section 5.8.2) to allow communication with attached devices. The  
MPC includes three AUX Ports and one Remote Port; the Remote Port is intended  
for connection to the MPC-DISPLAY unit, and the AUX Ports are intended for  
connection to additional MPC units.  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Unit Description  
1
4
AUX  
1
AUX  
3
DEFAULT  
REMOTE  
DISPLAY  
AUX  
2
2
3
5
6
AUDIBLE  
ALARM  
LINK  
ACT  
ON  
Ethernet  
10/100  
TOTAL A+B  
KWATTS  
DISPLAY  
SELECTION  
AMPS  
CONSOLE  
AMPS VOLTS KWATTS TEMP  
8.8.8 8.8.8  
A
B
7
8
Managed Power Controller  
MPC-20V  
BRANCH  
A1  
BRANCH  
B1  
PLUG A1  
PLUG A2  
PLUG A3  
PLUG A4  
PLUG A5  
PLUG A6  
PLUG A7  
PLUG A8  
PLUG A9  
PLUG A10  
PLUG B1  
PLUG B2  
PLUG B3  
PLUG B4  
PLUG B5  
PLUG B6  
PLUG B7  
PLUG B8  
PLUG B9  
PLUG B10  
9
10  
BRANCH  
A2  
BRANCH  
B2  
A1  
A2  
B1  
B2  
11  
12  
13  
Figure 2.3: MPC-20V Series - Hardware Description (Model MPC-20VD20-1 Shown)  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Unit Description  
5. Network Port: An RJ45 Ethernet port for connection to your 100Base-T, TCP/IP  
network. Note that the MPC features a default IP address (192.168.168.168). This  
allows you to connect to the unit without first assigning an IP address. Note that the  
Network Port also includes two, small LED indicators for Link and Data Activity. For  
more information on Network Port configuration, please refer to Section 5.9.  
6. Console Port: A DB9, RS232 serial port (DTE), which can be used for connection  
to a local terminal or external modem, as described in Section 4. For a description  
of the Console Port interface, please refer to Appendix B.1.  
7. Power Circuit A - Digital Display: An LED digital readout, which can be used  
to show Amps, Kilowatts, Volts or Temperature for Power Circuit A. Note that the  
Display Selection Button (Item 3) is used to determine which of these values will  
appear on the digital display.  
Note: Some MPC models include only one power circuit. Accordingly, MPC  
models that include only one power circuit, the unit will also have only one  
digital display.  
8. Power Circuit B - Digital Display: Same as Item 7 above, except displays values  
for Power Circuit B. MPC Models that include only one power circuit will also have  
only one digital display.  
9. Power Circuit A - Switched Outlets and Indicator Lights: AC Outlets that can be  
switched On, Off or rebooted in response to user commands. Note that each outlet  
includes an LED Indicator, which lights when power is applied to the outlet.  
Notes:  
• Some MPC models include only one power circuit.  
• Please refer to the table in Section 1 or Section 3 for power ratings for your  
specific MPC model.  
10. Power Circuit B - Switched Outlets and Indicator Lights: Same as Item 9 above,  
except outlets and LED indicators are for Power Circuit B. Note that some MPC  
models include only one power circuit.  
11. Circuit Breaker(s): Some MPC models include two power circuits, with two  
breakers for each circuit, and other MPC models include only one power circuit with  
two circuit breakers. For a description of the power rating for your specific MPC  
model, please refer to the table in Section 1 or Section 3.  
12. Unit Bottom Plate: In all models except MPC-20V-1 and MPC-20V-2, the power  
inlets are located on the bottom plate of the unit. In MPC-20V-1 and MPC-20V-2  
models, the power inlets are located at the bottom of the front panel.  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Unit Description  
13. Power Inlet(s): The power inlets are configured differently on MPC models, in  
accordance with the power rating, maximum load and the number of power circuits.  
Depending on your specific model, the MPC may include either one or two power  
inlets or either one or two power supply cables. Other MPC models may include  
either one or two permanently attached power supply cables. For a description of  
the power input configuration for your specific MPC unit, please refer to the table in  
Section 1 or Section 3. Note that MPC models with detachable power cable(s) will  
also include a power inlet cable keeper.  
2.4. Additional Button Functions  
In addition to the button functions discussed in Sections 2.1, 2.2 and 2.3, the Default,  
Audible Alarm and Display Selection buttons can also be used to perform several  
additional functions described below:  
Notes:  
• All Front Panel Button functions can also be disabled via the System  
Parameters menu, as described in Section 5.3.  
• When the MPC is reset to factory defaults, all user-defined configuration  
parameters will be cleared, and the default “super” user account will also be  
restored.  
1. Reboot Operating System:  
a) Press and hold the Default button for five seconds, and then release it.  
b) The MPC will reboot it's operating system; all plugs will be left in their current  
On/Off state.  
c) If the optional MPC-DISPLAY unit is installed, and this operation is performed at  
the MPC-DISPLAY unit, all connected MPC units will also be rebooted.  
2. Set Parameters to Factory Defaults:  
a) Simultaneously press both the Default button and the Display Selection button,  
hold them for five seconds, and then release them.  
b) All MPC parameters will be reset to their original factory default settings, and  
the unit will then reboot. All plugs will be left in their current On/Off state.  
c) This function will not be applied to other connected MPC units.  
3. Toggle/Default All Plugs:  
a) Simultaneously press both the Default button and Audible Alarm button, hold  
them for five seconds, and then release them.  
b) The MPC will switch all plugs to the Off state. If all plugs are already in the Off  
state, then the unit will reset all plugs to their user defined default states.  
c) This function will not be applied to other connected MPC units.  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Unit Description  
4. Enable/Disable Audible Alarm:  
a) In the default state, the Audible Alarm is Enabled.  
b) To disable the Audible Alarm, press and hold the Audible Alarm button for three  
seconds and then release it. To enable the Audible Alarm, press and hold the  
Audible Alarm button for three seconds again.  
c) If the optional MPC-DISPLAY unit is installed, and this operation is performed at  
the MPC-DISPLAY unit, the audible alarm feature on all connected MPC units  
will also be disabled. If this operation is performed at one of the connected  
MPC units, then the operation will only be applied to that unit.  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Getting Started  
This Quick Start Guide describes a simplified installation procedure for the MPC series  
hardware, which will allow you to communicate with the unit in order to demonstrate  
basic features and check for proper operation.  
Note that this Quick Start Guide does not provide a detailed description of unit  
configuration, or discuss advanced operating features in detail. In order to take full  
advantage of the features provided by this unit, it is recommended that you should refer  
to the remainder of this User’s Guide.  
3.1. Installing the MPC Hardware  
Note: This section describes the installation procedure for individual MPC  
units.  
• For Quick Start installation instructions for the optional MPC-DISPLAY unit,  
please refer to Section 3.3.  
• For instructions on connecting your local MPC unit to additional, remote MPC  
units via the AUX ports, please refer to Sections 4.5 and 5.8.2.  
3.1.1. Apply Power to the MPC  
Refer to power rating nameplate on the MPC unit, and then connect the unit to an  
appropriate power source. Note that some MPC models feature two separate AC inputs  
and two separate power branches, while others feature attached power supply cables  
and/or a single power inlet. Connect power cables to the unit’s Circuit A” and Circuit  
“B” Power Inlets (if present), install the cable keepers (as described in Section 4.1.1),  
then connect the cables to an appropriate power supply. Refer to the table on the next  
page for information concerning power requirements and maximum load.  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Getting Started  
Input  
Feeds  
Input  
Voltage  
Max. Load  
per Outlet  
Max. Load  
per Input  
Max. Load  
per Unit  
Model No.  
MPC-8H-1  
2 ea, 20 Amp  
2 ea, 16 Amp  
2 ea, 20 Amp  
2 ea, 16 Amp  
1 ea, 20 Amp  
1 ea, 16 Amp  
2 ea, 20 Amp  
2 ea, 16 Amp  
1 ea, 20 Amp  
1 ea, 16 Amp  
2 ea, 20 Amp  
2 ea, 20 Amp  
1 ea, 30 Amp  
1 ea, 30 Amp  
2 ea, 30 Amp  
2 ea, 30 Amp  
1 ea, 16 Amp  
2 ea, 16 Amp  
1 ea, 32 Amp  
2 ea, 32 Amp  
100 to 120 VAC  
100 to 240 VAC  
100 to 120 VAC  
100 to 240 VAC  
100 to 120 VAC  
100 to 240 VAC  
100 to 120 VAC  
100 to 240 VAC  
100 to 120 VAC  
100 to 240 VAC  
100 to 120 VAC  
100 to 240 VAC  
100 to 120 VAC  
100 to 240 VAC  
100 to 120 VAC  
100 to 240 VAC  
100 to 240 VAC  
100 to 240 VAC  
100 to 240 VAC  
100 to 240 VAC  
16 Amps  
10 Amps  
16 Amps  
10 Amps  
16 Amps  
10 Amps  
16 Amps  
15 Amps  
16 Amps  
15 Amps  
16 Amps  
15 Amps  
20 Amps  
15 Amps  
20 Amps  
15 Amps  
10 Amps  
10 Amps  
10 Amps  
10 Amps  
16 Amps *  
16 Amps *  
16 Amps *  
16 Amps *  
16 Amps *  
16 Amps *  
16 Amps *  
16 Amps *  
16 Amps *  
16 Amps *  
16 Amps *  
16 Amps *  
24 Amps *  
24 Amps *  
24 Amps *  
24 Amps *  
16 Amps  
32 Amps *  
32 Amps *  
32 Amps *  
32 Amps *  
16 Amps *  
16 Amps *  
32 Amps *  
32 Amps *  
16 Amps *  
16 Amps *  
32 Amps *  
32 Amps *  
24 Amps *  
24 Amps *  
48 Amps *  
48 Amps *  
16 Amps  
MPC-8H-2  
MPC-16H-1  
MPC-16H-2  
MPC-18H-1  
MPC-18H-2  
MPC-20V-1  
MPC-20V-2  
MPC-20VS20-1  
MPC-20VS20-2  
MPC-20VD20-1  
MPC-20VD20-2  
MPC-20VS30-1  
MPC-20VS30-2  
MPC-20VD30-1  
MPC-20VD30-2  
MPC-20VS16-3  
MPC-20VD16-3  
MPC-20VS32-3  
MPC-20VD32-3  
16 Amps  
32 Amps  
32 Amps  
32 Amps  
32 Amps  
64 Amps  
* In accordance with UL requirements for branch circuits, this value has been  
de-rated to 80%.  
Notes:  
• MPC-H Series model numbers that end with the “-1” suffix include 20 Amp  
Circuit Breaker(s).  
• MPC-H Series model numbers that end with the “-2” suffix include 16 Amp  
Circuit Breaker(s).  
• MPC-V Series model numbers that end with “-3” include 16 Amp Circuit  
Breaker(s).  
• MPC-V Series model numbers that end with “-1” or “-2” include 20 Amp  
Circuit Breaker(s). The only exception is the MPC-20V-2, which includes 16  
Amp Circuit Breakers.  
To determine the exact model number for your MPC unit, either refer to the  
nameplate on the back of the unit, or access command mode as described  
in Section 3.2 and invoke the Product Status command; in the Text Interface,  
type /J *and press [Enter]; in the Web Browser Interface, click on the  
"Product Status" Link on the left hand side of the screen.  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Getting Started  
3.1.2. Connect your PC to the MPC  
The MPC can either be controlled by a local PC, that communicates with the unit via  
serial port, controlled via external modem, or controlled via TCP/IP network. In order  
to switch plugs or select parameters, commands are issued to the MPC via either the  
Network Port or Console Port. Note that it is not necessary to connect to both the  
Network and Console Ports, and that the Console Port can be connected to either a  
local PC or External Modem.  
Network Port: Connect your 10Base-T or 100Base-T network interface to the MPC  
Network port.  
Console Port: Use a null modem cable to connect your PC COM port to the MPC  
COM (RS232) Port.  
External Modem: Use a standard AT to Modem cable to connect your external  
modem to the MPC Console (RS232) Port.  
3.2. Communicating with the MPC  
When properly installed and configured, the MPC will allow command mode access via  
Telnet, Web Browser, SNMP, SSH client, modem, or local PC.  
Notes:  
• In order to ensure security, Browser access is disabled in the default state.  
To enable Web Browser access, please refer to Section 5.9.  
• Default MPC serial port parameters are set as follows: 9600 bps,  
RTS/CTS Handshaking, 8 Data Bits, One Stop Bit, No Parity. Although these  
parameters can be easily redefined, for this Quick Start procedure, it is  
recommended to configure your communications program to accept the  
default parameters.  
• The MPC features a default IP Address (192.168.168.168) and a default  
Subnet Mask (255.255.255.0.) This allows network access to command  
mode, providing that you are contacting the MPC from a node on the same  
subnet. When attempting to access the MPC from a node that is not on the  
same subnet, please refer to Section 5.9 for further configuration instructions.  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Getting Started  
1. Access Command Mode: The MPC includes two user interfaces; the Text Interface  
and the Web Browser Interface. The Text Interface is available via Local PC, SNMP,  
SSH Client, Telnet, or Modem, and the Web Browser interface is only available via  
TCP/IP network. In addition, when contacted via PDA, the MPC will also present  
a third interface, which is similar to the Web Browser Interface, but offers limited  
command functions.  
a) Via Local PC: Start your communications program and then press [Enter].  
b) Via SSH Client: Start your SSH client, enter the default IP address  
(192.168.168.168) for the MPC and invoke the connect command.  
c) Via Web Browser: Make certain that Web Browser access is enabled as  
described in the Section 5.9 in this User's Guide. Start your JavaScript enabled  
Web Browser, enter the default MPC IP address (192.168.168.168) in the Web  
Browser address bar, and then press [Enter].  
d) Via Telnet: Make certain that Telnet access is enabled as described in  
Section 5.9. Start your Telnet client, and enter the MPC’s default IP address  
(192.168.168.168).  
e) Via Modem: Make certain that the MPC's serial Console Port is configured  
for Modem Mode as described in Section 5.8, then use your communications  
program to dial the number for your external Modem connected to the  
Console Port.  
2. Username / Password Prompt: A message will be displayed, which prompts you  
to enter your username (Login) and password. The default username is “super”  
(all lower case, no quotes), and the default password is also “super”. If a valid  
username and password are entered, the MPC will display either the Main Menu  
(Web Browser Interface) or the Port Status Screen (SSH, Telnet, or Modem.)  
3. Test Switching Functions: You may wish to perform the following tests in order  
to make certain that the MPC is responding to commands. When switching and  
reboot commands are executed, the MPC's Status LEDs will also turn On or Off to  
indicate the status of each outlet.  
a) Reboot Outlet:  
i.  
Web Browser Interface: Click on the "Plug Control" link on the left hand  
side of the screen to display the Plug Control Menu. From the Plug  
Control Menu, click the down arrow in the row for Plug A1 to display the  
dropdown menu, then select "Reboot" from the drop down menu and click  
on the "Execute Plug Actions" button.  
ii. Text Interface: Type /BOOT A1and press [Enter].  
b) Switch Outlet Off:  
i.  
Web Browser Interface: From the Plug Control Menu, click the down  
arrow in the "Action" column for Plug A1 to display the drop down menu,  
then select "Off" from the drop down menu and click on the "Execute Plug  
Actions" button.  
ii. Text Interface: Type /OFF A1and press [Enter].  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
c) Switch Outlet On:  
i. Web Browser Interface: From the Plug Control Menu, click the down  
arrow in the "Action" column for Plug A1 to display the drop down menu,  
then select "On" from the drop down menu and click on the "Execute Plug  
Actions" button.  
ii. Text Interface: Type /ON A1and press [Enter].  
3. Logging Out: When you log off using the proper MPC command, this ensures  
that the unit has completely exited from command mode, and is not waiting for the  
inactivity timeout to elapse before allowing additional connections.  
a) Web Browser Interface: Click on the "LOGOUT" link on the left hand side of  
the screen.  
b) Text Interface: Type /Xand press [Enter].  
3.3. Installing and Operating the Optional MPC-DISPLAY Hardware  
Use the supplied RJ-45 cable to connect the optional MPC-DISPLAY unit to the MPC  
unit. Connect one end of the RJ-45 cable to the “Remote” connector on the MPC front  
panel; connect the other end of the cable to the RJ-45 receptacle on the back side of  
the MPC-DISPLAY unit.  
Note: The AUX Ports, located adjacent to the Remote port on the MPC front  
panel, are used for connection to additional, remote MPC units. For more  
information on connecting an MPC-DISPLAY unit or additional MPC units to the  
AUX or Remote ports, please refer to Sections 4.5 and 5.8.2 and Appendix C.2.  
The MPC-DISPLAY unit will receive five volts of power (for operation) via the RJ-45 cable  
connected to the MPC unit.  
To display amperage, kilowatts, volts and temperature for the MPC units that are  
attached to the MPC-DISPLAY, press the “Display” button to toggle to the LED for  
the desired MPC unit, and then press the “Display Selection” button several times to  
select the desired reading; each time the “Display Selection” button is pressed, the  
LED indicator adjacent to the button will toggle from Amps to kiloWatts to Volts to  
Temperature.  
This completes the Quick Start Guide for the MPC. Prior to placing the unit into  
operation, it is recommended to refer to the remainder of this User’s Guide for important  
information regarding advanced configuration capabilities and more detailed operation  
instructions. If you have further questions regarding the MPC unit, please contact WTI  
Customer Support as described in Appendix D.  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Hardware Installation  
4.1. Connecting the Power Supply Cables  
4.1.1. Installing the Power Supply Cable Keepers  
The MPC includes cable keepers, which are designed to prevent the power supply  
cables from being accidentally disconnected from the unit.  
Note: In addition to the Power Supply Cable Keepers described in this  
section, a Power Outlet Cable Keeper is also available for MPC-20V series  
units. Please refer to Appendix F for more information.  
MPC-8H-1 and MPC-8H-2: The cable keepers for these units must be installed by  
the user.  
1. First make certain that both of the MPC-8H’s two power cables are  
disconnected from the power source.  
2. Install the two standoff screws (included with the cable keeper) in the two  
vacant screw holes, located between the two power inlets. When the standoff  
screws are in place, thread the two screws supplied with the cable keeper into  
the top end of both of the standoff screws.  
3. Connect the power cables to the power inlets. Check to make sure that both  
cables are firmly seated in the power inlet connectors.  
4. Install the cable keeper plate, by slipping the plate over the two screws which  
protrude from the top of the standoffs. Slip the cable keeper plate into place,  
so that the notches in the bottom of the plate slip over the power cables, and  
the holes in the middle of the plate align with the screws in the tops of the  
standoffs.  
5. Tighten the two screws into the standoffs to secure the plate and the power  
supply cables to the unit. Check to make certain that the cables are held firmly  
in place by the cable keepers.  
MPC-16H-1 and MPC-16H-2: Sixteen-plug, horizontal units include pre-installed  
cable keepers. When attaching the power supply cables to the unit, first swing the  
cable keepers out of the way, then plug the power cables securely into the power  
inputs. When the cables are in place, snap the cable keepers over each plug to  
secure the cables to the unit.  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hardware Installation  
MPC-18H-1 and MPC-18H-2: The cable keeper for these units must be installed  
by the user.  
1. First make certain that the MPC-18H’s power supply cable is disconnected  
from the power source.  
2. Install the two standoff screws (included with the cable keeper) in the two  
vacant screw holes, located next to the power inlet. When the standoff screws  
are in place, thread the two screws supplied with the cable keeper into the top  
end of both of the standoff screws.  
3. Connect the power cable to the power inlet. Check to make sure that the cable  
is firmly seated in the power inlet connector.  
4. Install the cable keeper plate, by slipping the plate over the two screws which  
protrude from the top of the standoffs. Slip the cable keeper plate into place,  
so that one of the notches in the bottom of the plate slips over the power cable,  
and the holes in the middle of the plate align with the screws in the tops of the  
standoffs.  
5. Tighten the two screws into the standoffs to secure the plate and the power  
supply cable to the unit. Check to make certain that the cable is held firmly in  
place by the cable keeper.  
MPC-20V Series: The cable keepers for 20-outlet, vertical models must be  
installed by the user. Note that MPC-20V series units that feature non-detachable  
power supply cables do not include cable keepers.  
1. First make certain that the MPC’s power supply cable(s) are disconnected  
from the power source. Note that some MPC-20V Series units have two power  
supply cables and others have only one.  
2. Install the screws (included with the cable keeper) in the two vacant screw  
holes, located directly below the power inlet(s). Do not overtighten the two  
screws; leave enough room for the Cable Keeper assembly to be slid into place  
in Step 4 below.  
3. Connect the power cable(s) to the power inlet(s). Check to make sure that the  
cable(s) are firmly seated in the power inlet connector(s).  
4. Install the cable keeper plate, by slipping the plate over the two screws that  
were installed under the power inlets in Step 2 above. Slip the cable keeper  
into place, so that the notches in the front of the plate slip under the power  
cables, securing the cables in place.  
5. Tighten the two screws to secure the plate and the power supply cables to  
the unit. Check to make certain that the cables are held firmly in place by the  
cable keepers.  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hardware Installation  
4.1.2. Connect the MPC to Your Power Supply  
Refer to the cautions listed below and at the beginning of this User's Guide, and then  
connect the MPC unit to an appropriate power supply.  
Note: Some MPC units are shipped with one or two detachable 125 VAC,  
15 Amp "Starter" Cables. These cable(s) will allow you to connect a 120 VAC  
MPC unit to power for bench testing and initial start up and are adequate  
for applications that only require 15 Amps. For higher amp power switching  
applications, please refer to the WTI Power Cable Guide (which can be found  
on the CDROM included with the unit) or use appropriate cables.  
CAUTIONS:  
• Before attempting to install this unit, please review the warnings and  
cautions listed at the front of the user’s guide.  
• This device should only be operated with the type of power source  
indicated on the instrument nameplate. If you are not sure of the type of  
power service available, please contact your local power company.  
• Reliable earthing (grounding) of this unit must be maintained. Particular  
attention should be given to supply connections when connecting to  
power strips, rather than directly to the branch circuit.  
4.2. Connection to Switched Outlets  
Connect the power cord from your switched device to one of the AC Outlets on the MPC  
unit. Note that when power is applied to the MPC, the AC Outlets will be switched “ON”  
by default.  
Note that some MPC models feature two separate power branches, while others  
may feature only one power branch. Please refer to the table shown in Section 1 or  
Section 3.1 for more information regarding maximum power and load ratings for your  
specific MPC model.  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hardware Installation  
4.3. Serial Console Port Connection  
The MPC's Console Port is a male, RS-232C DB9 connector, wired in a DCE  
configuration. In the default state, the Console port is configured for 9600 bps, no  
parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit. The Console Port can be connected to either an external  
modem or a local PC, but not both items at the same time. Appendix B.1 describes the  
Console Port interface.  
4.3.1. Connecting a Local PC  
Use the supplied null modem cable to connect your PC COM port to the MPC's RS232  
Console Port. Make certain that the Serial Port Mode is set to “Normal” as described in  
Section 5.8.1.  
4.3.2. Connecting an External Modem  
When connecting directly to an external modem, use a standard AT to Modem cable.  
Make certain that the modem is initialized at the same default parameters as the MPC  
Console Port. Make certain that the MPC Serial Port Mode is set to “Modem” as  
described in Section 5.8.1.  
4.4. Connecting the Network Cable  
The Network Port is an RJ45 Ethernet jack, for connection to a TCP/IP network.  
Connect your 100Base-T cable to the Network Port. Note that the MPC includes a  
default IP address (192.168.168.168) and a default subnet mask (255.255.255.0.) When  
installing the MPC in a working network environment, it is recommended to define  
network parameters as described in Section 5.9.  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hardware Installation  
4.5. Connecting Remote MPC Units to the AUX Ports  
If your application requires control of more outlets than are provided on your MPC unit,  
you can also connect up to three additional MPC or BPM units to the AUX ports on the  
MPC front panel. This allows you to control up to 80 outlets via a single IP address.  
To connect optional, Auxiliary MPC units to your local MPC unit, proceed as follows:  
1. Install Snap Adapter: Insert a DX9F-DTE-RJ snap adapter (not included) into the  
serial console port on the Auxiliary MPC unit. The DX9F-DTE-RJ snap adapter can  
be ordered from the WTI sales department. For a description of the Snap Adapter  
interface, please refer to Appendix C.1.  
2. Install RJ-45 Cable: Connect a straight RJ-45 cable from the AUX port on your  
local MPC unit to the DX9F-DTE-RJ snap adapter, which has been installed in the  
serial Console port on the Auxiliary MPC unit.  
3. Configuration and Operation: Please refer to Section 5.8.2 for additional  
configuration instructions for Auxiliary units, and Section 9 for additional operating  
instructions.  
Notes:  
• Once the local MPC unit and Auxiliary units have been installed and  
configured, you must take care when temporarily disconnecting Auxiliary  
unit(s) from the local unit. Prior to disconnecting Auxiliary units, note the  
specific AUX port that each Auxiliary unit is initially connected to, and make  
certain to reconnect each Auxiliary unit to the same AUX port where it was  
previously connected.  
• If Auxiliary units are connected to a different AUX port from where they were  
located when previously configured, then the local MPC unit and Auxiliary  
units must be reconfigured in order to adapt to this change.  
• When an Auxiliary unit is connected to the AUX port on your local MPC unit,  
the AUX ports on the Auxiliary unit will be automatically disabled.  
• The AUX ports can also be used for connection to console ports on devices  
such as servers and other rack mount equipment. For more information,  
please refer to Appendix C.3 and Section 5.8.2.  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hardware Installation  
4.6. Connecting the Optional MPC-DISPLAY Unit  
Use an RJ-45 cable to connect the optional MPC-DISPLAY unit to the MPC unit.  
Connect one end of the RJ-45 cable to the “Remote” connector on the MPC front panel;  
connect the other end of the cable to the RJ-45 receptacle on the back side of the  
MPC-DISPLAY unit as described in Appendix C.2.  
The MPC-DISPLAY unit will receive five volts of power (for operation) via the RJ-45 cable  
connected to the MPC unit.  
To display amperage, kilowatts, volts and temperature for the MPC units that are  
attached to the MPC-DISPLAY, press the “Display” button to toggle to the LED for  
the desired MPC unit, and then press the “Display Selection” button several times to  
select the desired reading; each time the “Display Selection” button is pressed, the  
LED indicator adjacent to the button will toggle from Amps to Kilowatts to Volts to  
Temperature.  
4.7. Rack Mounting  
MPC-H Series Units: To install an MPC-H Series (horizontal format) unit in your  
equipment rack, simply attach the L-Brackets included with the unit and then mount the  
unit in a vacant space in your equipment rack as described in Appendix E.1.  
MCP-V Series Units: There are a number of possible rack mounting configurations for  
MPC-V Series (vertical format) units; vertical format MPC units can be mounted in the  
front or rear of the rack, mounted on the outside of the rack, or mounted in a variety of  
different makes and models of equipment racks. For a description of the most common  
rack mounting options available for MPC-V units, please refer to Appendix E.  
This completes the MPC installation instructions. Please proceed to the next Section for  
instructions regarding unit configuration.  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Basic Configuration  
This section describes the basic configuration procedure for all MPC units. For more  
information on Reboot Options and Alarm Configuration, please refer to Section 6 and  
Section 7.  
5.1. Communicating with the MPC Unit  
In order to configure the MPC, you must first connect to the unit, and access command  
mode. Note that, the MPC offers two separate configuration interfaces; the Web  
Browser Interface and the Text Interface.  
In addition, the MPC also offers three different methods for accessing command mode;  
via network, via modem, or via local console. The Web Browser interface is only  
available via network, and the Text Interface is available via network (SSH or Telnet),  
modem or local PC.  
5.1.1. The Text Interface  
The Text Interface consists of a series of simple ASCII text menus, which allow you to set  
options and define parameters by entering the number for the desired option using your  
keyboard, and then typing in the value for that option.  
Since the Web Browser Interface and Telnet accessibility are both disabled in the  
default state, you will need to use the Text Interface to contact the MPC via Local PC  
or SSH connection when setting up the unit for the first time. After you have accessed  
command mode using the Text Interface, you can then enable Web Access and Telnet  
Access, if desired, in order to allow future communication with the unit via Web Browser  
or Telnet. You will not be able to contact the unit via Web Browser or Telnet until you  
have specifically enabled those options.  
Once Telnet Access is enabled, you will then be able to use the Text Interface to  
communicate with the MPC via local PC, Telnet or SSH connection. You can also use  
the Text Interface to access command mode via an external modem installed at the  
MPC's serial Console Port.  
In order to use the Text Interface, your installation must include:  
Access via Network: The MPC must be connected to your TCP/IP Network, and  
your PC must include a communications program (such as HyperTerminal.)  
Access via Modem: An external modem must be installed at the MPC's RS-232  
Console Port, a phone line must be connected to the external modem, and the  
Console Port must be configured for Modem Mode. In addition, your PC must  
include a communications program.  
Access via Local PC: Your PC must be physically connected to the MPC’s RS232  
Console Port as described in Section 4, the MPC's Console Port must be configured  
for Normal Mode, and your PC must include a communications program.  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
To access command mode via the Text Interface, proceed as follows:  
Note: When communicating with the unit for the first time, you will not be  
able to contact the unit via Telnet, until you have accessed command mode,  
via Local PC or SSH Client, and used the Network Parameters Menu to enable  
Telnet as described in Section 5.9.  
1. Contact the MPC Unit:  
a) Via Local PC: Start your communications program and press [Enter]. Wait  
for the connect message, then proceed to Step 2.  
b) Via Network: The MPC includes a default IP address (192.168.168.168) and a  
default subnet mask (255.255.255.0.) This allows you to contact the unit from  
any network node on the same subnet, without first assigning an IP Address to  
the unit. For more information, please refer to Section 5.9.  
i.  
Via SSH Client: Start your SSH client, and enter the MPC’s IP Address.  
Invoke the connect command, wait for the connect message, then  
proceed to Step 2.  
ii. Via Telnet: Start your Telnet Client, and then Telnet to the MPC’s IP  
Address. Wait for the connect message, then proceed to Step 2.  
c) Via Modem: Use your communications program to dial the number for the  
external modem which you have connected to the MPC’s Console Port.  
2. Login / Password Prompt: A message will be displayed, which prompts you to  
enter a username (login name) and password. The default username is "super" (all  
lower case, no quotes), and the default password is also "super".  
3. If a valid username and password are entered, the MPC will display the Plug Status  
Screen, shown in Figure 5.1.  
LOCAL - Managed Power Controller  
PLUG | NAME  
Site ID: (undefined)  
| STATUS | BOOT DELAY | DEFAULT | PRIORITY  
-----+--------------------------+--------+------------+---------+----------  
A1 | Local_InfeedA_Outlet1  
A2 | Local_InfeedA_Outlet2  
A3 | Local_InfeedA_Outlet3  
A4 | Local_InfeedA_Outlet4  
A5 | Local_InfeedA_Outlet5  
A6 | Local_InfeedA_Outlet6  
A7 | Local_InfeedA_Outlet7  
A8 | Local_InfeedA_Outlet8  
A9 | Local_InfeedA_Outlet9  
A10 | Local_InfeedA_Outlet10  
B1 | Local_InfeedB_Outlet1  
B2 | Local_InfeedB_Outlet2  
B3 | Local_InfeedB_Outlet3  
B4 | Local_InfeedB_Outlet4  
B5 | Local_InfeedB_Outlet5  
B6 | Local_InfeedB_Outlet6  
* = Plug in BUSY state  
| ON  
| ON  
| ON  
| ON  
| ON  
| ON  
| ON  
| ON  
| ON  
| ON  
| ON  
| ON  
| ON  
| ON  
| ON  
| ON  
| 0.5 Secs |  
| 0.5 Secs |  
| 0.5 Secs |  
| 0.5 Secs |  
| 0.5 Secs |  
| 0.5 Secs |  
| 0.5 Secs |  
| 0.5 Secs |  
| 0.5 Secs |  
| 0.5 Secs |  
| 0.5 Secs |  
| 0.5 Secs |  
| 0.5 Secs |  
| 0.5 Secs |  
| 0.5 Secs |  
| 0.5 Secs |  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enter: <CR> for more plugs, <ESC> to quit ...  
Figure 5.1: The Plug Status Screen (Text Interface; MPC-20V Shown)  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.1.2. The Web Browser Interface  
The Web Browser Interface consists of a series of web forms, which can be used to  
select configuration parameters and perform reboot operations, by clicking on radio  
buttons and/or entering text into designated fields.  
Note: In order to use the Web Browser Interface, Web Access must first be  
enabled via the Text Interface Network Parameters Menu (/N), the MPC must  
be connected to a TCP/IP network, and your PC must be equipped with a  
JavaScript enabled web browser.  
1. Start your JavaScript enabled Web Browser, key the MPC’s IP address (default =  
192.168.168.168) into the web browser’s address bar, and press [Enter].  
2. Username / Password Prompt: A message box will prompt you to enter your  
username and password. The default username is "super" (all lower case, no  
quotes), and the default password is also "super".  
3. If a valid username and password are entered, the MPC Home Screen will appear  
as shown in Figure 5.2.  
Figure 5.2: The Home Screen (Web Browser Interface)  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.1.3. Access Via PDA  
In addition to the Web Browser Interface and Text Interface, the MPC command mode  
can also be accessed by PDA devices. Note however, that due to nature of most PDAs,  
only a limited selection of MPC operating and status display functions are available to  
users who communicate with the unit via PDA.  
When the MPC is operated via a PDA device, only the following functions are available:  
• Product Status Screen (Section 8.1)  
• Plug Status Screen (Section 8.3)  
• Plug Group Status Screen (Section 8.4)  
• Plug Control Screen (Section 9.1.1)  
• Plug Group Control Screen (Section 9.1.2)  
• Current & Power Metering (Section 8.5)  
• Current History Graph (Section 8.6)  
For more information on these functions, please refer to the appropriate section listed  
next to each function in the list above.  
These screens will allow PDA users to review Plug Status and Plug Group Status, invoke  
switching and reboot commands, display Current Metering Readings, show Current  
History and display the Site I.D. and firmware version. Note however, that PDA users are  
not allowed to change or review MPC configuration parameters.  
To configure the MPC for access via PDA, first consult your IT department for  
appropriate settings. Access the MPC command mode via the Text Interface or Web  
Browser interface as described in this section, then configure the MPC's Network Port  
accordingly, as described in Section 5.9.  
In most cases, this configuration will be adequate to allow communication with most  
®
PDAs. Note however, that if you wish to use a BlackBerry to contact the MPC,  
you must first make certain to configure the BlackBerry to support HTML tables, as  
described below:  
1. Power on the BlackBerry, and then click on the BlackBerry Internet Browser Icon.  
2. Press the Menu button, and then choose "Options."  
3. From the Options menu, choose "Browser Configuration," then verify to make  
certain that "Support HTML Tables" is checked (enabled.)  
4. Press the Menu button, and select "Save Options."  
When you have finished communicating with the MPC via PDA, it is important to always  
close the session using the PDA's menu functions, rather than by simply closing the  
browser window, in order to ensure that the MPC has completely exited from command  
mode, and is not waiting for the inactivity timeout period to elapse. For example, to  
close a session on a BlackBerry, press the Menu button and then choose "Close."  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.2. Configuration Menus  
Although the Web Browser Interface and Text Interface provide two separate means for  
selecting parameters, both interfaces allow access to the same set of basic parameters,  
and parameters selected via one interface will also be applied to the other. To access  
the configuration menus, proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Refer to the Help Screen (/H) and then enter the appropriate  
command to access the desired menu. When the configuration menu appears, key  
in the number for the parameter you wish to define, and follow the instructions in  
the resulting submenu.  
Web Browser Interface: Use the links and fly-out menus on the left hand of the  
screen (see Figure 5.2) to access the desired configuration menu. To change  
parameters, click in the desired field and key in the new value or select a value from  
the pull-down menu. To apply newly selected parameters, click on the "Change  
Parameters" button at the bottom of the menu or the "Set" button next to the field.  
The following sections describe options and parameters that can be accessed via each  
of the configuration menus. Please note that essentially the same set of parameters and  
options are available to both the Web Browser Interface and Text Interface.  
Notes:  
• Configuration menus are only available when you have logged into command  
mode using a password that permits Administrator Level commands.  
SuperUser accounts are able to view configuration menus, but are not  
allowed to change parameters.  
• Configuration menus are not available when you are communicating with the  
MPC via PDA  
• When defining parameters via the Text Interface, make certain to press the  
[Esc] key to completely exit from the configuration menu and save newly  
defined parameters. When parameters are defined via the Text Interface,  
newly defined parameters will not be saved until the "Saving Configuration"  
message has been displayed and the cursor returns to the command prompt.  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
SYSTEM PARAMETERS:  
1. User Directory  
2. Site-ID:  
(undefined)  
3. Real Time Clock:  
4. Invalid Access Lockout:  
5. Command Confirmation:  
6. Automated Mode:  
7. Command Prompt:  
8. Temperature Format:  
9. Temperature Calibration:  
10. Voltage Calibration:  
11. Log Configuration  
21. Audit Log:  
08/13/2008 18:07:55  
On  
On  
Off  
MPC  
Fahrenheit  
(undefined)  
(undefined)  
On - Without Syslog  
On - Without Syslog  
22. Alarm Log:  
23. Current Metering Log: On  
12. Callback Security:  
13. Front Panel Buttons:  
14. Power Configuration  
On - Callback (Without Password Prompt)  
On  
Enter: #<CR> to change,  
<ESC> to exit and save configuration ...  
Figure 5.3: The System Parameters Menu (Text Interface)  
Figure 5.4: The System Parameters Menu (Web Browser Interface)  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.3. Defining System Parameters  
The System Parameters menus are used to define the Site ID Message, set the system  
clock and calendar, and configure the Invalid Access Lockout feature and Callback  
feature.  
In the Text Interface, the System Parameters menu is also used to create and manage  
user accounts and passwords. Note however, that when you are communicating with  
the unit via the Web Browser Interface, accounts and passwords are managed and  
created via a separate menu that is accessed by clicking on the "Users" link on the left  
hand side of the menu.  
Text Interface: Type /Fand press [Enter]. The System Parameters Menu will  
appear as shown in Figure 5.3.  
Web Browser Interface: Move the cursor over the "General Parameters" link  
on the left hand side of the screen. When the General Parameters fly-out menu  
appears, click on the "System Parameters" link. The System Parameters menu will  
be displayed as shown in Figure 5.4.  
The System Parameters Menus are used to define the following:  
User Directory: This function is used to view, add, modify and delete user  
accounts and passwords. As discussed in Section 5.4 and Section 5.5, the User  
Directory allows you to set the security level for each account as well as determine  
which plugs each account will be allowed to control.  
Note: The "User Directory" option does not appear in the Web Browser  
Interface’s System Parameters menu, and is instead, accessed via the "Users"  
link on the left hand side of the menu.  
Site ID: A text field, generally used to note the installation site or name for the MPC  
unit. (Up to 32 chars.; Default = undefined.)  
Notes:  
• The Site ID cannot include double quotes.  
• The Site ID will be cleared if the MPC is reset to default settings.  
Real Time Clock: This prompt provides access to the Real Time Clock menu,  
which is used to set the clock and calendar, and to enable and configure the NTP  
(Network Time Protocol) feature as described in Section 5.3.1.  
Note: The "Real Time Clock" option does not appear in the Web Browser  
Interface’s System Parameters menu, and is instead, accessed via the "Real  
Time Clock" link in the General Parameters fly-out menu.  
Invalid Access Lockout: If desired, this feature can be used to automatically  
disable the MPC Console Port or Network Port after a user specified number of  
unsuccessful login attempts are made. For more information, please refer to  
Section 5.3.2. (Default = On.)  
Note: The "Invalid Access Lockout" item does not appear in the Web Browser  
Interface’s System Parameters menu, and is instead, accessed via the link in the  
General Parameters fly-out menu.  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
Command Confirmation: Enables/Disables the Command Confirmation feature.  
When enabled, a "Sure" prompt will be displayed before power switching and  
reboot commands are executed. When disabled, commands will be executed  
without further prompting. (Default = On.)  
Automated Mode: When enabled, the MPC will execute switching and reboot  
commands without displaying a confirmation prompt, status screen or confirmation  
messages. For more information, please refer to Section 5.3.3 or Section 9.3.  
(Default = Off.)  
Note: When this option is enabled, security functions are suppressed, and  
users are able to access configuration menus and control plugs without  
entering a password. If security is a concern and the Automated Mode is  
required, it is recommended to use the IP Security feature (Section 5.9.3) to  
restrict access.  
Command Prompt: Allows the Text Interface command prompt to be set to either  
"MPC", "IPS", "NPS", or "NBB." (Default = MPC.)  
Temperature Format: Determines whether the temperature is displayed as  
Fahrenheit or Celsius. (Default = Fahrenheit.)  
Temperature Calibration: Used to calibrate the unit's internal temperature sensing  
abilities. To calibrate the temperature, place a thermometer inside your equipment  
rack, in a location that usually experiences the highest temperature. After a few  
minutes, take a reading from the thermometer, and then key the reading into the  
configuration menu. In the Web Browser Interface, the temperature is entered  
at the System Parameters menu, in the Temperature Calibration field; in the Text  
Interface, the temperature is entered in a submenu of the System Parameters menu,  
accessed via the Temperature Calibration item. (Default = undefined.)  
Voltage Calibration: This option is used to calibrate the voltage readout on the  
MPC front panel. To calibrate the voltage, first determine the approximate voltage  
and then select the Voltage Calibration option and key in the correct voltage. In  
the Web Browser Interface, the voltage is entered at the System Parameters menu  
in the Voltage Calibration field. In the Text Interface, the voltage is entered in a  
submenu of the System Parameters menu, which is accessed via the Voltage  
Calibration item. (Default = undefined.)  
Audit Log: Enables/disables the Audit Log, and determines whether or not the  
Audit Log will send SYSLOG messages to notify you of each logged event. When  
enabled, the Audit Log will create a record of all power switching and reboot activity  
at the MPC unit, including reboots and switching caused by Load Shedding, Load  
Shedding Recovery, Ping No Answer Reboots and Scheduled Reboots. For more  
information on the MPC's event logging functions, please refer to Section 5.3.4.  
(Default = On without Syslog.)  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
Alarm Log: Enables/disables the Alarm Log, and determines whether or not  
the Alarm Log will send SYSLOG messages to notify you of each logged event.  
When enabled, the Alarm Log will create a record of all alarm activity at the MPC  
unit. For more information on the MPC's event logging functions, please refer to  
Section 5.3.4. (Default = On without Syslog.)  
Current/Power Log: Enables/disables Current Metering Log and Power Metering  
Log. When enabled, the Current Metering Log will create a record of current  
consumption by each MPC branch/circuit and the Power Metering Log will create a  
record of power consumption (in Kilowatt Hours) versus time. For more information  
on the MPC's event logging functions, please refer to Section 5.3.4. (Default = On).  
Callback Security: Enables / configures the Callback Security Function as  
described in Section 5.3.5. In order for this feature to function, a Callback number  
must also be defined for each desired user account as described in Section 5.5.  
(Default = On, Callback, Without Password Prompt.)  
Notes:  
• In the Text Interface, Callback Security Parameters are defined via a submenu  
of the Systems Parameters Menu, which is accessed via the Callback  
Security item.  
• In the Web Browser Interface, Callback Security Parameters are defined via a  
separate menu, which is accessed by clicking the "Callback Security" link on  
the left hand side of the screen.  
Front Panel Buttons: This item can be used to disable all front panel button  
functions, including the Display Selection Button and the reinitialization/default  
functions that are normally available via the Clear and Set buttons on the MPC front  
panel, as described in Section 2.4. (Default = On.)  
Power Configuration: Provides access to a menu which can be used to configure  
the Power Factor, Power Efficiency and Power Source as described in Section 5.3.6.  
5.3.1. The Real Time Clock and Calendar  
The Real Time Clock menu is used to set the MPC's internal clock and calendar. To  
access the Real Time Clock Menu, proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /Fand press [Enter]. The System Parameters menu will  
appear as shown in Figure 5.3. At the System Parameters menu, type 3and press  
[Enter] to display the Real Time Clock menu.  
Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "General Parameters" link on  
the left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, Click on the "Real  
Time Clock" link to access the Real Time Clock menu.  
The configuration menu for the Real Time Clock offers the following options:  
Date: Sets the Month, Date, Year and day of the week for the MPC’s real-time  
clock/calendar.  
Time: Sets the Hour, Minute and Second for the MPC’s real time clock/calendar.  
Key in the time using the 24-hour (military) format.  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
Time Zone: Sets the time zone, relative to Greenwich Mean Time. Note that the  
Time Zone setting will function differently, depending upon whether or not the NTP  
feature is enabled and properly configured. (Default = GMT (No DST).)  
NTP Enabled: The Time Zone setting is used to adjust the Greenwich Mean  
Time value (received from the NTP server) in order to determine the precise local  
time for the selected time zone.  
NTP Disabled: If NTP is disabled, or if the MPC is not able to access the NTP  
server, then status screens and activity logs will list the selected Time Zone and  
current Real Time Clock value, but will not apply the correction factor to the  
displayed Real Time Clock value.  
NTP Enable: When enabled, the MPC will contact an NTP server (defined via the  
NTP Address prompts) once a day, and update its clock based on the NTP server  
time and selected Time Zone. (Default = Off.)  
Notes:  
• The MPC will also contact the NTP server and update the time whenever you  
change NTP parameters.  
To cause MPC to immediately contact the NTP server at any time, make  
certain that the NTP feature is enabled and configured, then type /Fand  
press [Enter]. When the System Parameters menu appears, press [Esc].  
The MPC will save parameters and then attempt to contact the server, as  
specified by currently defined NTP parameters.  
Primary NTP Address: Defines the IP address or domain name (up to 64  
characters long) for the primary NTP server. (Default = undefined.)  
Note: In order to use domain names for web addresses, DNS parameters must  
first be defined as described in Section 5.9.5.  
Secondary NTP Address: Defines the IP address or domain name (up to 64  
characters long) for the secondary, fallback NTP Server. (Default = undefined.)  
Note: In order to use domain names for web addresses, DNS parameters must  
be defined as described in Section 5.9.5.  
NTP Timeout: The amount of time in seconds, that will elapse between each  
attempt to contact the NTP server. When the initial attempt is unsuccessful, the  
MPC will retry the connection four times. If neither the primary nor secondary NTP  
server responds, the MPC will wait 24 hours before attempting to contact the NTP  
server again. (Default = 3 Seconds.)  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.3.2. The Invalid Access Lockout Feature  
When properly configured and enabled, the Invalid Access Lockout feature will watch all  
login attempts made at the Network Port and serial Console Port. If the port exceeds the  
selected number of invalid attempts, then the port where the Invalid Attempts occurred  
will be automatically disabled for a user-defined length of time (Lockout Duration.) The  
Invalid Access Lockout feature uses two separate counters to track invalid access  
attempts:  
Serial Port Counter: Counts invalid access attempts at the RS232 Console Port.  
If the number of invalid attempts at the port exceeds the user-defined Lockout  
Attempts value, then the port will be locked.  
Telnet, SSH and Web Browser Counter: Counts all invalid attempts to access  
command mode via Telnet, SSH or Web Browser interface. If the number of  
cumulative invalid attempts exceeds the user-defined Lockout Attempts value, then  
the Network Port will be locked.  
Note: In the Web Browser Interface, the Invalid Access Lockout item does not  
appear in the System Parameters Menu, and is instead accessed via the "Invalid  
Access Lockout" link on the left hand side of the screen.  
Note that when an Invalid Access Lockout occurs, you can either wait for the Lockout  
Duration period to elapse (after which, the MPC will automatically reactivate the port), or  
you can issue the /UL command (type /ULand press [Enter]) via the Text Interface to  
instantly unlock all of the MPC's logical network ports.  
Notes:  
• When the Invalid Access Lockout Alarm has been enabled as described  
in Section 7.7, the MPC can also provide notification via email, Syslog  
Message, and/or SNMP trap whenever an Invalid Access Lockout occurs.  
• Invalid Access Lockout parameters, defined via the System Parameters  
menu, will apply to both the Serial Console Port and the Network Port.  
• When the Console Port is locked, an external modem connected to that port  
will not answer.  
• When either the Console Port or Network Port are locked, the other port will  
remain unlocked, unless the Invalid Access Lockout feature has also been  
triggered at that port.  
• If any one of the MPC’s logical network ports is locked, all other network  
connections to the unit will also be locked.  
• All invalid access attempts at the MPC Network Port are cumulative (the  
count for invalid access attempts is determined by the total number of  
all invalid attempts at all 16 logical network ports.) If a valid login name/  
password is entered at any of the logical network ports, then the count for all  
MPC logical network ports will be restarted.  
• If the Network Port has been locked by the Invalid Access Lockout feature, it  
will still respond to the ping command (providing that the ping command has  
not been disabled at the Network Port.)  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
To access the configuration menu for the Invalid Access Lockout feature, proceed as  
follows:  
Text Interface: Type /Fand press [Enter]. The System Parameters menu will  
appear as shown in Figure 5.3. At the System Parameters menu, type 4and press  
[Enter] to display the Invalid Access Lockout configuration menu.  
Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "General Parameters" link on  
the left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, Click on the  
"Invalid Access Lockout" link to display the configuration menu for the Invalid  
Access Lockout feature.  
The Invalid Access Lockout configuration menus allow you to select the following:  
Lockout Enable: Enables/Disables the Invalid Access Lockout feature.  
(Default = On.)  
Lockout Attempts: The number of invalid attempts required in order to activate the  
Invalid Access Lockout feature. (Default = 9.)  
Lockout Duration: The length of time that logical network ports will remain locked  
when an Invalid Access Lockout occurs. If the duration is set at "Infinite", then ports  
will remained locked until the /UL command is issued. (Default = 30 Minutes.)  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.3.3. Automated Mode  
The Automated Mode allows the MPC to execute switching and reboot commands,  
without displaying menus or generating response messages. Automated Mode is  
designed to allow the MPC to be controlled by a device which can generate commands  
to control power switching functions without human intervention.  
When Automated Mode is enabled, power switching and reboot commands are  
executed without a “Sure?” confirmation prompt and without command response  
messages; the only reply to these commands is the “MPC>” prompt, which is  
re-displayed when each command is completed.  
Note that although Automated Mode can be enabled using either the Web Browser  
Interface or Text Interface, Automated Mode is designed primarily for users who wish to  
send ASCII commands to the MPC without operator intervention, and therefore does not  
specifically apply to the Web Browser Interface. When Automated Mode is enabled, the  
Web Browser Interface can still be used to invoke switching and reboot commands.  
Notes:  
• When the Automated Mode is enabled, password prompts will not be  
displayed at login, and you will be able to access Administrator Level  
command functions (including the configuration menus) and control plugs  
without entering a password.  
• If you need to enable the Automated Mode, but want to restrict network  
access to configuration menus, it is strongly recommended to enable and  
configure the IP Security Function as described in Section 5.9.3.  
To enable/disable the Automated Mode, go to the System Parameters menu (see  
Section 5.3,) and then set the Automated Mode” option to “On”. When Automated  
Mode is enabled, MPC functions will change as follows:  
1. All Password Security Suppressed: When a user attempts to access command  
mode, the password prompt will not be displayed at either the Console Port  
or Network Port. Unless specifically restricted by the IP Security Function, all  
users will be allowed to access both switching and configuration functions, and  
all commands will be immediately accepted without the requirement to enter a  
password.  
2. Status Screen Suppressed: The plug status screen will not be automatically  
displayed after commands are successfully executed. Note however, that the /S  
command can still be invoked to display the status screen as needed.  
3. “Sure?” Prompt Suppressed: All commands are executed without prompting for  
user confirmation.  
4. Error Messages Suppressed: Most error messages will be suppressed. Note  
however, that an error message will still be generated if commands are invoked  
using invalid formats or arguments.  
All other status display and configuration commands will still function as normal.  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.3.4. Log Configuration  
This feature allows you to create records of command activity, alarm actions and current  
and power consumption for the local MPC unit, as well as any optional, connected  
AUX MPC units (if present.) The Log features are enabled and configured via the  
System Parameters Menus. The ability to view the Current and Power Metering logs is  
individually enabled for each account via the User Directory as described in Section 5.5.  
Audit Log: The Audit log creates a record of all power switching and reboot activity  
at the MPC unit(s), including reboots and switching caused by Load Shedding,  
Load Shedding Recovery, Ping No Answer Reboots and Scheduled Reboots. Each  
Log record includes a description of the activity that caused the power switching or  
reboot, the username for the account that initiated the power switching or reboot  
and the time and date that the power switching or reboot occurred.  
Alarm Log: The Alarm log creates a record of all Alarm Activity at the MPC unit(s).  
Each time an alarm is triggered, the MPC will generate a record that lists the time  
and date of the alarm, the name of the Alarm that was triggered, and a description  
of the Alarm.  
Current Metering Log: The Current Metering Log provides a record of current  
consumption for the MPC unit(s). Each Log record will include the time and date,  
current and voltage readings for each available branch circuit and the temperature  
reading. The Current Metering Log can be downloaded in ASCII, CSV or XML  
format, and when viewed via the Web Browser Interface, can also be displayed as a  
graph.  
Note: If optional Auxiliary MPC units are connected to the AUX ports on your  
local MPC unit, the Log Function will also record events that occur at the  
Auxiliary units.  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.3.4.1. The Audit Log and Alarm Log  
The System Parameters menu allows you to select three different configuration  
parameters for the Audit Log and Alarm Log. Note that the Audit Log and Alarm Log  
function independently, and parameters selected for one log will not be applied to the  
other.  
Off: The Log is disabled, and command activity and/or alarm events will not be  
logged.  
On - With Syslog: The Log is enabled, and power switching, reboot activity and/or  
alarm events will be logged. The MPC will generate a Syslog Message every time a  
Log record is created.  
On - Without Syslog: The Log is enabled, and power switching, reboot activity  
and/or alarm events will be logged, but the MPC will not generate a Syslog  
Message every time a Log record is created. (Default Setting.)  
Notes:  
• In order for the Audit Log or Alarm Log to generate Syslog Messages,  
Syslog Parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5.9 and  
Section 11.1.  
• The Audit Log will truncate usernames that are longer than 22 characters,  
and display two dots (..) in place of the remaining characters.  
5.3.4.2. The Current Metering Log  
The System Parameters menu allows you to enable or disable Current Metering Log  
When disabled, the MPC will not log current, power, voltage or temperature readings.  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.3.4.3. Reading and Erasing Logs  
To read the status logs access the command mode, then proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /Land press [Enter] to display the Display Log menu. Select  
the desired Log from the menu, key in the appropriate number and press [Enter],  
and then follow the instructions in the resulting submenu.  
Web Browser Interface:  
Audit Log: Move the cursor over the "Logs" link on the left hand side of the  
screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "Audit Log" link.  
Alarm Log: Move the cursor over the "Logs" link on the left hand side of the  
screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "Alarm Log" link.  
Current Metering Status: Move the cursor over the "Current Metering" link on  
the left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the  
"Current Metering Status" link.  
Current History: Move the cursor over the "Current Metering" link on the  
left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the  
"Current History" link and then pick the desired display option from the resulting  
submenu.  
Power Range: To display power consumption over a user defined time period,  
move the cursor over the "Power Metering" link on the left hand side of the  
screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "Power Range" link and  
then specify the desired time period using the resulting submenu.  
Power History: Move the cursor over the "Power Metering" link on the left hand  
side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "Power History"  
link and then pick the desired display option from the resulting submenu.  
Notes:  
• The Current Metering Log and Power Metering Log menus allow you to  
display the Current Log in either graph format, ASCII format, CSS format or  
XML format.  
• You can also display current readings via the Current Metering function. In  
the Text Interface, type /M and then press [Enter].  
5-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
To erase log data, access command mode via the Text Interface, using an account that  
permits Administrator level commands, then type /Land press [Enter] to access the  
Display Logs menu and then proceed as follows:  
Audit Log: At the Display Logs menu, type 1and then press [Enter]. When the  
Audit Log appears, type Eand press [Enter] to erases the Audit Log.  
Alarm Log: At the Display Logs menu, type 2and then press [Enter]. When the  
Alarm Log appears, type Eand press [Enter] to erase the Alarm Log.  
Current Metering Log: At the Display Logs menu, type 3and press [Enter].  
When the Current Metering Log menu appears, type 4and press [Enter] to erase  
the Current Metering Log.  
Notes:  
• The MPC dedicates a fixed amount of internal memory for Audit Log records,  
and if log records are allowed to accumulate until this memory is filled,  
memory will eventually "wrap around," and older records will be overwritten  
by newer records.  
To save the Audit Log or Alarm Log as an ASCII file via the Web Browser  
Interface, click on the "Logs" link on the left hand side of the screen. When  
the Logs menu appears, right click the link for the Audit Log or Alarm Log,  
select "Save Target As", select text format, and save the document with a ".txt"  
filename extension.  
• Note that once records have been erased, they cannot be recovered.  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.3.5. Callback Security  
The Callback function provides an additional layer of security when callers attempt to  
access command mode via modem. When this function is properly configured, modem  
users will not be granted immediate access to command mode upon entering a valid  
password; instead, the unit will disconnect, and dial a user-defined number before  
allowing access via that number. If desired, users may also be required to re-enter the  
password after the MPC dials back.  
In order for Callback Security to function properly, you must first enable and configure  
the feature via the System Parameters menu as described in this section, and then  
define a callback number for each desired user account as described in Section 5.5. To  
configure and enable the Callback function, proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /Fand press [Enter] to access the System Parameters menu,  
then type 6and press [Enter] to display the Callback Security Menu.  
Web Browser Interface: Move the cursor over the General Parameters link on the  
left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "Callback  
Security" link to display the Callback Security Menu.  
In both the Text Interface and Web Browser Interface, the Callback Security Menu offers  
the following options:  
Callback Enable: This prompt offers five different configuration options for the  
Callback Security feature: (Default = On - Callback (Without Password Prompt.)  
Off: All Callback Security is disabled.  
On - Callback (Without Password Prompt): Callbacks will be performed for  
user accounts that include a Callback Number, and the login prompt will not be  
displayed when the user’s modem answers. If the account does not include a  
Callback Number, that user will be granted immediate access and a Callback will  
not be performed.  
On - Callback (With Password Prompt): Callbacks will be performed for user  
accounts that include a Callback Number, and the login prompt will be displayed  
when the user’s modem answers (accounts that include a Callback Number will  
be required to re-enter their username/password when their modem answers.) If  
the account does not include a Callback Number, then that user will be granted  
immediate access and a Callback will not be performed.  
On - Callback ONLY (Without Password Prompt): Callbacks will be performed  
for user accounts that include a Callback Number, and the username/password  
prompt will not be displayed when the user’s modem answers. Accounts that  
do not include a Callback Number will not be able to access command mode via  
modem.  
On - Callback ONLY (With Password Prompt): Callbacks will be performed  
for user accounts that include a Callback Number, and the username/password  
prompt will be displayed when the user’s modem answers (users will be required  
to re-enter their username/password when their modem answers.) Accounts that  
do not include a Callback Number will not be able to access command mode  
via modem.  
5-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
Callback Attempts: The number of times that the MPC will attempt to contact the  
Callback number. (Default = 3 attempts.)  
Callback Delay: The amount of time that the MPC will wait between Callback  
attempts. (Default = 30 seconds.)  
Notes:  
• After configuring and enabling Callback Security, you must then define a  
callback phone number for each desired user account (as described in  
Section 5.5) in order for this feature to function properly.  
• When using the "On - Callback (With Password Prompt)" option, it is  
important to remember that accounts that do not include a callback number  
will be allowed to access command mode without callback verification.  
5.3.6. Power Source Configuration  
The Power Configuration menu allows you to adjust power measurements in order to  
obtain a more accurate determination of how much "real power" is being used by the  
devices that are connected to the MPC. Real Power is determined by the following  
equation:  
(Voltage * Amps) * Power Factor  
Real Power =  
Power Efficiency  
To define Power Configuration parameters, access the command mode using an  
account that permits access to Administrator level commands and then proceed as  
follows:  
Text Interface: Type /Fand press [Enter] to access the System Parameters menu.  
From the System Parameters menu, type 14and press [Enter] to display the Power  
Configuration menu.  
Web Browser Interface: Move the cursor over the General Parameters link on the  
left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "System  
Parameters" link to display the System Parameters menu.  
Notes:  
• In the Text Interface, all power source configuration parameters are defined  
via the Power Configuration menu.  
• In the Web Browser Interface, the Power Factor, Power Efficiency and Local/  
AUX Unit are selected via the System Parameters menu, and the Line Power  
Source and Voltage Setting are defined via a submenu that may be accessed  
by clicking on the "Configure Power Source" button.  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
The Power Source Configuration menu and/or System Parameters menu include the  
following power configuration parameters:  
Power Factor: Can be any value from 0.1 to 1.00. (Default = 1.00.)  
Power Efficiency: Can be any whole number from 1% to 100%. (Default = 100%.)  
Unit to Configure (Local/AUX Unit): This item is used to determine whether power  
configuration parameters will be applied to your local unit, or to an optional remote  
unit, connected to one of the local unit's AUX Ports. (Default = Local.)  
Line Power Source: This item is used to indicate the power source for each local/  
AUX unit. The Power Source can either be external or the power can be supplied  
by another connected MPC unit. When power is supplied by another, attached  
MPC unit, proper setting of the "Power Source" parameter prevents the power  
readings from the MPC unit from being incorrectly doubled when real power is  
calculated. (Default = External.)  
Voltage Setting: This parameter is used to select the voltage setting for any  
optional BPM Branch Power Managers that may be connected to your local unit's  
AUX Ports. Note that this parameter will only be shown when an optional BPM  
Branch Power Manager has been connected to one of the AUX Ports. The Voltage  
Setting can be defined as MPC, 120, 208 or 240 VAC.  
5-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.4. User Accounts  
Each time you attempt to access command mode, you will be prompted to enter  
a username (login) and password. The username and password entered at login  
determine which plug(s) you will be allowed to control and what type of commands you  
will be allowed to invoke. Each username / password combination is defined within a  
"user account."  
The MPC allows up to 128 user accounts; each account includes a username,  
password, security level, plug access rights, service access rights and an optional  
callback number.  
5.4.1. Command Access Levels  
In order to restrict access to important command functions, the MPC allows you to set  
the command access level for each user account. The MPC offers four different access  
levels: Administrator, SuperUser, User and View Only. The command privileges for  
each user account are set using the "Access Level" parameter in the Add User or Modify  
User menus.  
Each access level grants permission to use a different selection of commands; lower  
access levels are restricted from invoking configuration commands, while Administrators  
are granted access to all commands. The four different access levels can be  
summarized as follows:  
Administrator: Administrators are allowed to invoke all configuration and operation  
commands, can view all status screens, and can always direct switching and reboot  
commands to all of the MPC's switched outlets .  
SuperUser: SuperUsers are allowed to invoke all power switching and reboot  
commands and view all status screens. SuperUsers can view configuration menus,  
but are not allowed to change configuration parameters. SuperUsers are granted  
access to all MPC outlets.  
User: Users are allowed to invoke power switching and reboot commands and  
view all status screens, but can only apply commands to the outlets that they  
are specifically granted access to. In addition, Users are not allowed to view  
configuration menus or change configuration parameters.  
ViewOnly: Accounts with ViewOnly access, are allowed to view Status Menus,  
but are not allowed to invoke reboot and switching commands, and cannot view  
configurations menus or change configuration parameters. ViewOnly accounts  
can display the Plug Status screen, but can only view the status of plugs that are  
specifically allowed by the account.  
Section 17.2 summarizes command access for all four access levels.  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
In the default state, the MPC includes one predefined account that provides access to  
Administrator commands and allows control of all of the MPC's switched power outlets.  
The default username for this account is "super" (lowercase, no quotation marks), and  
the password for the account is also "super".  
Notes:  
• In order to ensure security, it is recommended that when initially setting up  
the unit, a new user account with Administrator access should be created,  
and the "super" account should then be deleted.  
• If the MPC is reset to default parameters, all user accounts will be cleared,  
and the default "super" account will be restored.  
5.4.2. Plug Access  
Each account can be granted access to a different selection of switched power outlets  
(plugs) and plug groups. When accounts are created, the Plug Access parameter and  
the Plug Group Access parameter in the Add User menu or Modify User menu can be  
used to grant or deny access to each plug or plug group by that account.  
In addition, each command access level also restricts the plugs and plug groups that  
the account will be allowed to access:  
Administrator: Accounts with Administrator access are always allowed to control  
all plugs and plug groups. Plug access cannot be disabled for Administrator level  
accounts.  
SuperUser: SuperUser accounts allow access to all plugs and plug groups. Port  
access cannot be disabled for SuperUser accounts.  
User: Accounts with User level access are only allowed to issue switching and  
reboot commands to the plugs and plug groups that have been specifically  
permitted via the "Plug Access" parameter in the Add User and Modify User menus.  
ViewOnly: Accounts with ViewOnly access are not allowed to issue switching and  
reboot commands to outlets or plug groups. ViewOnly accounts can display the  
On/Off state of plugs and plug groups, but are limited to the plugs and plug groups  
specified by the account.  
5-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.4.3. Port Access  
The Port Access parameter can be used to grant connection access to the MPC's DB-9  
Console port, RJ-45 Remote port and RJ-45 AUX ports. Normally, the Console port  
is used for connection to a local control device such as a laptop, the Remote port is  
used for connection to the optional MPC-DISPLAY unit, and the AUX ports are used  
for connection to additional remote MPC or BPM units. However, if your application  
requires communication with other devices in the equipment rack the Console port,  
Remote port and AUX ports can also be used for connection to these devices.  
Administrator and SuperUser level accounts are always allowed access to the Console  
Port, and User level accounts can always be granted access to the Console port. Note  
however, that in order to allow an account to access the AUX ports and Remote port,  
these ports must first be reconfigured as serial ports as described in Section 5.8.2.  
When the AUX ports and Remote port are left in their default configuration, accounts will  
not be allowed to create connections to these ports.  
In addition, the command access level will also determine which ports the account will  
be allowed to access, as summarized below:  
Administrator and SuperUser: Accounts with Administrator or SuperUser level  
command access are always allowed to connect to the Console Port. If the AUX  
and Remote ports are configured as serial ports, then Administrator and SuperUser  
level accounts will also be allowed to connect to these ports. Port access cannot  
be disabled for Administrator and SuperUser level accounts.  
User: User level accounts are only allowed to connect to the Console Port when  
port access has been specifically enabled for the account. If the AUX and Remote  
ports are configured as serial ports, then User level accounts can also be granted  
access to these ports.  
ViewOnly: Accounts with ViewOnly access are not allowed to create connections  
to the serial ports.  
5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.5. Managing User Accounts  
The User Directory function is employed to create new accounts, display parameters  
for existing accounts, modify accounts and delete accounts. Up to 128 different user  
accounts can be created. The "User Directory" function is only available when you have  
logged into command mode using an account that permits Administrator commands.  
Text Interface: Type /Fand press [Enter] to access the System Parameters Menu.  
From the System Parameters Menu, type 1and press [Enter] to access the User  
Directory.  
Web Interface: Click the "Users" link on the left hand side of the screen to access  
the User Directory menus.  
In both the Text Interface and the Web Browser Interface, the User Directory menu offers  
the following functions:  
View User Directory: Displays currently defined parameters for any MPC user  
account as described in Section 5.5.1.  
Add Username: Creates new user accounts, and allows you to assign a username,  
password, command level, plug access plug group access, service access and  
callback number, as described in Section 5.5.2.  
Modify User Directory: This option is used to edit or change account information,  
as described in Section 5.5.3.  
Delete User: Clears user accounts, as described in Section 5.5.4.  
Note: After you have finished selecting or editing user account parameters,  
make certain to save the new account information before proceeding. In the  
Web Browser Interface, click on the "Add User" button to save parameters; in  
the Text Interface, press the [Esc] key several times until the MPC displays the  
"Saving Configuration" message and the cursor returns to the command prompt.  
5.5.1. Viewing User Accounts  
The "View User Directory" option allows you to view details about each account,  
including the plugs and plug groups that the account is allowed to control and whether  
or not the account is allowed to invoke Administrator commands. The View User option  
will not display actual passwords, and instead, the password field will read "defined".  
Note that the View User Accounts function is only available to users who have accessed  
command mode using a password that permits Administrator Level commands. To view  
account details, proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: From the User Directory menu, type 1and press [Enter]. The MPC  
will display a screen which lists all defined user accounts. Key in the name of the  
desired account and then press [Enter].  
Web Browser Interface: From the User Directory menu, click the "View/Modify  
User" link. The MPC will display a menu that allows you to select the desired user  
and directory function. Select the "View User" button, and then click on the down  
arrow, scroll to the desired username, select the username, and then click  
"Choose User."  
5-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
ADD USERNAME TO DIRECTORY:  
1. Username:  
(undefined)  
2. Password:  
(undefined)  
3. Access Level:  
4. Port Access:  
5. Plug Access:  
6. Plug Group Access  
7. Service Access  
User  
(undefined)  
(undefined)  
(undefined)  
Serial Port, Telnet/SSH, Web  
8. Current/Power Metering On  
9. Callback Phone #:  
(undefined)  
Enter: #<CR> to select,  
<ESC> to return to previous menu ...  
Figure 5.5: The Add User Menu (Text Interface)  
Figure 5.6: The Add User Menu (Web Browser Interface)  
5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.5.2. Adding User Accounts  
The "Add Username" option allows you to create new accounts and assign usernames,  
passwords and plug and plug group access rights to each account. Note that the  
Add User function is only available when you have accessed command mode using a  
password that permits Administrator Level commands.  
To create new user accounts, activate the command mode using an account that  
permits access to Administrator level commands and then proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /Fand press [Enter] to access the System Parameters menu.  
From the System Parameters Menu, type 1and press [Enter] to display the User  
Directory Menu. From the User Directory menu, type 2and press [Enter]. The Add  
User menu (Figure 5.5) will be displayed.  
Web Browser Interface: Click the "Users" link to display the User Configuration  
menu. At the User Configuration menu, click the "Add User" link. The MPC will  
display the Add User menu (Figure 5.6.)  
The Add User Menu can define the following parameters for each new account:  
Username: Up to 32 characters long, and cannot include non-printable characters.  
Duplicate usernames are not allowed. (Default = undefined.)  
Password: Five to sixteen characters long, and cannot include non-printable  
characters. Note that passwords are case sensitive. (Default = undefined.)  
Access Level: Determines which commands this account will be allowed to  
access. This option can set the access level for this account to "Administrator",  
"SuperUser", "User" or "ViewOnly." For more information on Command Access  
Levels, please refer to Section 5.4.1 and Section 17.2. (Default = User.)  
Port Access: If the AUX and/or Remote ports have been reconfigured for use  
as Serial Ports as described in Section 5.8.2, then this parameter can be used to  
enable or disable an account's access to these ports. Normally, when the AUX  
ports and Remote port are configured for their default purpose (connection to  
additional, remote MPC units or the MPC-DISPLAY unit) the Port Access parameter  
will have no effect. (Defaults; Administrator and SuperUser = All Serial Ports  
Enabled, User = All Serial Ports Disabled..)  
Notes:  
• This parameter will only function when the AUX ports or Remote port have  
been configured as serial ports as described in Section 5.8.2.  
• When the AUX ports are used for connection to additional remote MPC units,  
all accounts will still be able to display status and control switching functions  
at the remote MPC units, providing that access to plugs on the remote units  
is allowed by the account's Access Level and Plug Access parameters.  
• Accounts with ViewOnly level command access cannot be granted access to  
the serial ports.  
5-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
Plug Access: Determines which outlet(s) this account will be allowed to control.  
(Defaults; Administrator and SuperUser = All Plugs On, User = All Plugs Off,  
ViewOnly = All Plugs Off.)  
Notes:  
• If your installation includes optional AUX units, please refer to Section 5.5.2.1  
for additional instructions regarding granting user account access to plugs  
on AUX units.  
• In the Text Interface, Plug Access is configured by selecting item 4 and then  
selecting the desired plugs from the resulting submenu.  
• In the Web Browser Interface, Plug Access is configured by clicking on the  
"plus" symbol to display the drop down menu, and then selecting the desired  
plugs from the drop down menu.  
• Administrator and SuperUser level accounts will always have access to all  
plugs.  
• User level accounts will only have access to the plugs that are defined via the  
"Plug Access" parameter.  
• ViewOnly accounts are allowed to display the On/Off status of plugs  
via the Plug Status Screen, but are limited to the plugs specified by the  
account. ViewOnly accounts are not allowed to invoke switching and reboot  
commands.  
Plug Group Access: Determines which plug groups this account will be allowed  
to control. Plug Groups allow you to define a selection of outlets, and then quickly  
assign those outlets to new accounts by allowing the account to access the Plug  
Group. For more information on Plug Groups, please refer to Section 5.6.  
(Defaults; Administrator and SuperUser = All Plug Groups On, User = All Plug  
Groups Off, ViewOnly = All Plug Groups Off.)  
Notes:  
• In order to use this feature, Plug Groups must first be defined as described in  
Section 5.6.  
• In the Text Interface, Plug Group Access is configured by selecting item 4  
and then selecting the desired Plug Group(s) from the resulting submenu.  
• In the Web Browser Interface, Plug Group Access is configured by clicking  
on the "plus" symbol to display the drop down menu, and then selecting the  
desired Plug Group(s) from the drop down menu.  
• Administrator and SuperUser level accounts will always have access to all  
plug groups.  
• User Level accounts will only have access to the plug groups that are  
defined via the Plug Group Access parameter.  
• ViewOnly accounts are allowed to display the On/Off status of plug groups  
via the Plug Status Screen, but are limited to the plug groups specified by the  
account. ViewOnly accounts are not allowed to invoke switching and reboot  
commands.  
5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
Service Access: Determines whether this account will be able to access command  
mode via Serial Port, Telnet/SSH or Web. For example, if Telnet/SSH Access is  
disabled for this account, then this account will not be able to access command  
mode via Telnet or SSH. (Default = Serial Port = On, Telnet/SSH = On,  
Web = On.)  
Current/Power Metering: Enables/Disables current and power metering for this  
account. When disabled, this account will not be able to see current or power  
readings or display current or power history. Note that in order for accounts to be  
able to display these logs, Current and Power Metering must be enabled via the  
Systems Parameters menu as described in Section 5.3. (Default = On.)  
Callback Number: Assigns a number that will be called when this account  
attempts to access command mode via modem, and the Callback Security  
Function has been enabled as described in Section 5.3.5. (Default = undefined.)  
Notes:  
• If the Callback Number is not defined, then Callbacks will not be performed  
for this user.  
• If the Callback Number is not defined for a given user, and the Callback  
Security feature is configured to use either of the "On - Callback" options,  
then this user will be granted immediate access to command mode via  
modem.  
• If the Callback Number is not defined for a given user, and the Callback  
Security feature is configured to use the "On - Callback ONLY" option, then  
this user will not be able to access command mode via Modem.  
• When using the "On - Callback (With Password Prompt)" option, it is  
important to remember that accounts that do not include a callback number  
will be allowed to access command mode without callback verification.  
Note: After you have finished selecting or editing account parameters, make  
certain to save the new account information before proceeding. In the Web  
Browser Interface, click on the "Add User" button to save parameters; in the Text  
Interface, press the [Esc] key several times until the MPC displays the "Saving  
Configuration" message and the cursor returns to the command prompt.  
5-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.5.2.1. Granting User Account Access to Plugs on AUX Units  
Web Browser Interface  
To grant a user account access to plugs on AUX units, simply select the desired plugs  
from the "Configure Plug Access" drop down menu as you normally would and then  
click on the "Add User" button.  
Text Interface  
When Plug Access for each user account is defined via the Text Interface, the following  
procedure is used to grant access to plugs on optional AUX/Remote units:  
1. From the Add User menu, type 5and press [Enter] to display the Plug Access  
menu. At the Plug Access menu, select plugs for your local MPC unit as you  
normally would, and when finished, press [Enter] to return to the Add User menu.  
2. To grant access to plugs on AUX units, type 4and press [Enter] again to return to  
the Plug Access menu, and then type >(greater than symbol) and press [Enter] to  
scroll to the desired AUX MPC unit. When the desired AUX unit is displayed, select  
plugs for the AUX unit as you normally would, and then press [Enter] to return to  
the Add User Menu.  
Note: The first line of the Plug Access menu will indicate the name of the AUX  
or Local MPC unit that is currently selected.  
3. Repeat Step 2 above to grant access to plugs on additional AUX units.  
4. When you have finished granting Plug Access rights to this user, define any other  
desired parameters for this account, and then make certain to press [Esc] several  
times until the "Saving Configuration" message is displayed and the unit returns to  
the MPC command prompt.  
5-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.5.3. Modifying User Accounts  
The "Edit User Directory" function allows you to edit existing user accounts in order to  
change parameters, plug access rights or Administrator Command capability. Note  
that the Edit/Modify User function is only available when you have accessed command  
mode using a password that permits Administrator Level commands. To modify a user  
account, proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: From the User Directory menu, type 3and press [Enter]. The MPC  
will display a screen which lists all user accounts. Key in the name of the account  
you wish to modify, and press [Enter].  
Web Browser Interface: From the User Configuration menu, click the "View/Modify  
User" link. The MPC will display a menu that allows you to select the user. Select  
the "Modify User" button, then click the down arrow, scroll to the name of the  
desired account, select the username, and then click "Choose User" to display the  
"Modify User" menu.  
Once you have accessed the Modify Users menu, use the menu options to redefine  
parameters in the same manner that is used for the Add User menu, as discussed in  
Section 5.5.2.  
Note: After you have finished changing parameters, make certain to save the  
changes before proceeding. In the Web Browser Interface, click on the "Modify  
User" button to save parameters; in the Text Interface, press the [Esc] key  
several times until the MPC displays the "Saving Configuration" message.  
5.5.4. Deleting User Accounts  
This function is used to delete individual user accounts. Note that the Delete User  
function is only available when you have accessed command mode using a password  
that permits Administrator Level commands. To delete an existing user account,  
proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: From the Users Directory menu, type 4and press [Enter]. The  
MPC will display a screen which lists all currently defined accounts. Key in the  
name of the account you wish to delete and press [Enter]. The MPC will delete the  
specified account without further prompting.  
Web Browser Interface: From the User Configuration menu, click the "View/Modify  
Users" link. The MPC will display a menu that lists all currently defined accounts.  
Select the "Delete User" box, then click the down arrow, scroll to the account you  
wish to delete, select the account, and then click "Choose User." The MPC will  
display a screen that lists details for the specified account; click "Delete User" to  
confirm deletion.  
Notes:  
• Deleted accounts cannot be automatically restored.  
• The MPC allows you to delete the default "super" account, which is included  
to permit initial access to command mode. Before deleting the "super"  
account, make certain to create another account that permits Administrator  
Access. If you do not retain at least one account with Administrator Access,  
you will not be able to invoke Administrator level commands.  
5-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.6. The Plug Group Directory  
The Plug Group Directory allows you to designate "groups" of plugs that are dedicated  
to a similar function, and will most likely be switched or rebooted all at the same time or  
controlled by the same type of user account.  
For example, an individual equipment rack might include an assortment of devices  
that belong to different departments or clients. In order to simplify the process of  
granting plug access rights to the accounts that will control power to these devices,  
you could assign all of the plugs for the devices belonging to Department A to a Plug  
Group named "Dept_A", and all of the plugs for the devices belonging to Department B  
to a Plug Group named "Dept_B". When user accounts are defined later, this would  
allow you to quickly grant access rights for all of the plugs for the devices belonging to  
Department A to the appropriate user accounts for Department A, by merely granting  
access to the Dept_A Plug Group, rather than by selecting the specific, individual plugs  
for each Department A user account.  
Likewise, Plug Groups allow you to direct On/Off/Boot commands to a series of plugs,  
without addressing each plug individually. Given the example above, you could quickly  
reboot all plugs for Department A, by either including the "Dept_A" Plug Group name in  
a /BOOT command line via the Text Interface, or by using the Plug Group Control menu  
via the Web Browser Interface.  
The Plug Group Directory function is only available when you have logged into  
command mode using an account that permits Administrator commands. To access the  
Plug Group Directory, proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /Gand press [Enter] to display the Plug Group Directory  
menu.  
Web Interface: Click the "Plug Group Directory" link on the left hand side of the  
screen to display the Plug Group Configuration menu.  
In both the Text Interface and the Web Browser Interface, the Plug Group Directory  
menu offers the following functions:  
View Plug Group Directory: Displays currently defined plug access rights for any  
MPC Plug Group as described in Section 5.6.1.  
Add Plug Group to Directory: Creates new Plug Groups, and allows you to assign  
plug access rights to each group as described in Section 5.6.2.  
Modify Plug Group Directory: This option is used to edit or change plug access  
rights for each Plug Group, as described in Section 5.6.3.  
Delete Plug Group from Directory: Clears Plug Groups that are no longer  
needed, as described in Section 5.6.4.  
5-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.6.1. Viewing Plug Groups  
The "View Plug Group Directory" option allows you to view the configuration of each  
Plug Group. Note that the View Plug Group Directory function is only available when  
you have accessed command mode using a password that permits Administrator Level  
commands. To view Plug Group details, proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /Gand press [Enter] to display the Plug Group Directory  
menu. From the Plug Group Directory menu, type 1and press [Enter]. The MPC  
will display a screen which lists all defined Plug Groups. Key in the name of the  
Plug Group that you need to review and then press [Enter].  
Web Browser Interface: Click the "Plug Group Directory" link on the left hand  
side of the screen to display the Plug Group Directory menu. From the Plug Group  
Directory menu, click the "View/Modify Plug Group" link. The MPC will display  
a menu that allows you to select the desired Plug Group and directory function.  
Select the "View Plug Group" button, and then click on the down arrow, scroll to the  
desired Plug Group, select the Plug Group, and then click "Choose Plug Group" to  
view the selected Plug Group.  
5-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
ADD PLUG GROUP:  
1. Plug Group Name:  
2. Plug Access:  
(undefined)  
(undefined)  
Enter: #<CR> to select,  
<ESC> to return to previous menu ...  
Figure 5.7: The Add Plug Group Menu (Text Interface)  
Figure 5.8: The Add Plug Groups Menu (Web Browser Interface)  
5-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.6.2. Adding Plug Groups  
The "Add Plug Group to Directory" option allows you to create new Plug Groups and  
assign plug access rights to each group. Note that the Add Plug Group function is only  
available when you have accessed command mode using a password that permits  
Administrator Level commands. To create new Plug Groups, proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /Gand press [Enter] to display the Plug Group Directory  
menu. From the Plug Group Directory menu, type 2and press [Enter]. The MPC  
will display the Add Plug Group menu as shown in Figure 5.7.  
Web Browser Interface: Click the "Plug Group Directory" link on the left hand  
side of the screen to display the Plug Group Directory menu. From the Plug Group  
Directory menu, click the "Add Plug Groups" link to display the Add Plug Group  
menu as shown in Figure 5.8.  
The Add Plug Group Menu can be used to define the following parameters for each new  
account:  
Plug Group Name: Assigns a name to the Plug Group. (Default = undefined.)  
Plug Access: Determines which plugs this Plug Group will be allowed to control.  
(Default = undefined.)  
Notes:  
• If your installation includes optional AUX units, please refer to Section 5.6.2.1  
for additional instructions regarding granting plug group access to plugs on  
AUX units.  
• In the Text Interface, Plug Access is configured by selecting item 2 and then  
selecting the desired plugs from the resulting submenu.  
• In the Web Browser Interface, Plug Access is configured by selecting the  
desired plugs from a list of all plugs in the Add Plug Group menu.  
• After you have finished defining or editing Plug Group parameters, make  
certain to save the changes before proceeding. In the Web Browser  
Interface, click on the "Add Plug Group" button to save parameters; in the  
Text Interface, press the [Esc] key several times until the MPC displays the  
"Saving Configuration" message and the cursor returns to the command  
prompt.  
5-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.6.2.1. Granting User Account Access to Plugs on AUX Units  
Web Browser Interface  
To grant a plug group access to plugs on AUX units, simply select the desired plugs  
from the "Add Plug Groups" menu as you normally would and then click on the "Add  
Plug Groups" button.  
Text Interface  
When Plug Access for each plug group is defined via the Text Interface, the following  
procedure is used to grant access to plugs on optional AUX/Remote units:  
1. From the Add Plug Group menu, type 2and press [Enter] to display the Plug  
Access menu. At the Plug Access menu, select plugs for your local MPC unit as  
you normally would, and when finished, press [Enter] to return to the Add Plug  
Group menu.  
2. To grant access to plugs on AUX units, type 2and press [Enter] again to return to  
the Plug Access menu, and then type >(greater than symbol) and press [Enter] to  
scroll to the desired AUX MPC unit. When the desired AUX unit is displayed, select  
plugs for the AUX unit as you normally would, and then press [Enter] to return to  
the Add Plug Group Menu.  
Note: The first line of the Plug Access menu will indicate the name of the AUX  
or Local MPC unit that is currently selected.  
3. Repeat Step 2 above to grant access to plugs on additional AUX units.  
4. When you have finished granting Plug Access rights to this plug group, make  
certain to press [Esc] several times until the "Saving Configuration" message is  
displayed and the unit returns to the MPC command prompt.  
5-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.6.3. Modifying Plug Groups  
The "Modify Plug Group" function allows you to edit existing Plug Groups in order  
to change plug access rights. Note that this function is only available when you  
have accessed command mode using a password that permits Administrator Level  
commands. To modify an existing Plug Group , proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /Gand press [Enter] to display the Plug Group Directory  
menu. From the Plug Group Directory menu, type 3and press [Enter]. The MPC  
will display the Modify Plug Group menu.  
Web Browser Interface: Click the "Plug Group Directory" link on the left hand  
side of the screen to display the Plug Group Directory menu. From the Plug Group  
Directory menu, click the "View/Modify Plug Group" link. The MPC will display a  
menu that lists all currently defined Plug Groups. Select the "Modify Plug Group"  
button, then click the down arrow, scroll to the Plug Group that you wish to modify,  
select the Plug Group, and then click "Choose Plug Group." The MPC will display  
the Modify Plug Group menu.  
Once you have accessed the Modify Plug Group menu, use the menu options to  
redefine parameters in the same manner that is used for the Add Plug Group menu, as  
discussed in Section 5.6.2.  
Note: After you have finished changing or editing parameters, make certain to  
save the changes before proceeding. In the Web Browser Interface, click on  
the "Modify Plug Groups" button to save parameters; in the Text Interface, press  
the [Esc] key several times until the MPC displays the "Saving Configuration"  
message and the cursor returns to the command prompt.  
5.6.4. Deleting Plug Groups  
This function is used to delete individual Plug Groups. Note that this function is only  
available when you have accessed command mode using a password that permits  
Administrator Level commands. To delete an existing user account, proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /Gand press [Enter] to display the Plug Group Directory  
menu. From the Plug Group Directory menu, type 4and press [Enter]. The MPC  
will display a screen which lists all currently defined Plug Groups. Key in the name  
of the Plug Group that you wish to delete and press [Enter]. The MPC will delete  
the specified account without further prompting.  
Web Browser Interface: Click the "Plug Group Directory" link on the left hand  
side of the screen to display the Plug Group Directory menu. From the Plug Group  
Directory menu, click the "View/Modify Plug Group" link. The MPC will display a  
menu that lists all currently defined Plug Groups. Select the "Delete Plug Group"  
button, then click the down arrow, scroll to the Plug Group you wish to delete,  
select the Plug Group, and then click "Delete Plug Group." The MPC will display a  
screen that lists details for the specified Plug Group; click "Delete Plug Group" to  
confirm deletion.  
Note: Deleted accounts cannot be automatically restored.  
5-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
PLUG_PARAMETERS - LOCAL  
1. A1 Plug Name:  
Local_InfeedA_Outlet1  
2. A1 Boot/Seq. Delay:  
3. A1 Power Up Default:  
0.5 Secs  
On  
4. A1 Boot Priority  
5. A2 Plug Name:  
:
1
Local_InfeedA_Outlet2  
6. A2 Boot/Seq. Delay:  
0.5 Secs  
7. A2 Power Up Default:  
On  
8. A2 Boot Priority  
9. A3 Plug Name:  
:
2
Local_InfeedA_Outlet3  
10. A3 Boot/Seq. Delay:  
0.5 Secs  
11. A3 Power Up Default:  
On  
12. A3 Boot Priority  
13. A4 Plug Name:  
:
3
Local_InfeedA_Outlet4  
14. A4 Boot/Seq. Delay:  
0.5 Secs  
15. A4 Power Up Default:  
16. A4 Boot Priority  
On  
4
:
Enter: #<CR> to select, “<” for previous plugs, “>” for next plugs.  
<ESC> to exit and save configuration ...  
Figure 5.9: The Plug Parameters Menu (Text Interface)  
Figure 5.10: The Plug Parameters Menu (Web Browser Interface)  
5-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.7. Defining Plug Parameters  
The Plug Parameters Menu is used to define Plug Names, boot/sequence delay times  
and Power Up Default values for each of the MPC's Switched AC Outlets. Note that this  
function is only available when you have accessed command mode using a password  
that permits Administrator Level commands. To define Plug Parameters, proceed as  
follows:  
Text Interface: Type /PLand then press [Enter]. The Plug Parameters Menu will  
be displayed as shown in Figure 5.9. To define Plug Parameters, key in the number  
for the desired parameter, press [Enter] and then follow the instructions in the  
resulting submenu.  
Web Browser Interface: Click the "Plug Parameters" link on the left hand side of  
the screen to display the Plug Group Directory menu (Figure 5.10.) To define Plug  
Parameters, either place the cursor in the Plug Name field and key in a new name,  
or locate the drop down menu for the desired parameter, click on the down arrow,  
and scroll to the desired parameter and select it. When you are finished selecting  
Plug Parameters, click the "Change Plugs" button to apply he new parameters.  
The Plug Parameters Menu allows you to define the following parameters:  
Plug Name: (Up to 16 Characters, Default = undefined.)  
Note: Plug Names must begin with either a lower case alphabetic letter  
or upper case alphabetic letter. Plug Names cannot begin with a number  
character or symbol character.  
Boot/Seq. Delay: When more than one plug is switched On or a reboot cycle is  
initiated, the Boot/Sequence delay determines how much time will elapse before  
the next plug is switched On. When the Boot/Sequence Delay is applied, the MPC  
will wait for the user-defined delay period before switching On the next plug. This  
allows time for the device connected to the first plug to adequately "wake up" before  
switching on power to the device connected to the next plug. When Reboot cycles  
and switching actions are initiated, the Boot/Sequence Delay will be applied as  
follows: (Default = 0.5 Second.)  
Reboot Cycle Delay: During a reboot cycle, the MPC will first switch all selected  
plugs "Off" (with a 0.5 second pause between each "Off" operation), and then  
begin to switch selected plugs back On again, pausing for the user-defined  
Boot/Sequence Delay before switching On the next plug. For example, if the  
Boot/Sequence Delay for Plug 3 is ten seconds, then the MPC will pause for ten  
seconds before proceeding to the next plug.  
"On" Sequence Delay: When two or more plugs are switched On, the MPC will  
pause for the user-defined Boot/Sequence Delay before switching On the next  
plug.  
5-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
Power Up Default: Determines how this plug will react when the Default  
command (/D) is invoked, or after power to the unit has been interrupted and then  
restored. After the default command is invoked, or power is restored, the MPC will  
automatically switch each plug On or Off as specified by the Power-Up Default.  
(Default = On).  
Note:  
• If you have accessed command mode using an account that permits  
Administrator or SuperUser level commands, then the Default command will  
be applied to all switched plugs.  
• If you have accessed command mode via an User Level account, then the  
Default command will only be applied to plugs allowed by your account.  
Boot Priority: When commands are applied to two or more plugs, the Boot  
Priority parameter determines the order in which the plugs will be switched On.  
The Plug that has been assigned a Boot Priority of "1" will always be switched on  
first, followed by the plug that has been assigned the Boot Priority of "2", and so  
forth. When you assign a boot priority to any given plug, then all subsequent plugs  
will have their priority lowered by one. For more information on the Boot Priority  
parameter, please refer to Section 5.7.1. (Default = All plugs prioritized according  
to Plug Number.)  
5-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.7.1. The Boot Priority Parameter  
Normally, when an "On" or "Reboot" command is invoked, the MPC will switch on its  
plugs in their default, numeric order. Although in many cases, the default, numeric order  
will work fine, there are other cases where an individual device (such as a router) must  
be switched on first, in order to support a second device that will be switched on later.  
The Boot Priority Parameter simplifies the process of setting the order in which plugs  
are switched On, by assigning a priority number to each plug, rather than by requiring  
the user to make certain that devices are always connected to the MPC in a set order.  
Likewise, when new devices are added to your equipment rack, the Boot Priority  
Parameter eliminates the need to unplug all existing devices and then rearrange the  
plugs connected to the MPC (and re-define plug parameters) to ensure that they are  
switched on in the desired order.  
Notes:  
• No two plugs can be assigned the same Boot Priority number.  
• When a higher Boot Priority is assigned to any given plug, all subsequent  
plugs will have their boot priorities lowered by a factor of 1.  
• The Boot Priority is also displayed on the Plug Status Screen.  
5.7.1.1. Example 1: Change Plug A3 to Priority 1  
In the Example shown in Figure 5.11, we start out with all Plugs set to their default Boot  
Priorities, with Plug A1 first, Plug A2 second and so forth.  
Next, the Boot Priority for Plug A3 is changed to Priority 1. This means that Plug A3  
will now be switched On first after a reboot, and that Plug A1 will now be switched On  
second, Plug A2 will be third, etc..  
Note that when the Boot Priority for Plug A3 is set to 1, the Boot Priorities for all plugs  
that were previously Booted before plug A1 are now lowered by a factor of one  
BEFORE  
(Plug No.) Priority  
(Assign Plug A3  
to Priority 1)  
AFTER  
(Plug No.) Priority  
(A1) 1  
(A2) 2  
(A3) 3  
(A4) 4  
(A5) 5  
(A6) 6  
(A1) 2  
(A2) 3  
(A3) 1  
(A4) 4  
(A5) 5  
(A6) 6  
1
Figure 5.11: Boot Priority Example 1  
5-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.7.1.2. Example 2: Change Plug A5 to Priority 2  
In the second Example shown in Figure 5.12, we start out with Boot Priorities for the  
plugs set as they were at the end of Example 1; Plug A3 is first, Plug A1 is second, Plug  
A2 is third, Plug A4 is fourth, and Plug A6 is sixth.  
Next, the Boot Priority for Plug A5 is changed to Priority 2. This means that Plug A3  
will continue to be switched on first after a reboot, but now Plug A5 will be switched on  
second, Plug A3 will be third, Plug A2 will be fourth, Plug A4 will be fifth and Plug A6 will  
still be sixth.  
Once again, note that when the Boot Priority for Plug A5 is set to 2, the Boot Priorities for  
all plugs that were previously Booted before plug A5 are now lowered by a factor of one  
BEFORE  
(Plug No.) Priority  
(Assign Plug A5  
to Priority 2)  
AFTER  
(Plug No.) Priority  
(A1) 2  
(A2) 3  
(A3) 1  
(A4) 4  
(A5) 5  
(A6) 6  
(A1) 3  
(A2) 4  
(A3) 1  
(A4) 5  
(A5) 2  
(A6) 6  
2
Figure 5.12: Boot Priority Example 2  
5-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
PORT PARAMETERS #01:  
COMMUNICATION SETTING  
1. Baud Rate:  
PORT MODE PARAMETERS  
21. Port Name:  
9600  
(undefined)  
2. Bits/Parity:  
3. Stop Bits:  
4. Handshake:  
8-None  
1
RTS/CTS  
22. Port Mode:  
23. DTR Output:  
24. Modem Params:  
Normal  
Pulse  
---  
GENERAL PARAMETERS  
11. Administrator Mode: Permit  
12. Logoff Char:  
13. Sequence Disc:  
14. Inact Timeout:  
15. Command Echo:  
16. Accept Break:  
^X  
One Char  
5 Min  
On  
On  
Enter #<CR> to change,  
<ESC> to exit and save configuration...  
Figure 5.13: Serial Port Configuration Menu (Text Interface)  
Figure 5.14: Port Configuration Menu (Web Browser Interface)  
5-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.8. Serial Port Configuration  
The Serial Port Configuration menus allow you to select parameters for the MPC's serial  
Console Port, as well as the Remote Port and AUX Ports.  
Console Port: The serial Console Port (Port 1) can be configured for connection  
to a local PC or Modem or used for connection to serial console ports on other  
rack equipment. In addition, the Serial Port Configuration menu can also be used  
to set communications parameters, disable Administrator level commands at the  
Console Port and also select a number of other Console Port Parameters described  
in Section 5.8.1.  
Remote Port: The RJ45 Remote Port is normally used for connection to the  
optional MPC-DISPLAY remote display panel. Note however, that if necessary, the  
Serial Port Configuration menu can also be used to configure the Remote Port for  
communication with other serial devices as described in Section 5.8.2.  
AUX Ports: The RJ45 AUX Ports are normally used for connection to optional  
remote MPC units. This allows you to connect up to three additional MPC units  
when you need to control additional power outlets via a single IP address. If  
necessary, the Serial Port Configuration menus can also be used to configure  
the AUX ports for communications with other serial devices as described in  
Section 5.8.2.  
5.8.1. Console Port Configuration  
To configure the MPC's serial Console Port, proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /P 1 and then press [Enter]. The Port Parameters menu will  
be displayed as shown in Figure 5.13.  
Web Browser Interface: Click the "Serial Port" link on the left hand side of  
the screen to display the Serial Port Configuration Menu. From the Serial Port  
Configuration menu, use the dropdown menu to select Port 1 (the Console Port)  
and then click on the Select Port button to display the Serial Port 1 Configuration  
Menu, as shown in Figure 5.14.  
The Console Port Configuration menu allows the following parameters to be defined.  
Note that all of these parameters are available via both the Text Interface and Web  
Browser Interface, and that parameters selected via one interface are also applied to the  
other.  
Communication Settings:  
Baud Rate: Any standard rate from 300 bps to 115.2K bps. (Default = 9600 bps)  
Bits/Parity: (Default = 8-None).  
Stop Bits: (Default = 1).  
Handshake Mode: XON/XOFF, RTS/CTS (hardware), Both, or None.  
(Default = RTS/CTS).  
5-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
General Parameters:  
Administrator Mode: Permits/denies port access to Administrator and  
SuperUser level accounts. When enabled (Permit), the port will be allowed to  
invoke Administrator and SuperUser level commands, providing they are issued  
by an account that permits them. If disabled (Deny), then accounts that permit  
Administrator and SuperUser level commands will not be allowed to access  
command mode via this port. (Default = Permit).  
Logoff Character: The Logoff Character determines the command(s) or  
character(s) that must be issued at this port in order to disconnect. Note that the  
Logoff Character does not apply to Direct Connections. (Default = ^X.)  
Sequence Disconnect: Enables/Disables and configures the disconnect  
command. This item offers the option to disable the Sequence Disconnect, select a  
one character format or a three character format. (Default = One Character.)  
Inactivity Timeout: Enables and selects the Timeout Period for this port. If  
enabled, the Console Port will disconnect when no additional data activity is  
detected for the duration of the timeout period. (Default = 5 Minutes.)  
Command Echo: Enables or Disables command echo at the Console Port. When  
disabled, commands that are sent to the Console Port will still be invoked, but the  
actual keystrokes will not be displayed on your monitor. (Default = On.)  
Accept Break: Determines whether the port will accept breaks received from the  
attached device. When enabled, breaks received at the port will be passed to any  
port that this port is connected to. When disabled, breaks will be refused at this  
port. (Default = On.)  
5-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
Port Mode Parameters:  
Port Name: Allows you to assign a name to the Console Port.  
(Default = undefined.)  
Port Mode: The operation mode for this port. (Default = Normal Mode)  
Depending on the Port Mode selected, the MPC will also display the additional  
prompts listed below. In the Text Interface, these parameters are accessible via a  
submenu, which will only be active when the appropriate port mode is selected. In  
the Web Browser Interface, fields will be "grayed out" unless the corresponding port  
mode is selected.  
Normal Mode: Allows communication with a local PC and permits access to  
command mode. When the Normal Mode is selected, the following mode-  
specific parameter can also be defined:  
DTR Output: Determines how DTR will react when the port disconnects. DTR  
can be held low, held high, or pulsed for 0.5 seconds and then held high.  
(Default = Pulse.)  
Modem Mode: Permits access to command mode and simplifies connection  
to an external modem. Modem Mode ports can perform all functions normally  
available in Normal Mode, but Modem Mode also allows definition of the  
following, additional parameters:  
Reset String: Redefines the modem reset string. The Reset String can be  
sent prior to the Initialization string. (Default = ATZ.)  
Initialization String: Defines a command string that can be sent to  
initialize a modem to settings required by your application. (Default =  
AT&C1&D2S0=1&B1&H1&R2)  
Hang-Up String: Although the MPC will pulse the DTR line to hang-up an  
attached modem, the Hang-Up string is often useful for controlling modems  
that do not use the DTR line. (Default = undefined.)  
Periodic Reset Value: Determines how often the Reset String will be sent to  
the modem at this port.  
Note: When communicating with the MPC via modem, these parameters will  
not be changed until after you exit command mode and disconnect.  
5-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
AUX PORT PARAMETERS:  
REMOTE SETTINGS  
1. Port Function:  
2. Baud Rate:  
3. Bits/Parity:  
4. Stop Bits:  
AUX2 SETTINGS  
Remote  
----  
----  
----  
----  
----  
13. Port Function:  
14. Baud Rate:  
15. Bits/Parity:  
16. Stop Bits:  
17. Handskake:  
18. Inact Timeout:  
Aux2  
----  
----  
----  
----  
----  
5. Handskake:  
6. Inact Timeout:  
AUX1 SETTINGS  
AUX3 SETTINGS  
7. Port Function:  
8. Baud Rate:  
9. Bits/Parity:  
10. Stop Bits:  
11. Handskake:  
12. Inact Timeout:  
Aux1  
----  
----  
----  
----  
----  
19. Port Function:  
20. Baud Rate:  
21. Bits/Parity:  
22. Stop Bits:  
23. Handskake:  
24. Inact Timeout:  
Aux3  
----  
----  
----  
----  
----  
Enter: #<CR> to change,  
<ESC> to exit and save configuration ...  
Figure 5.15: Remote/AUX Port Configuration Menu (Text Interface)  
Figure 5.16: Remote/AUX Port Configuration Menu (Web Browser Interface)  
5-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.8.2. Remote Port and AUX Port Configuration  
In most applications, it is not necessary to change the configuration of the Remote Port  
or AUX Port. If you do not intend to use the Remote or AUX ports, or if you intend to use  
the Remote Port and AUX Ports for connection to the optional MPC-DISPLAY unit and  
additional MPC units, then the factory default settings for these ports will work fine and  
you will not need to change the configuration of these ports.  
Note however, that in addition to their default functions (connection to the MPC-DISPLAY  
unit or additional MPC units), the Remote and AUX Ports can also be configured to allow  
serial communication with Console Ports on attached devices. In this case, you must  
reconfigure the MPC's Remote and/or AUX Ports as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /P AUX and then press [Enter]. The Remote/AUX Port  
Parameters menu will be displayed as shown in Figure 5.15.  
Web Browser Interface: Click the "Serial Port" link on the left hand side of the  
screen. From the Serial Port Configuration menu, use the dropdown menu to select  
"Aux" and then click on the Select Port button to display the Remote/AUX Port  
Configuration Menu, as shown in Figure 5.16.  
The Remote/AUX Port Configuration menus allow the following parameters to be  
defined. Note that all of these parameters are available via both the Text Interface and  
Web Browser Interface, and that parameters selected via one interface are also applied  
to the other.  
Port Function: Determines whether each port will be used for connection to  
optional MPC devices, or used for serial communication.  
(Default: Remote Port = "Remote"; AUX Port = "AUX".)  
Notes:  
• In the default state all other Remote/AUX Port parameters are inaccessible.  
When the Remote/AUX Mode is selected for a port, additional menu items for  
that port will then be activated.  
• When the Remote and/or AUX Ports are used for serial communication,  
Alarms will be temporarily suppressed whenever the ports are connected.  
• If the AUX port is already connected to an AUX MPC unit, then you will need  
to re-initialize the AUX unit before configuring the AUX port as a serial port.  
Access your local MPC unit via the Text Interface and then issue the /I  
(initialize) command at your local MPC unit. When the submenu appears,  
select the AUX port that you intend to reconfigure as a serial port. After the  
command is completed, disconnect the AUX MPC unit from the AUX port and  
then reconfigure the AUX port as described in this section.  
• When an AUX or Remote port is set for Serial Port mode, then accounts  
that permit access to that port will be allowed to invoke the /C command to  
connect to the port as described in Section 9.2.4.  
5-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
Baud Rate: Any standard rate from 300 bps to 115.2K bps. (Default = 9600 bps)  
Bits/Parity: (Default = 8-None)  
Stop Bits: (Default = 1)  
Handshake Mode: XON/XOFF, RTS/CTS (hardware), Both, or None.  
(Default = RTS/CTS)  
Inactivity Timeout: Enables and selects the Timeout Period for this port. If  
enabled, the port will disconnect when no additional data activity is detected for the  
duration of the timeout period. (Default = 5 Minutes.)  
5-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Configuration  
NETWORK PARAMETERS:  
COMMUNICATION SETTING  
1. IP Address:  
2. Subnet Mask:  
3. Gateway Addr:  
4. DHCP:  
5. IP Security:  
6. Static Route:  
7. DNS Servers:  
SERVERS AND CLIENTS  
21. Telnet Access:  
22. SSH Access:  
23. Web Access:  
24. SYSLOG Addr:  
25. SNMP Access:  
26. SNMP Trap:  
27. LDAP:  
28. TACACS:  
29. RADIUS:  
30. PING Access:  
31. Multiple Logins:  
32. Email Messaging:  
207.212.30.80  
255.255.255.0  
207.212.30.1  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
(undefined)  
GENERAL PARAMETERS  
11. Administrator Mode:Permit  
12. Logoff Char:  
13. Sequence Disc:  
14. Inact Timeout:  
15. Command Echo:  
16. Accept Break:  
^X  
One Char  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
Enter: #<CR> to change,  
<ESC> to exit and save configuration ...  
Figure 5.17: Network Parameters Menu (Text Interface)  
Figure 5.18: Network Configuration Menu (Web Browser Interface)  
5-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.9. Network Configuration  
The Network Parameters Menus are used to select parameters and options for the  
Network Port and also allow you to implement IP Security features, which can restrict  
access based on the user’s IP Address.  
Although the Web Browser Interface and Text Interface allow definition of essentially the  
same parameters, parameters are arranged differently in the two interfaces. In the Text  
Interface, most network parameters are defined via one menu. But in the Web Browser  
Interface, network parameters are divided into separate menus as described in this  
section.  
To access the Network Parameters Menus, proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /Nand press [Enter]. The Network Parameters Menu shown  
in Figure 5.17 will be displayed.  
Web Browser Interface: Click on the "Network Configuration" link on the left hand  
side of the screen. The MPC will display the Network Configuration menu shown  
in Figure 5.18, which allows you to access the various submenus used to configure  
the network port. Alternately, you can also access a specific Network Configuration  
submenu by placing the cursor over the "Network Configuration" link. When the fly-  
out menu appears, click on the link for the desired submenu.  
Notes:  
• Settings for network parameters depend on the configuration of your network.  
Please contact your network administrator for appropriate settings.  
• The Network Parameters Menu selects parameters for all 16 logical Network  
Ports.  
• The IP Address, Subnet Address and Gateway Address cannot be changed  
via the Web Browser Interface. In order to change these parameters, you  
must access the unit via the Text Interface.  
• When a new IP Address is selected, or the status of the DHCP feature is  
changed, the unit will disconnect and reconfigure itself with the new values  
when you exit the Network Parameters Menu. When configuring the unit,  
make certain your DHCP server is set up to assign a known, fixed IP address  
in order to simplify reconnection to the unit after the new address has been  
assigned. DHCP Parameters cannot be changed via the Web Browser  
Interface.  
• The Network Parameters menu is only available when you have logged into  
command mode using an account and port that permit Administrator level  
commands (Supervisor Mode enabled.)  
The Network Parameters menu allows you to define the parameters discussed in the  
following sections. Note that although the descriptions of network parameters are  
arranged according to the Web Browser Interface, in the Text Interface, most parameters  
are included in a single menu.  
5-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.9.1. Network Port Parameters  
In the Text Interface, these parameters are found in the main Network Configuration  
menu (Figure 5.17.) In the Web Browser Interface, these parameters are found by  
placing the cursor over the "Network Configuration" link on the left hand side of the  
screen, and then clicking on the "Network Port Parameters" link in the resulting  
fly-out menu.  
Administrator Mode: Permits/denies port access to accounts that allow  
Administrator or SuperUser level commands. When enabled (Permit), the port will  
be allowed to invoke Administrator and SuperUser level commands, providing they  
are issued by an account that permits them. If disabled (Deny), then accounts that  
permit Administrator and SuperUser level commands will not be allowed to access  
command mode via this port. (Default = Permit)  
Logoff Character: Defines the Logoff Character for this port. This determines  
which command(s) must be issued at this port in order to disconnect from a second  
port. (Default = ^X([Ctrl] plus [X]).)  
Note: The Sequence Disconnect parameter can be used to pick a one  
character or a three character logoff sequence.  
Sequence Disconnect: Enables/Disables and configures the Resident Disconnect  
command. Offers the option to either disable the Sequence Disconnect, or select a  
one character, or three character command format. (Default = One Character).  
Notes:  
• The One Character Disconnect is intended for situations where the  
destination port should not receive the disconnect command. When the  
Three Character format is selected, the disconnect sequence will pass  
through to the destination port prior to breaking the connection.  
• When Three Character format is selected, the Resident Disconnect uses the  
format "[Enter]LLL[Enter]", where Lis the selected Logoff Character.  
Inactivity Timeout: Enables and selects the Inactivity Timeout period for the  
Network Port. If enabled, and the port does not receive or transmit data for the  
specified time period, the port will disconnect. (Default = 5 Minutes).  
Command Echo: Enables or Disables the command echo for the Network Port.  
(Default = On).  
Accept Break: Determines whether the port will accept breaks received from the  
attached device, and pass them along to a connected port. When enabled, breaks  
received at this port will be passed to any port this port is connected to, and sent  
to the device connected to the other port. When disabled, breaks will be refused at  
this port. (Default = On.)  
Multiple Logins: If the MPC is installed in an environment that does not include  
communication via an open network (local communication only), then the Multiple  
Logins parameter can be used to determine whether or not multiple users will be  
able to communicate with the unit at the same time. If this parameter is set to "Off"  
then only one user will be allowed to communicate with the unit at a time.  
(Default = On.)  
Note: The "Multiple Logins" prompt is not included in the Web Browser  
Interface.  
5-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.9.2. Network Parameters  
In the Text Interface, these parameters are accessed via the Network Configuration  
menu (Figure 5.17.) In the Web Browser Interface, these parameters are found by  
placing the cursor over the "Network Configuration" link on the left hand side of the  
screen, and then clicking on the "Network Parameters" link in the resulting fly-out menu.  
Note: The IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway Address and DHCP status  
cannot be changed via the Web Browser Interface. In order to change these  
parameters, you must access the MPC via the Text Interface.  
IP Address: (Default = 192.168.168.168.)  
Subnet Mask: (Default = 255.255.255.0.)  
Gateway Address: (Default = undefined.)  
DHCP: Enables/Disables Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. When this option  
is "On", the MPC will perform a DHCP request. Note that in the Text Interface, the  
MAC address for the MPC is listed on the Network Status Screen. (Default = Off.)  
Note: Before configuring this feature, make certain your DHCP server is set up  
to assign a known, fixed IP address. You will need this new IP address in order  
to reestablish a network connection with the MPC unit.  
Telnet Access: Enables/disables Telnet access. When Telnet Access is "Off," users  
will not be allowed to establish a Telnet connection to the unit. (Default = On.)  
Telnet Port: Selects the TCP/IP port number that will be used for Telnet  
connections. Note that in the Text Interface, this item is defined via a submenu,  
which is displayed when the Telnet Access parameter is selected (item number 21.)  
(Default = 23.)  
Max. Per Source: Specifies the maximum number of Telnet sessions that will be  
allowed per user MAC address. (Default = 4.)  
Notes:  
• In the Text Interface, the "Per Source" parameter is defined via a submenu of  
item 21 (Telnet Access) in the Network Parameters menu.  
• After changing the "Max Per Source" parameter, you must log out of all pre-  
existing Telnet sessions in order for the new maximum value to be applied.  
SSH Access: Enables/disables SSH communication. (Default = On.)  
SSH Port: Selects the TCP/IP port number that will be used for SSH connections.  
Note that in the Text Interface, this option is defined via a submenu that is displayed  
when the SSH Access parameter is selected (item number 22). (Default = 22.)  
HTTP Access (Web Access): Enables/disables the Web Browser Interface.  
When disabled, users will not be allowed to contact the unit via the Web Browser  
Interface. (Default = Off.)  
HTTP Port: Selects the TCP/IP port number that will be used for SSH connections.  
(Default = 80.)  
HTTPS Access: Enables/disables HTTPS communication. For instructions on  
setting up SSL encryption, please refer to Section 14. (Default = On.)  
5-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
HTTPS Port: Selects the TCP/IP port number that will be used for HTTPS  
connections. (Default = 443.)  
Notes:  
• In the Text Interface, HTTP and HTTPS parameters reside in a separate  
submenu. To enable and configure HTTP and HTTPS Access via the  
Text Interface, access the Network Configuration Menu as described in  
Section 5.9, then type 23, press [Enter] and use the resulting submenu  
(Figure 14.1) to select parameters.  
• When the Web Access parameter is accessed via the Text Interface, the  
resulting submenu will also allow you to select SSL (encryption) parameters  
as described in Section 14.  
SYSLOG Address: The IP Address or domain name (up to 64 characters) for the  
Syslog Daemon that will receive log records generated by the MPC. For more  
information, please refer to Section 11. (Default = undefined.)  
Ping Access: Enables/Disables response to the ping command. When Disabled,  
the MPC will not respond to Ping commands. Note that disabling Ping Access at  
the Network Port will not effect the operation of the Ping-No-Access Alarm.  
(Default = On.)  
5.9.3. IP Security  
The IP Security feature allows the MPC to restrict unauthorized IP addresses from  
establishing inbound connections to the unit via telnet or Web Browser. This allows  
you to grant access to only a specific group of Telnet or Web IP addresses, or block  
a particular IP address completely. In the default state, the MPC accepts incoming IP  
connections from all hosts.  
In the Text Interface, IP Security parameters are defined via item 5 in the Network  
Configuration menu (Figure 5.17.) In the Web Browser Interface, these parameters are  
found by placing the cursor over the "Network Configuration" link on the left hand side of  
the screen, and then clicking on the "IP Security" link in the resulting fly-out menu. In the  
default state, IP Security is disabled. The IP Security Function employs a TCP Wrapper  
program which allows the use of standard, Linux operators, wild cards and net/mask  
pairs to create a host based access control list.  
The IP Security configuration menus include "hosts.allow" and "hosts.deny" client lists.  
Basically, when setting up IP Security, you must enter IP addresses for hosts that you  
wish to allow in the Allow list, and addresses for hosts that you wish to deny in the Deny  
list. Since Linux operators, wild cards and net/mask pairs are allowed, these lists can  
indicate specific addresses, or a range of addresses to be allowed or denied. When the  
IP Security feature is properly enabled, and a client attempts to connect, the MPC will  
perform the following checks:  
1. If the client’s IP address is found in the "hosts.allow" list, the client will be granted  
immediate access. Once an IP address is found in the Allow list, the MPC will not  
check the Deny list, and will assume you wish to allow that address to connect.  
2. If the client’s IP address is not found in the Allow list, the MPC will then proceed to  
check the Deny list.  
3. If the client’s IP Address is found in the Deny list, the client will not be allowed to  
connect.  
5-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
4. If the client’s IP Address is not found in the Deny list, the client will be allowed to  
connect, even if the address was not found in the Allow list.  
Notes:  
• If the MPC finds an IP Address in the Allow list, it will not check the Deny list,  
and will allow the client to connect.  
• If both the Allow and Deny lists are left blank, then the IP Security feature will  
be disabled, and all IP Addresses will be allowed to connect (providing that  
the proper password and/or SSH key is supplied.)  
• When the Allow and Deny lists are defined, the user is only allowed to specify  
the Client List; the Daemon List and Shell Command cannot be defined.  
5.9.3.1. Adding IP Addresses to the Allow and Deny Lists  
To add an IP Address to the Allow or Deny list, and begin configuring the IP Security  
feature, proceed as follows.  
Notes:  
• Both the Allow and Deny list can include Linux operators, wild cards, and  
net/mask pairs.  
• In some cases, it is not necessary to enter all four "digits" of the IP Address.  
For example, if you wish to allow access to all IP addresses that begin with  
"192," then you would only need to enter "192."  
• The IP Security Configuration menu is only available when the Administrator  
Mode is active.  
1. Access the IP Security Configuration Menu.  
a) Text Interface: Type /N [Enter] to display the Network Configuration Menu.  
From the Network Configuration Menu, type 5 [Enter] to display the IP  
Security Menu.  
b) Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "Network Configuration"  
link on the left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click  
on the "IP Security" Link to display the IP Security Menu.  
2. Allow List: Enter the IP Address(es) for the clients that you wish to allow. Note that  
if an IP Address is found in the Allow list, the client will be allowed to connect, and  
the MPC will not check the Deny list.  
a) Text Interface: Note the number for the first empty field in the Allow list, then  
type that number at the command prompt, press [Enter], and then follow the  
instructions in the resulting submenu.  
b) Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor in the first empty field in the  
parameters menu, then key in the desired IP Address, operators, wild cards,  
and/or net/mask pairs.  
3. Deny List: Enter the IP Address(es) for the clients that you wish to deny. Note that  
if the client’s IP Address is not found in the Deny List, that client will be allowed to  
connect. Use the same procedure for entering IP Addresses described in Step 2  
above.  
5-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.9.3.2. Linux Operators and Wild Cards  
In addition to merely entering a specific IP address or partial IP address in the Allow or  
Deny list, you may also use any standard Linux operator or wild card. In most cases,  
the only operator used is "EXCEPT" and the only wild card used is "ALL," but more  
experienced Linux users may note that other operators and wild cards may also be  
used.  
EXCEPT:  
This operator creates an exception in either the "allow" list or "deny" list.  
For example, if the Allow list includes a line which reads "192. EXCEPT 192.255.255.6,"  
then all IP address that begin with "192." will be allowed; except 192.255.255.6  
(providing that this address appears in the Deny list.)  
ALL:  
The ALL wild card indicates that all IP Addresses should be allowed or denied. When  
ALL is included in the Allow list, all IP addresses will be allowed to connect; conversely,  
if ALL is included in the Deny list, all IP Addresses will be denied (except for IP  
addresses listed in the Allow list.)  
For example, if the Deny list includes a line which reads "ALL EXCEPT 168.255.192.192,"  
then all IP addresses except 168.255.192.192 will be denied (except for IP addresses  
that are listed in the Allow list.)  
Net/Mask Pairs:  
An expression of the form "n.n.n.n/m.m.m.m" is interpreted as a "net/mask" pair. A host  
address is matched if "net" is equal to the bitwise AND of the address and the "mask."  
For example, the net/mask pattern "131.155.72.0/255.255.254.0" matches every address  
in the range "131.155.72.0" through "131.155.73.255."  
5.9.3.3. IP Security Examples  
1. Mostly Closed: Access is denied by default and the only clients allowed,  
are those explicitly listed in the Allow list. To deny access to all clients except  
192.255.255.192 and 168.112.112.05, the Allow and Deny lists would be defined as  
follows:  
• Allow List:  
1. 192.255.255.192  
2. 168.112.112.05  
• Deny List:  
1. ALL  
5-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
2. Mostly Open: Access is granted by default, and the only clients denied access,  
are those explicitly listed in the Deny list, and as exceptions in the Allow list. To  
allow access to all clients except 192.255.255.192 and 168.112.112.05, the Allow  
and Deny lists would be defined as follows:  
• Allow List:  
1. ALL EXCEPT 192.255.255.192, 168.112.112.05  
• Deny List:  
1. 192.255.255.192, 168.112.112.05  
Notes:  
• When defining a line in the Allow or Deny list that includes several IP  
addresses, each individual address is separated by either a space, a comma,  
or a comma and a space as shown in Example 2 above.  
Take care when using the "ALL" wild card. When ALL is included in the Allow  
list, it should always include an EXCEPT operator in order to allow the unit to  
proceed to the Deny list and determine any addresses you wish to deny.  
5.9.4. Static Route  
The Static Route menu allows you to type in Linux routing commands that will be  
automatically executed each time that the unit powers up or reboots. In the Text  
Interface, the Static Route menu is accessed via item 6 in the Network Configuration  
menu. In the Web Browser Interface, the Static Route menu is accessed by clicking the  
Static Route link, located on the left-hand side of the screen.  
To access the Static Route Menus, proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /Nand press [Enter] to display the Network Parameters  
Menu (Figure 5.17.) At the Network Parameters Menu, type 6and press [Enter] to  
display the Static Route Menu.  
Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "Network Configuration" link on  
the left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "Static  
Route" link to display the Static Route Menu.  
5.9.5. Domain Name Server  
The DNS menu is used to select IP addresses for Domain Name Servers. When web  
and network addresses are entered, the Domain Name Server interprets domain names  
(e.g., www.yourcompanyname123.com), and translates them into IP addresses. Note  
that if you don't define at least one DNS, then IP addresses must be used, rather than  
domain names.  
To access the Domain Name Server Menu, proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /Nand press [Enter] to display the Network Parameters  
Menu (Figure 5.17.) At the Network Parameters Menu, type 7and press [Enter] to  
display the Domain Name Server menu.  
Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "Network Configuration" link on  
the left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "DNS  
Server" link to display the Domain Name Server menu.  
5-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.9.6. SNMP Access Parameters  
These menus are used to select access parameters for the SNMP feature. To define or  
change SNMP MIB parameters, proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /Nand press [Enter] to display the Network Parameters  
Menu (Figure 5.17.) At the Network Parameters Menu, type 25and press [Enter] to  
display the SNMP Access Parameters Menu.  
Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "Network Configuration" link  
on the left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the  
"SNMP Parameters" link to display the SNMP Access Parameters Menu.  
Note: After you have configured SNMP Access Parameters, you will then be  
able to manage the MPC's User Directory, control power and reboot switching  
and display unit status via SNMP, as described in Section 13.  
The SNMP Access Parameters Menu allows the following parameters to be defined:  
Enable: Enables/disables SNMP Polling. (Default = Off.)  
Note: This item only applies to external SNMP polling of the MPC; it does not  
effect the ability of the MPC to send SNMP traps.  
Version: This parameter determines which SNMP Version the MPC will respond to.  
For example, if this item is set to V3, then clients who attempt to contact the MPC  
using SNMPv2 will not be allowed to connect. (Default = V1/V2 Only.)  
Read Only: Enables/Disables the "Read Only Mode", which controls the ability to  
access configuration functions and invoke switching commands. When Enabled  
("Yes"), you will not be able to change configuration parameters or invoke other  
commands when you contact the MPC via SNMP. (Default = No.)  
Note: In order to define user names for the MPC via your SNMP client, the  
Read Only feature must be disabled. When the Read Only feature is enabled,  
you will not be able to issue configuration commands to the MPC unit via SNMP.  
Authentication / Privacy: Configures the Authentication and Privacy features  
for SNMPv3 communication. The Authentication / Privacy parameter offers two  
options, which function as follows:  
1. Auth/noPriv: An SNMPv3 username and password will be required at log in,  
but encryption will not be used. (Default Setting.)  
2. Auth/Priv: An SNMPv3 username and password will be required at log in, and  
all messages will be sent using encryption.  
Notes:  
• The Authentication / Privacy item is not available when the Version parameter  
is set to V1/V2.  
• If the Version Parameter is set to V1/V2/V3 (all) and Authentication / Privacy  
parameter is set to "Auth/Priv", then only V3 data will be encrypted.  
• The MPC supports DES encryption, but does not currently support the AES  
protocol.  
• The MPC does not support "noAuth/noPriv" for SNMPv3 communication.  
5-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
SNMPv3 User Name: Sets the User Name for SNMPv3. Note that this option is  
not available when the Version parameter is set to V1/V2. (Default = undefined.)  
SNMPv3 Password: Sets the password for SNMPv3. Note that this option is not  
available when the Version parameter is set to V1/V2. (Default = undefined.)  
SNMPv3 Password Confirm: This prompt is used to confirm the SNMPv3  
password that was entered at the prompt above. Note that this option is not  
available when the Version parameter is set to V1/V2. (Default = undefined.)  
Authentication Protocol: This parameter determines which authentication protocol  
will be used. The MPC supports both MD5 and SHA1 authentication.  
(Default = MD5.)  
Notes:  
• The Authentication Protocol that is selected for the MPC must match the  
protocol that your SNMP client will use when querying the MPC unit.  
• The Authentication Protocol option is not available when the Version  
parameter is set to V1/V2  
SNMP Contact: (Default = undefined.)  
SNMP Location: (Default = undefined.)  
SNMP Community: Note that this parameter is not available when the SNMP  
Version is set to V3. (Default = Public.)  
5-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.9.7. SNMP Trap Parameters  
These menus are used to select parameters that will be used when SNMP traps are  
sent. For more information on SNMP Traps, please refer to Section 12. To define or  
change SNMP Trap parameters, proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /Nand press [Enter] to display the Network Parameters  
Menu (Figure 5.17.) At the Network Parameters Menu, type 26and press [Enter] to  
display the SNMP Trap Parameters Menu.  
Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "Network Configuration" link  
on the left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the  
"SNMP Traps" link to display the SNMP Trap Parameters Menu.  
Both the Text Interface and Web Browser Interface allow the following parameters to be  
defined:  
SNMP Manager 1: The IP Address for the first SNMP Manager. For more  
information, please refer to Section 12. (Default = Undefined.)  
Note: In order to enable the SNMP Trap feature, you must define at least one  
SNMP Manager.  
SNMP Manager 2: (Default = Undefined.)  
Trap Community: (Default = Public.)  
5-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.9.8. LDAP Parameters  
The MPC supports LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol,) which allows  
authentication via the "Active Directory" network Directory Service. When LDAP is  
enabled and properly configured, command access rights can be granted to new users  
without the need to define individual new accounts at each MPC unit, and existing users  
can also be removed without the need to delete the account from each MPC unit.  
This type of authentication also allows administrators to assign users to LDAP groups,  
and then specify which plugs the members of each group will be allowed to control at  
each MPC unit.  
In order to apply the LDAP feature, you must first define User Names and associated  
Passwords and group membership via your LDAP server, and then access the MPC  
command mode to enable and configure the LDAP settings and define port access  
rights and command access rights for each group that you have specified at the LDAP  
server.  
To access the LDAP Parameters menu, login to MPC command mode using a password  
that permits Administrator Level commands and then proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /Nand press [Enter] to display the Network Parameters  
Menu (Figure 5.17.) At the Network Parameters Menu, type 27and press [Enter] to  
display the LDAP Parameters Menu.  
Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "Network Configuration" link on  
the left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "LDAP  
Parameters" link to display the LDAP Parameters Menu.  
Notes:  
• Plug access rights are not defined at the LDAP server. They are defined via  
the LDAP Group configuration menu on each MPC unit and are specific to  
that MPC unit alone.  
• When LDAP is enabled and properly configured, LDAP authentication will  
supersede any passwords and access rights that have been defined via the  
MPC user directory.  
• If no LDAP groups are defined on a given MPC unit, then access rights will  
be determined as specified by the "default" LDAP group.  
• The "default" LDAP group cannot be deleted.  
The LDAP Parameters Menu allows you to define the following parameters:  
Enable: Enables/disables LDAP authentication. (Default = Off.)  
Primary Host: Defines the IP address or domain name (up to 64 characters) for  
the primary LDAP server. (Default = undefined.)  
Secondary Host: Defines the IP address or domain name (up to 64 characters) for  
the secondary (fallback) LDAP server. (Default = undefined.)  
LDAP Port: Defines the port that will be used to communicate with the LDAP  
server. (Default = 389.)  
5-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
TLS/SSL: Enables/Disables TLS/SSL encryption. Note that when TLS/SSL  
encryption is enabled, the LDAP Port should be set to 636. (Default = Off.)  
Bind Type: Sets the LDAP bind request password type. Note that in the Text  
Interface, when the Bind Type is set to "Kerberos" LDAP menu will include an  
additional prompt (item 14) that is used to select Kerberos parameters as described  
in Section 5.9.8.5. In the Web Interface, the button which is used to access the  
Kerberos Parameters menu is located at the bottom of the LDAP Parameters Menu.  
(Default = Simple.)  
Search Bind DN: Selects the user name who is allowed to search the LDAP  
directory. (Default = undefined.)  
Search Bind Password: Sets the Password for the user who is allowed to search  
the LDAP directory. (Default = undefined.)  
User Search Base DN: Sets the directory location for user searches.  
(Default = undefined.)  
User Search Filter: Selects the attribute that lists the user name. Note that this  
attribute should always end with "=%S" (no quotes.) (Default = undefined.)  
Group Membership Attribute: Selects the attribute that list group membership(s).  
(Default = undefined.)  
Group Membership Value Type: (Default = DN.)  
Fallback: Enables/Disables the LDAP fallback feature. When enabled, the MPC  
will revert to it's own internal user directory (see Section 5.5) if no defined users are  
found via the LDAP server. In this case, port access rights will then be granted as  
specified in the default LDAP group. (Default = Off.)  
LDAP Group Setup: Provides access to a submenu, which is used to define LDAP  
Groups as described in the Sections 5.9.8.1 through 5.9.8.4.  
Kerberos Setup: Provides access to the Kerberos Setup menu as described in  
Section 5.9.8.5. When the Bind Type parameter is set to "Kerberos", the Kerberos  
Setup menu is used to select Kerberos parameters. Note that in the Text Interface,  
the link to the Kerberos Setup menu will not be displayed unless the Bind Type has  
been set to Kerberos.  
5-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.9.8.1. Adding LDAP Groups  
Once you have defined several users and passwords via your LDAP server, and  
assigned those users to LDAP Groups, you must then grant command and port access  
rights to each LDAP Group at each individual MPC unit. To add LDAP groups to your  
MPC unit, log in to the command mode using a password that permits access to  
Administrator Level commands, and then proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /Nand press [Enter] to display the Network Parameters  
Menu (Figure 5.17.) At the Network Parameters Menu, type 27and press [Enter] to  
display the LDAP parameters menu, then type 13and press [Enter] to display the  
LDAP Group Menu. At the LDAP Group Menu, type 2and press [Enter] to display  
the Add LDAP Group Menu.  
Web Browser Interface: Access the LDAP Parameters Menu as described in  
Section 5.9.8. At the LDAP Parameters Menu, click on the LDAP Group Setup  
button to display the LDAP Group Setup Menu, then click the Add LDAP Group link  
to display the Add LDAP Group Menu.  
The Add LDAP Group menu allows the following parameters to be defined:  
Group Name: Note that this name must match the LDAP Group names that you  
have assigned to users at your LDAP server. (Default = undefined.)  
Access Level: Sets the command access level to either Administrator, SuperUser,  
User or ViewOnly. For more information on Access Levels, please refer to  
Section 5.4.1. (Default = User.)  
Port Access: When the MPC's AUX Ports and/or Remote Port have been  
reconfigured for use as standard serial ports, this item can be used to enable/  
disable user access to these ports. (Default = All Ports Off.)  
Plug Access: This item is used to determine which plugs members of this group  
will be allowed to control. (Default = All Plugs Off.)  
Notes:  
Web Browser Interface: When granting access to plugs on optional AUX  
units, via the Web Browser interface, select the desired plugs from the  
"Configure Plug Access" drop down menu.  
Text Interface: When granting access to plugs on AUX units via the Text  
Interface, proceed as follows:  
1. From the Add LDAP Group menu, type 3and press [Enter] to display the  
Plug Access menu. Select plugs for your local MPC unit as you normally  
would, and then press [Enter] to return to the Add LDAP Group menu.  
2. To grant access to plugs on AUX units, type 3and press [Enter] again to  
return to the Plug Access menu, and then type >(greater than symbol)  
and press [Enter] to scroll to the desired AUX MPC unit. When the  
desired AUX unit is displayed, select plugs for the AUX unit, and then  
press [Enter] to return to the Add LDAP Group Menu.  
3. Repeat Step 2 above to grant access to plugs on additional AUX units.  
4. When you have finished granting Plug Access rights to this LDAP group,  
make certain to press [Esc] several times until the "Saving Configuration"  
message is displayed and the unit returns to the MPC command prompt.  
5-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
Plug Group Access: This item is used to determine which plug groups the  
members of this LDAP Group will be allowed to control. (Default = undefined.)  
Service Access: This item determines how members of this LDAP Group will be  
allowed to access command mode. The Service Access parameter is used to allow  
members of this LDAP group to access command mode via Serial Port or Telnet/  
SSH or any combination thereof. (Default = Serial Port = On, Telnet/SSH = On.)  
Current/Power Metering: Determines whether or not members of this LDAP Group  
will be allowed to view current, voltage and temperature readings from the  
MPC unit.  
Note: After you have finished defining LDAP Group parameters, make certain  
to save the changes before proceeding. In the Web Browser Interface, click on  
the "Add LDAP Group" button to save parameters; in the Text Interface, press  
the [Esc] key several times until the MPC displays the "Saving Configuration"  
message.  
5.9.8.2 Viewing LDAP Groups  
If you want to examine an existing LDAP group definition, the "View LDAP Groups"  
function can be used to review the group's parameters and Plug Access Settings. To  
view an existing LDAP group on your MPC unit, proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /Nand press [Enter] to display the Network Parameters  
Menu (Figure 5.17.) At the Network Parameters Menu, type 27and press [Enter]  
to display the LDAP Parameters Menu, then type 13and press [Enter] to display  
the LDAP Group Menu, then type 1and press [Enter]. The MPC will prompt you to  
select the desired group; key in the name of the group and press [Enter], the MPC  
will display the View LDAP Group screen.  
Web Browser Interface: Access the LDAP Parameters Menu as described in  
Section 5.9.8. At the LDAP Parameters Menu, click on the LDAP Group Setup  
button to display the LDAP Group Setup Menu, then click the View/Modify LDAP  
Group link to display the Choose LDAP Group Menu; use the drop down menu to  
select the desired group, select View LDAP Group and then click the Choose LDAP  
Group button.  
5-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.9.8.3. Modifying LDAP Groups  
If you want to modify an existing LDAP Group in order to change parameters or plug  
access rights, the "Modify LDAP Group" function can be used to reconfigure group  
parameters. To Modify an existing LDAP Group, access the MPC command mode using  
a password that permits access to Administrator Level commands, and then proceed as  
follows:  
Text Interface: Type /Nand press [Enter] to display the Network Parameters  
Menu (Figure 5.17.) At the Network Parameters Menu, type 27and press [Enter]  
to display the LDAP Parameters Menu, then type 13and press [Enter] to display  
the LDAP Group Menu, then type 3and press [Enter]. The MPC will prompt you to  
select the desired group; key in the name of the group and press [Enter], the MPC  
will display the Modify LDAP Group screen.  
Web Browser Interface: Access the LDAP Parameters Menu as described in  
Section 5.9.8. At the LDAP Parameters Menu, click on the LDAP Group Setup  
button to display the LDAP Group Setup Menu, then click the View/Modify LDAP  
Group link to display the Choose LDAP Group menu; use the drop down menu  
to select the desired group, select Modify LDAP Group and then click the Choose  
LDAP Group button.  
Once you have accessed the Modify LDAP Group menu, use the menu options to  
redefine parameters in the same manner that is used for the Add LDAP Group menu, as  
discussed in Section 5.9.8.1.  
Note: After you have finished modifying LDAP Group parameters, make certain  
to save the changes before proceeding. In the Web Browser Interface, click on  
the "Modify LDAP Group" button to save parameters; in the Text Interface, press  
the [Esc] key several times until the MPC displays the "Saving Configuration"  
message and the cursor returns to the command prompt.  
5.9.8.4. Deleting LDAP Groups  
The Delete LDAP Group function is used to delete LDAP Groups that are no longer in  
use. To delete an existing LDAP Group, proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /Nand press [Enter] to display the Network Parameters  
Menu (Figure 5.17.) At the Network Parameters Menu, type 27and press [Enter]  
to display the LDAP Parameters Menu, then type 13and press [Enter] to display  
the LDAP Group Menu, then type 4and press [Enter]. The MPC will prompt you to  
select the desired group; key in the name of the group and press [Enter], the MPC  
will delete the specified LDAP Group immediately, without further prompting.  
Web Browser Interface: Access the LDAP Parameters Menu as described in  
Section 5.9.8. At the LDAP Parameters Menu, click on the LDAP Group Setup  
button to display the LDAP Group Setup Menu, then click the View/Modify LDAP  
Group link to display the Choose LDAP Group Menu; use the drop down menu  
to select the desired group, select Delete LDAP Group and then click the Choose  
LDAP Group button to display the Delete LDAP Group Menu. If the Delete LDAP  
Group Menu shows the desired group, then click the Delete LDAP Group button to  
immediately delete the group.  
5-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.9.8.5. LDAP Kerberos Set Up  
Kerberos is a network authentication protocol, which provides a secure means of  
identity verification for users who are communicating via a non-secure network.  
To access the LDAP Kerberos Set Up menu, access the command mode using a  
password that permits access to Administrator Level commands and then proceed as  
follows:  
Text Interface: Type /Nand press [Enter] to display the Network Parameters  
Menu (Figure 5.17.) At the Network Parameters Menu, type 27and press [Enter]  
to display the LDAP Parameters Menu. At the LDAP Parameters Menu, type 5and  
press [Enter] and then use the resulting submenu to set the Bind Type to Kerberos.  
Next, return to the LDAP Parameters Menu. Note that the LDAP Parameters Menu  
now includes a prompt which is used to select Kerberos parameters. Type 14and  
press [Enter] to display the Kerberos Set Up Menu.  
Web Browser Interface: Access the LDAP Parameters Menu as described in  
Section 5.9.8. At the LDAP Parameters Menu, click on the LDAP Kerberos Setup  
button to display the LDAP Kerberos Setup menu.  
The LDAP Kerberos Setup menu allows you to define the following parameters:  
Port: (Default = 88.)  
Realm: (Default = Undefined.)  
Key Distribution Centers (KDC1 through KDC5): (Default = Undefined.)  
Domain Realms 1 through 5: (Default = Undefined.)  
5-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.9.9. TACACS Parameters  
To access the TACACS Configuration Menus, proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /Nand press [Enter] to access the Network Configuration  
Menu. From the Network Configuration Menu, type 28and press [Enter] to display  
the TACACS Configuration Menu.  
Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "Network Configuration" link  
on the left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the  
"TACACS Parameters" link to display the TACACS Configuration Menu.  
The TACACS Configuration Menus offer the following options:  
Enable: Enables/disables the TACACS feature at the Network Port. (Default = Off.)  
Primary Address: Defines the IP address or domain name (up to 64 characters)  
for your primary TACACS server. (Default = undefined.)  
Secondary Address: Defines the IP address or domain name (up to 64 characters)  
for your secondary, fallback TACACS server (if present.) (Default = undefined.)  
Secret Word: Defines the shared TACACS Secret Word for both TACACS servers.  
(Default = undefined.)  
Fallback Timer: Determines how long the MPC will continue to attempt to contact  
the primary TACACS Server before falling back to the secondary TACACS Server.  
(Default = 15 Seconds.)  
Fallback Local: Determines whether or not the MPC will fallback to its own  
password/username directory when an authentication attempt fails. When enabled,  
the MPC will first attempt to authenticate the password by checking the TACACS  
Server; if this fails, the MPC will then attempt to authenticate the password by  
checking its own internal username directory. (Default = Off.)  
Authentication Port: The port number for the TACACS function. (Default = 49.)  
5-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.9.10. RADIUS Parameters  
To access the RADIUS Configuration Menus, proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /Nand press [Enter] to access the Network Configuration  
Menu. From the Network Configuration Menu, type 29and press [Enter] to display  
the RADIUS Configuration Menu.  
Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "Network Configuration" link  
on the left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the  
"RADIUS Parameters" link to display the RADIUS Configuration Menu.  
The RADIUS Configuration Menus offer the following options:  
Enable: Enables/disables the RADIUS feature at the Network Port. (Default = Off.)  
Primary Address Defines the IP address or domain name (up to 64 characters  
long) for your primary RADIUS server. (Default = undefined.)  
Primary Secret Word: Defines the RADIUS Secret Word for the primary RADIUS  
server. (Default = undefined.)  
Secondary Address: Defines the IP address or domain name (up to 64 characters  
long) for your secondary, fallback RADIUS server (if present.)  
(Default = undefined.)  
Secondary Secret Word: Defines the RADIUS Secret Word for the secondary  
RADIUS server. (Default = undefined.)  
Fallback Timer: Determines how long the MPC will continue to attempt to contact  
the primary RADIUS Server before falling back to the secondary RADIUS Server.  
(Default = 3 Seconds.)  
Fallback Local: Determines whether or not the MPC will fallback to its own  
password/username directory when an authentication attempt fails. When enabled,  
the MPC will first attempt to authenticate the password by checking the RADIUS  
Server; if this fails, the MPC will then attempt to authenticate the password by  
checking its own internal username directory. This parameter offers three options:  
Off: Fallback Local is disabled (Default.)  
On (All Failures): Fallback Local is enabled, and the unit will fallback to it's  
own internal user directory when it cannot contact the Radius Server, or when a  
password or username does not match the Radius Server.  
On (Transport Failure): Fallback Local is enabled, but the unit will only fallback  
to it's own internal user directory when it cannot contact the Radius Server.  
Authentication Port: The Authentication Port number for the RADIUS function.  
(Default = 1812.)  
Accounting Port: The Accounting Port number for the RADIUS function.  
(Default = 1813.)  
Debug: (Text Interface Only) When enabled, the MPC will put RADIUS debug  
information into Syslog. (Default = Off.)  
5-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.9.10.1.  
Dictionary Support for RADIUS  
The RADIUS dictionary file can allow you to define a user and assign command access  
rights and plug access rights from a central location. The RADIUS dictionary file,  
"dictionary.wti" is included on the CDROM along with this user's guide. To install the  
dictionary file on your RADIUS server, please refer to the documentation provided with  
your server; some servers will require the dictionary file to reside in a specific directory  
location, others will require the dictionary file to be appended to an existing RADIUS  
dictionary file.  
The WTI RADIUS dictionary file provides the following commands:  
WTI-Super- Sets the command access level for the user. This command provides  
the following arguments:  
0= ViewOnly  
1= User  
2= SuperUser  
3= Administrator  
For example, in order to set command access level to "SuperUser", the command  
line would be:  
WTI-Super="2"  
WTI-Plug-Access- Determines which plug(s) the user will be allowed to access.  
This command provides an argument that consists of a four character string, with  
one character for each the MPC's switched outlets. The following options are  
available for each switched plug:  
0= Off (Deny Access)  
1= On (Allow Access)  
For example, to allow access to Plugs 2 and 4, the command line would be:  
WTI-Plug-Access="0101"  
WTI-Group-Access- Determines which plug group(s) the user will be allowed  
to access. The argument for this command includes a character for each, defined  
plug group, with the first character in the string being used to represent the first  
plug group defined, and the last character in the string representing the last plug  
group defined. The following options are available for each plug group:  
0= Off (Deny Access)  
1= On (Allow Access)  
For example, to allow access to the first three defined plug groups out of a total of  
six defined plug groups, the command line would be:  
WTI-Group-Access="111000"  
5-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
Example:  
The following command could be used to set the command access level to "User", allow  
access to Serial Ports 1, 3, 5 and 7 and Plugs 1 and 2, and also allow access to the first  
two of five defined plug groups:  
tom Auth-Type:=Local, User-Password=="tom1"  
Login-Service=Telnet,  
Login-TCP-Port=Telnet,  
User-Name="HARRY-tom",  
WTI-Super="1",  
WTI-Plug-Access="1100",  
WTI-Group-Access="11000",  
5-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.9.11. Email Message Parameters  
The Email Parameters menu is used to define parameters for email messages that  
the MPC can send to notify you when an alarm is triggered. To define email message  
parameters, access the MPC Command Mode using a password that permits access to  
Administrator Level commands and then proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /Nand press [Enter] to access the Network Configuration  
Menu. From the Network Configuration Menu, type 32and press [Enter] to display  
the Email Configuration Menu.  
Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "Network Configuration" link on  
the left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "Email  
Messages" link to display the Email Configuration Menu.  
The Email Configuration menu offers the following options:  
Enable: Enables/Disables the Email Messaging feature. When disabled, the MPC  
will not be able to send email messages when an alarm is generated.  
(Default = On.)  
SMTP Server: This prompt is used to define the address of your SMTP Email  
server. (Default = undefined.)  
Port Number: Selects the TCP/IP port number that will be used for email  
connections. (Default = 25.)  
Domain: The domain name for your email server. (Default = undefined.)  
Note: In order to use domain names, you must first define Domain Name  
Server parameters as described in Section 5.9.5.  
User Name: The User Name that will be entered when logging into your email  
server. (Default = undefined.)  
Password: The password that will be used when logging into your email server.  
(Default = undefined.)  
Auth Type: The Authentication type; the MPC allows you to select None, Plain,  
Login, or CRAM-MD5 Authentication. (Default = Plain.)  
From Name: The name that will appear in the "From" field in email sent by the  
MPC. (Default = undefined.)  
From Address: The email address that will appear in the "From" field in email sent  
by the MPC. (Default = undefined.)  
To Address: The address(es) that will receive email messages generated by the  
MPC. Note that up to three "To" addresses may be defined, and that when Alarm  
Configuration parameters are selected as described in Section 7, you may then  
designate one, two or all three of these addresses as recipients for email messages  
that are generated by the alarms. (Default = undefined.)  
Send Test Email: Sends a test email, using the parameters that are currently  
defined for the Email configuration menu.  
Note: The "Send Test Email" function is only available via the Text Interface.  
5-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
5.10. Save User Selected Parameters  
It is strongly recommended to save all user-defined parameters to an ASCII file as  
described in Section 15. This will allow quick recovery in the event of accidental  
deletion or reconfiguration of port parameters.  
When changing configuration parameters via the Text Interface, make certain that the  
MPC has saved the newly defined parameters before exiting from command mode.  
To save parameters, press the [Esc] key several times until you have exited from all  
configuration menus and the MPC displays the "Saving Configuration" menu and the  
cursor returns to the command prompt. If newly defined configuration parameters  
are not saved prior to exiting from command mode, then the MPC will revert to the  
previously saved configuration after you exit from command mode.  
5.10.1. Restore Configuration  
If you make a mistake while configuring the MPC unit, and wish to return to the  
previously saved parameters, the Text Interface's "Reboot System" command (/I) offers  
the option to reinitialize the unit using previously backed up parameters. This allows  
you to reset the unit to previously saved parameters, even after you have changed  
parameters and saved them.  
Notes:  
• The MPC will automatically backup saved parameters once a day, shortly  
after Midnight. This configuration backup file will contain only the most  
recently saved MPC parameters, and will be overwritten by the next night's  
daily backup.  
• When the /I command is invoked, a submenu will be displayed which  
offers several Reboot options. Options 5 and 6 are used to restore the  
configuration backup file. The dates shown next to options 5 and 6 indicate  
the date that you last changed and saved unit parameters.  
• If the daily automatic configuration backup has been triggered since the  
configuration error was made, and the previously saved configuration has  
been overwritten by newer, incorrect parameters, then this function will not  
be able to restore the previously saved (correct) parameters.  
To restore the previously saved configuration, proceed as follows:  
1. Access command move via the Text Interface, using a username/password that  
permits access to Administrator level commands (see Section 5.1.1.)  
2. At the MPC command prompt, type /Iand press [Enter]. The MPC will display a  
submenu that offers several different reboot options.  
3. At the submenu, you may choose either Item 5 (Reboot & Restore Last Known  
Working Configuration) or Item 6 (Restore Last Known Working Configuration.) Key  
in the number for the desired option, and then press [Enter].  
Note: When invoking the /I command to restore configuration parameters,  
Item 5 is recommended.  
4. The MPC will reboot and previously saved parameters will be restored.  
5-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Reboot Options  
In addition to performing reboot cycles in response to commands, the MPC can also be  
configured to automatically reboot outlets when an attached device does not respond  
to a Ping command (Ping-No-Answer Reboot) or according to a user defined schedule  
(Scheduled Reboot.)  
Ping-No-Answer Reboot: When the Ping-No-Answer feature is enabled, the MPC  
will Ping a user selected IP address at regular intervals. If the IP address does not  
respond to the Ping command, the MPC will reboot one or more user selected  
outlet(s). Typically, this feature is used to reboot devices when they cease to  
respond to the Ping command.  
Scheduled Reboot: A scheduled reboot is used to initiate a reboot cycle at a user  
selected time and day of the week. When properly configured and enabled, the  
MPC will reboot one or more outlets on a daily or weekly basis. The Scheduled  
Reboot feature can also be used to switch outlet(s) Off at a user selected time, and  
then switch them back On again at a later, user selected time.  
This section describes the procedure for configuring and enabling Ping-No-Answer  
Reboots and Scheduled Reboots.  
Note: When defining parameters via the Text Interface, make certain to press  
the [Esc] key to completely exit from the configuration menus and save newly  
defined parameters. When parameters are defined via the Text Interface, newly  
defined parameters will not be saved until the "Saving Configuration" message is  
displayed.  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reboot Options  
6.1. Ping-No-Answer Reboot  
A Ping-No-Answer Reboot can be used to reboot one or more outlets when an attached  
device does not respond to a Ping Command. In addition, the Ping-No-Answer Reboot  
feature can also be configured to send an email, Syslog Message or SNMP Trap to  
notify you whenever a Ping-No-Answer Reboot occurs. Please refer to Section 7.6 for  
instructions on setting up email alarm notification for Ping-No-Answer reboots.  
To set up a Ping-No-Answer Reboot, access command mode using a password that  
permits Administrator level commands and then proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /RBand press [Enter]. The Reboot Options Menu will be  
displayed. At the Reboot Options menu, type 1and press [Enter] to display  
the Ping-No-Answer Reboot Directory menu. From the Ping-No-Answer Reboot  
Directory Menu, you can Add, Modify, View or Delete Ping-No-Answer Reboot  
operations.  
Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "Reboot Options" link on the  
left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "Ping-  
No-Answer Reboot" link. The Ping-No-Answer Reboot Configuration menu will be  
displayed. From the Ping-No-Answer Reboot Configuration menu, you can Add,  
Modify, View or Delete Ping-No-Answer Reboot operations.  
6.1.1. Adding Ping-No-Answer Reboots  
To add a Ping-No-Answer Reboot, access command mode using a password that  
permits Administrator Level commands and then proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Access the Ping-No-Answer Reboot Directory menu as described in  
Section 6.1, then type 2and press [Enter].  
Web Browser Interface: Access the Ping-No-Answer Reboot Configuration menu  
as described in Section 6.1, then click on the Add Ping-No-Answer Reboot link.  
Up to 54 Ping-No-Answer Reboots can be defined. The Add Ping-No-Answer menu is  
used to define the following parameters for each new Ping-No-Answer Reboot:  
IP Address or Domain Name: The IP address or Domain Name for the device  
that you wish to Ping. When the device at this address fails to respond to the Ping  
command, the MPC will reboot the selected outlets. (Default = undefined.)  
Note: In order to use Domain Names, you must first define DNS parameters as  
described in Section 5.9.5.  
Ping Interval: Determines how often the Ping command will be sent to the  
selected IP Address. The Ping Interval can be any whole number, from 1 to 2,800  
minutes. (Default = 15 Minutes.)  
Interval After Failed Ping: Determines how often the Ping command will be sent  
after a previous Ping command receives no response. (Default = 1 Minute.)  
Ping Delay After Reboot: Determines how long the MPC will wait to send  
additional Ping commands, after a Ping-No-Answer Reboot has been initiated.  
Typically, this option is used to allow time for a device to fully "wake up" after a  
Ping-No-Answer Reboot before attempting to Ping the device again.  
(Default = 15 Minutes.)  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reboot Options  
Consecutive Failures: Determines how many consecutive failures of the Ping  
command must be detected in order to initiate a Ping-No-Answer Reboot. For  
example, if this value is set to "3", then after three consecutive Ping failures, a  
Ping-No-Answer Reboot will be performed. (Default = 3.)  
Reboot: Enables/Disables the Ping-No-Answer Reboot function for the specified IP  
address. When this item is disabled, the MPC will not reboot the specified outlet(s)  
when a Ping-No-Answer is detected. However, the MPC will continue to notify you  
via Email, Syslog Message and/or SNMP Trap, providing that parameters for these  
functions have been defined as described in Section 5.9 and email notification  
for the Ping-No-Answer function has been enabled as described in Section 7.6.  
(Default = No.)  
Notes:  
• In order for Email/Text Message Notification to function, you must first define  
Email/Text Message parameters as described in Section 5.9.11.  
• In order for Syslog Message Notification to function, you must first define a  
Syslog Address as described in Section 5.9.2.  
• In order for SNMP Trap Notification to function, you must first define SNMP  
parameters as described in Section 5.9.7.  
Reboot Action: Determines how the MPC will react when the IP address fails to  
respond to a ping. The MPC can either continuously reboot the specified outlet(s)  
and send notification until the IP address responds and the Ping-No-Answer Reboot  
is cleared (Continuous Alarm/Reboot), or the MPC can reboot the specified outlet(s)  
and send notification only once each time the Ping-No-Answer Reboot is initially  
triggered (Single Alarm/Reboot.) (Default = Continuous Alarm/Reboot.)  
Plug Access: Determines which outlet(s) will be rebooted when the IP address for  
this Ping-No-Answer operation does not respond to a Ping command. Note that  
in the Text Interface, Plug Access is defined via a separate submenu; in the Web  
Browser Interface, Plug Access is defined via a drop down menu, accessed by  
clicking on the "plus" sign in the "Configure Plug Access" field. If your installation  
includes optional AUX units, please refer to Section 6.1.1.1 for instructions  
regarding granting access to plugs on AUX units. (Default = undefined.)  
Plug Group Access: Determines which Plug Group(s) the Ping-No-Answer  
Reboot for this IP Address will be applied to. Note that in the Text Interface, Plug  
Group Access is defined via a separate submenu; in the Web Browser Interface,  
Plug Group Access is defined via a drop down menu, which may be accessed by  
clicking on the "plus" sign. (Default = undefined.)  
Ping Test: (Text Interface Only) Sends a test Ping command to the IP Address  
defined for this Ping-No-Answer Reboot.  
Note: After you have finished defining or editing Ping-No-Answer Reboot  
parameters, make certain to save the changes before proceeding. In the  
Web Browser Interface, click on the "Add Ping No Answer" button to save  
parameters; in the Text Interface, press the [Esc] key several times until the  
MPC displays the "Saving Configuration" message and the cursor returns to the  
command prompt.  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reboot Options  
6.1.1.1. Granting Access to Plugs on AUX Units  
Web Browser Interface  
To grant access to plugs on AUX units, simply select the desired plugs from the  
"Configure Plug Access" drop down menu and then click on the "Add Ping No Answer"  
button.  
Text Interface  
When Plug Access for a Ping No Answer Reboot is defined via the Text Interface, the  
following procedure is used to grant access to plugs on optional AUX/Remote units:  
1. From the Add Ping-No-Answer menu, type 7and press [Enter] to display the Plug  
Access menu. At the Plug Access menu, select plugs for your local MPC unit as  
you normally would, and when finished, press [Enter] to return to the Add Ping No  
Answer menu.  
2. To grant access to plugs on AUX units, type 7and press [Enter] again to return to  
the Plug Access menu, and then type >(greater than symbol) and press [Enter] to  
scroll to the desired AUX MPC unit. When the desired AUX unit is displayed, select  
plugs for the AUX unit as you normally would, and then press [Enter] to return to  
the Add Ping No Answer Menu.  
Note: The first line of the Plug Access menu will indicate the name of the AUX  
or Local MPC unit that is currently selected.  
3. Repeat Step 2 above to grant access to plugs on additional AUX units.  
4. When you have finished granting Plug Access rights to this Ping No Answer  
Reboot, define any other desired parameters required, and then make certain to  
press [Esc] several times until the "Saving Configuration" message is displayed and  
the unit returns to the MPC command prompt.  
6.1.2. Viewing Ping-No-Answer Reboot Profiles  
After you have defined one or more Ping-No-Answer Reboot profiles, you can review the  
parameters selected for each profile using the View Ping-No-Answer feature. To view  
the configuration of an existing Ping-No-Answer profile, access command mode using a  
password that allows Administrator level commands and then proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Access the Ping-No-Answer Reboot Directory menu as described  
in Section 6.1, then type 1and press [Enter]. The MPC will display a menu which  
shows all defined Ping-No-Answer Profiles, listed by their IP Addresses. Key in the  
IP Address for the desired profile, and then press [Enter] to display the View Ping-  
No-Answer Profile menu.  
Web Interface: Access the Ping-No-Answer Reboot Configuration menu as  
described in Section 6.1, then click on the View/Modify Ping-No-Answer Reboot  
link. The MPC will display a menu that allows you to select the desired Ping-No-  
Answer Reboot and directory function. Select the "View Profile" button, and then  
click on the down arrow, scroll to the desired Ping-No-Answer Reboot Profile, select  
the profile, and then click "Choose Ping-No-Answer Profile."  
The MPC will display a screen which lists all defined parameters for the selected  
Ping-No-Answer Reboot Profile.  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reboot Options  
6.1.3. Modifying Ping-No-Answer Reboot Profiles  
After you have defined a Ping-No-Answer profile, you can modify the configuration of  
the profile using the Modify Ping-No-Answer feature. To modify the configuration of an  
existing Ping-No-Answer profile, access the command mode using a password that  
allows Administrator level commands and then proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Access the Ping-No-Answer Reboot Directory menu as described  
in Section 6.1, then type 3and press [Enter]. The MPC will display a menu which  
shows all defined Ping-No-Answer Profiles, listed by their IP Addresses. Key in  
the IP Address for the desired profile, and then press [Enter] to display the Modify  
Ping-No-Answer Profile menu.  
Web Interface: Access the Ping-No-Answer Reboot Configuration menu as  
described in Section 6.1, then click on the View/Modify Ping-No-Answer Reboot  
link. The MPC will display a menu that allows you to select the desired Ping-No-  
Answer Reboot and directory function. Select the "Modify Profile" button, and then  
click on the down arrow, scroll to the desired Ping-No-Answer Reboot Profile, select  
the profile, and then click "Choose Ping-No-Answer Profile."  
The MPC will display a screen which allows you to modify parameters for the selected  
Ping-No-Answer Reboot Profile. Note that this screen functions identically to the Add  
Ping-No-Answer Reboot menu, as discussed in Section 6.1.1.  
Note: After you have finished defining or editing Ping-No-Answer Reboot  
parameters, make certain to save the changes before proceeding. In the  
Web Browser Interface, click on the "Change Ping No Answer" button to save  
parameters; in the Text Interface, press the [Esc] key several times until the  
MPC displays the "Saving Configuration" message and the cursor returns to the  
command prompt.  
6.1.4. Deleting Ping-No-Answer Reboot Profiles  
After you have defined one or more Ping-No-Answer profiles, you can delete profiles  
that are no longer needed using the Delete Ping-No-Answer feature. To delete an  
existing Ping-No-Answer profile, access the command mode using a password that  
allows Administrator level commands and then proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Access the Ping-No-Answer Reboot Directory menu as described  
in Section 6.1, then type 4and press [Enter]. The MPC will display a menu which  
shows all defined Ping-No-Answer Profiles, listed by their IP Addresses. Key in the  
IP Address for the desired profile, and then press [Enter] to delete the selected  
profile. The selected profile will be deleted immediately, with no further prompting.  
Web Interface: Access the Ping-No-Answer Reboot Configuration menu as  
described in Section 6.1, then click on the View/Modify Ping-No-Answer Reboot  
link. The MPC will display a menu that allows you to select the desired Ping-No-  
Answer profile and directory function. Select the "Delete Profile" button, and then  
click on the down arrow, scroll to the desired Ping-No-Answer Reboot Profile, select  
the profile, and then click "Choose Ping-No-Answer Profile." The MPC will display  
a screen which lists all defined parameters for the selected profile. To confirm  
deletion, Click on the "Delete Profile" button.  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reboot Options  
6.2. Scheduled Reboot  
The Scheduled Reboot feature can be used to reboot one or more outlets according to  
a user-defined schedule, or to automatically turn outlets Off and then On according to a  
user defined schedule.  
To configure a Scheduled Reboot, access command mode using a password that  
permits access to Administrator level commands and then proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /RBand press [Enter]. The Reboot Options Menu will be  
displayed. At the Reboot Options menu, type 2and press [Enter] to display the  
Scheduled Reboot Directory menu. From the Scheduled Reboot Directory Menu,  
you can Add, Modify, View or Delete Scheduled Reboots as described in the  
Sections that follow.  
Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "Reboot Options" link on the left  
hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "Scheduled  
Reboot" link to display the Scheduled Reboot Configuration menu. From the  
Scheduled Reboot Configuration menu, you can Add, Modify, View or Delete  
Scheduled Reboots as described in the Sections that follow.  
Note: After you have finished defining or editing Scheduled Reboot  
parameters, make certain to save the changes before proceeding. In the  
Web Browser Interface, click on the "Add Scheduled Reboot" button to save  
parameters; in the Text Interface, press the [Esc] key several times until the  
MPC displays the "Saving Configuration" message and the cursor returns to the  
command prompt.  
6.2.1. Adding Scheduled Reboots  
To add a Scheduled Reboot, access command mode using a password that permits  
Administrator Level commands and then proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Access the Scheduled Reboot Directory menu as described in  
Section 6.2, then type 2and press [Enter] to display the Add Scheduled Reboot  
Menu.  
Web Browser Interface: Access the Scheduled Reboot Configuration menu as  
described in Section 6.2, then click on the Add Scheduled Reboot link to display  
the Add Scheduled Reboot Menu.  
The MPC allows up to 54 Scheduled Reboots to be defined.  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reboot Options  
The Add Scheduled Reboot menu allows you to define the following parameters for  
each new Scheduled Reboot:  
Scheduled Reboot Name: Assigns a name to this Scheduled Reboot.  
(Default = undefined.)  
Plug Action: Determines whether the Scheduled Reboot will result in the outlet(s)  
being switched Off, or cycled Off and then On again (Reboot.) Note that when "Off"  
is selected, the "Day On" option and the "Time On" option can be used to select a  
time and day when the outlet(s) will be switched back On again. (Default = Off.)  
Recurrence: Determines whether the Scheduled Reboot will be performed on a  
Daily basis or a Weekly basis. (Default = Daily.)  
Day: Determines the day of the week that this Scheduled Reboot will occur on.  
(Default = undefined.)  
Time: Determines the time of the day that this Scheduled Reboot will occur on.  
(Default = 12:00.)  
Turn ON Day: When the "Action" parameter is set to "Off", this parameter can  
be used to determine the day that the outlet(s) will be switched back On again.  
(Default = undefined.)  
Turn ON Time: When the "Action" parameter has been set to "Off", this parameter  
can be used to determine the time when the outlet(s) will be switched back On  
again. (Default = 12:01.)  
Plug Access: Determines which outlet(s) this Scheduled Reboot action will be  
applied to. In the Text Interface, outlets are selected by typing 9, pressing [Enter]  
and then following the instructions in the resulting submenu. In the Web Browser  
Interface, outlets are designated by clicking on the "plus" sign in the Plug Access  
field, and then selecting the desired outlets from the drop down menu. If your  
installation includes optional AUX units, please refer to Section 6.2.1.1 for additional  
instructions regarding granting user account access to plugs on AUX units.  
(Default = undefined.)  
Plug Group Access: Determines which Plug Group(s) this Scheduled Reboot  
action will be applied to. Note that in the Text Interface, Plug Group Access is  
defined via a separate submenu; in the Web Browser Interface, Plug Group Access  
is defined via a drop down menu, which may be accessed by clicking on the "plus"  
sign in the Plug Group Access field. (Default = undefined.)  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reboot Options  
6.2.1.1. Granting Access to Plugs on AUX Units  
Web Browser Interface  
To grant access to plugs on AUX units, simply select the desired plugs from the  
"Configure Plug Access" drop down menu and then click on the "Add Scheduled  
Reboot" button.  
Text Interface  
When Plug Access for a Scheduled Reboot is defined via the Text Interface, the following  
procedure is used to grant access to plugs on optional AUX/Remote units:  
1. From the Add Scheduled Reboot menu, type 8and press [Enter] to display the  
Plug Access menu. At the Plug Access menu, select plugs for your local MPC  
unit as you normally would, and when finished, press [Enter] to return to the Add  
Scheduled Reboot menu.  
2. To grant access to plugs on AUX units, type 8and press [Enter] again to return to  
the Plug Access menu, and then type >(greater than symbol) and press [Enter] to  
scroll to the desired AUX MPC unit. When the desired AUX unit is displayed, select  
plugs for the AUX unit as you normally would, and then press [Enter] to return to  
the Add Scheduled Reboot Menu.  
Note: The first line of the Plug Access menu will indicate the name of the AUX  
or Local MPC unit that is currently selected.  
3. Repeat Step 2 above to grant access to plugs on additional AUX units.  
4. When you have finished granting Plug Access rights to this Scheduled Reboot,  
define any other desired parameters required, and then make certain to press [Esc]  
several times until the "Saving Configuration" message is displayed and the unit  
returns to the MPC command prompt.  
6.2.2. Viewing Scheduled Reboot Actions  
After you have defined one or more Scheduled Reboots, you can review the parameters  
selected for each Reboot using the View Scheduled Reboot feature. To view the  
configuration of an existing Scheduled Reboot, access the command mode using a  
password that allows Administrator level commands and then proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Access the Scheduled Reboot Directory menu as described in  
Section 6.2, then type 1and press [Enter]. The MPC will display a menu which  
lists all defined Scheduled Reboots. Key in the name of the desired Scheduled  
Reboot, and then press [Enter] to display the View Scheduled Reboot menu.  
Web Interface: Access the Scheduled Reboot Configuration menu as described  
in Section 6.2, then click on the View/Modify Scheduled Reboot link. The MPC  
will display a menu that allows you to select the desired Scheduled Reboot and  
directory function. Select the "View Scheduled Reboot" button, and then click on  
the down arrow, scroll to the desired Scheduled Reboot, select the reboot, and then  
click the "Choose Scheduled Reboot" button.  
The MPC will display a screen which lists all defined parameters for the selected  
Scheduled Reboot action.  
6-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reboot Options  
6.2.3. Modifying Scheduled Reboots  
After you have defined a Scheduled Reboot, you can edit the configuration of the  
Reboot action using the Modify Scheduled Reboot feature. To modify the configuration  
of an existing Scheduled Reboot action, access the command mode using a password  
that allows Administrator level commands and then proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Access the Scheduled Reboot Directory menu as described in  
Section 6.2, then type 3and press [Enter]. The MPC will display a menu which  
lists all defined Scheduled Reboot actions. Key in the name of the desired  
Scheduled Reboot action, and then press [Enter] to display the Modify Scheduled  
Reboot menu.  
Web Interface: Access the Scheduled Reboot Configuration menu as described  
in Section 6.2, then click on the View/Modify Scheduled Reboot link. The MPC  
will display a menu that allows you to select the desired Scheduled Reboot action  
and directory function. Select the "Modify Scheduled Reboot" button, and then  
click on the down arrow, scroll to the desired Scheduled Reboot action, select the  
Scheduled Reboot, and then click the "Choose Scheduled Reboot" button.  
The MPC will display a screen which allows you to modify parameters for the selected  
Scheduled Reboot action. Note that this screen functions identically to the Add  
Scheduled Reboot menu, as discussed in Section 6.2.1.  
6.2.4. Deleting Scheduled Reboots  
After you have defined one or more Scheduled Reboot actions, you can delete Reboot  
actions that are no longer needed using the Delete Scheduled Reboot feature. To  
delete an existing Scheduled Reboot, access the command mode using a password  
that allows Administrator level commands and then proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Access the Scheduled Reboot Directory menu as described in  
Section 6.2, then type 4and press [Enter]. The MPC will display a menu which  
lists all defined Scheduled Reboot actions. Key in the name of the desired reboot  
action, and then press [Enter] to delete the selected Scheduled Reboot. The  
selected Scheduled Reboot action will be deleted immediately, with no further  
prompting.  
Web Interface: Access the Scheduled Reboot Configuration menu as described  
in Section 6.2, then click on the View/Modify Scheduled Reboot link. The MPC will  
display a menu that allows you to select the desired Scheduled Reboot action and  
directory function. Select the "Delete Scheduled Reboot" button, and then click on  
the down arrow, scroll to the desired Scheduled Reboot, select the Reboot, and  
then click the "Choose Scheduled Reboot" button. The MPC will display a screen  
which lists all defined parameters for the selected Scheduled Reboot. To confirm  
deletion, Click on the "Delete Scheduled Reboot" button.  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7. Alarm Configuration  
When properly configured, the MPC can meter current, temperature and voltage  
readings, and log this information for future review. In addition, the MPC can also  
generate alarms when current or temperature readings exceed user-defined trigger  
levels, when input voltage is lost or restored to the unit, when a circuit breaker is open,  
when communication with the AUX units is disrupted, when a Ping-No-Answer condition  
is detected, and when the Invalid Access Lockout feature is triggered.  
When any of these conditions are detected, the MPC can send an "Alarm" to the proper  
personnel via Email, Syslog Message or SNMP trap. If the user-defined trigger levels  
for temperature and current load are exceeded, the MPC can also automatically shut  
off power to non-essential devices ("Load Shedding") in order to decrease current load  
and/or the amount of heat generated within the rack. After Load Shedding has taken  
place, the MPC can then restore power to the non-essential devices when temperature  
and/or current load drop to user-defined acceptable levels.  
This section describes the procedure for setting up the MPC to send alarm messages  
when any of these critical situations are detected. For instructions regarding  
configuration of the Log function, please refer to Section 5.3.4.  
Notes:  
• In order to send alarm notification via email, email addresses and parameters  
must first be defined as described in Section 5.9.11. Email alarm notification  
will then be sent for all alarms that are enabled as described in this Section.  
• In order to send alarm notification via Syslog Message, a Syslog address  
must first be defined as described in Section 5.9.2. Once the Syslog address  
has been defined, Syslog Messages will be sent for every alarm that is  
discussed in this Section, providing that the Trigger Enable parameter for the  
alarm has been set to "On."  
• In order to send alarm notification via SNMP Trap, SNMP Trap parameters  
must first be defined as described in Section 5.9.7. Once SNMP Trap  
Parameters have been defined, SNMP Traps will be sent for every alarm that  
is discussed in this Section, providing that the Trigger Enable parameter for  
the alarm has been set to "On."  
• When defining parameters via the Text Interface, make certain to press the  
[Esc] key to completely exit from the configuration menu and save newly  
defined parameters. When parameters are defined via the Text Interface,  
newly defined parameters will not be saved until the "Saving Configuration"  
message is displayed.  
To configure the MPC's Alarm functions, access the command mode using a password  
that allows Administrator level commands and then proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /ACand then press [Enter] to display the Alarm  
Configuration Menu.  
Web Browser Interface: Click the "Alarm Configuration" link, located on the left  
hand side of the screen to display the Alarm Configuration Menu.  
7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alarm Configuration  
7.1. The Over Current Alarms  
The Over Current Alarms are designed to inform you when current consumption  
reaches or exceeds user-defined levels. Depending on the specific MPC model, MPC  
units can have up to four Over Current Alarms (two sets of two alarms):  
• The Over Current Line (Initial) Alarm  
• The Over Current Line (Critical) Alarm  
• The Over Current Branch (Initial) Alarm  
• The Over Current Branch (Critical) Alarm  
Notes:  
• The Line Alarms are only included in MPC models that include two or more  
power branches per input line.  
• The parameters that are defined via the Over Current (Initial and Critical)  
Alarm Configuration menus will be applied to both Over Current Line Alarms  
and Over Current Branch Alarms.  
• The MPC does not include separate configuration menus for the Line and  
Branch Overcurrent Alarms. Parameters that are defined via the Over Current  
Alarm configuration menus will be applied to both Branch and Line (if  
present) Alarms.  
The Line alarms monitor the load on the input line, and are only available on single input  
units, whereas the Branch alarms monitor the load on each branch circuit breaker.  
The Initial alarms are used to provide notification when the level of current consumption  
reaches a point where you might want to investigate it, whereas the Critical alarms can  
provide notification when the level of current consumption approaches the maximum  
allowed level. The trigger levels for the Initial alarms are generally set lower than the  
trigger levels for the Critical alarms.  
If the user-defined trigger levels for current load are exceeded, the MPC can  
automatically shut off power to non-essential devices ("Load Shedding") in order to  
decrease current load. After Load Shedding has taken place, the MPC can also restore  
power to the non-essential devices when current load drops to user-defined acceptable  
levels. For more information on Load Shedding, please refer to Section 7.1.1.  
The Load Shedding feature can be configured to react in one manner when an Over  
Current Line Alarm is triggered, and in a different manner when an Over Current Branch  
Alarm is triggered. For example, Load Shedding may be configured in such a way that  
when the Line Alarm is triggered, plugs A1 and B1 are switched Off, but when a Branch  
Alarm is triggered, plugs A1 and A2 are switched Off.  
Notes:  
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via Email, communication  
parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5.9.11.  
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via Syslog Message, Syslog  
parameters must first be defined and Syslog Messages must be enabled as  
described in Section 5.9.2 and Section 11.  
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via SNMP Trap, SNMP  
parameters must first be defined, and SNMP Traps must be enabled as  
described in Section 5.9.7 and Section 12.  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alarm Configuration  
To configure the Over Current Alarms, access the MPC command mode using a  
password that permits Administrator Level commands, and then proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /ACand then press [Enter] to display the Alarm Configuration  
Menu. From the Alarm Configuration Menu, key in the number for the alarm that  
you wish to configure and then press [Enter].  
Web Browser Interface: Click the "Alarm Configuration" link, located on the left  
hand side of the screen to display the Alarm Configuration Menu. From the Alarm  
Configuration Menu, click on the link for the alarm that you wish to configure.  
Note that the configuration menus for the Over Current Alarms offer essentially the same  
set of parameters, but the parameters defined for each alarm are separate and unique.  
Therefore, parameters defined for a Critical Alarm will not be applied to an Initial Alarm  
and vice versa.  
The Over Current Alarm Configuration Menus offer the following parameters:  
Trigger Enable: Enables/Disables the trigger for this alarm. When Disabled, this  
alarm will be suppressed. (Default = On.)  
Note: To cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the  
alarm, simply toggle the Trigger Enable parameter Off and then back On again.  
Alarm Set Threshold: The trigger level for this alarm. When current load exceeds  
the Alarm Set Threshold, the MPC can send an alarm (if enabled) and/or begin  
load shedding (if enabled.) Note that the Alarm Set Threshold is entered as a  
percentage of maximum capacity and is applied to both Over Current Branch Alarm  
and Over Current Line Alarm (if present.) (Defaults: Initial Alarms = 80%;  
Critical Alarms = 90%.)  
Alarm Clear Threshold: Determines how low the current load must drop in  
order for the Alarm condition to be cancelled and for load shedding recovery (if  
enabled) to occur. Note that the Alarm Clear Threshold is entered as a percentage  
of maximum capacity and is applied to both Over Current Branch Alarm and Over  
Current Line Alarm (if present.) (Defaults: Initial Alarms = 70%;  
Critical Alarms = 80%.)  
Resend Delay: Determines how long the MPC will wait to resend an email  
message generated by this alarm, when the initial attempt to send the notification  
was unsuccessful. (Default = 60 Minutes.)  
Notify Upon Clear: When this item is enabled, the MPC will send additional  
notification when the situation that caused the alarm has been corrected. For  
example, when Notify Upon Clear is enabled, the MPC will first send notification  
when it detects that current consumption has exceeded the trigger value, and then  
send a second notification when it determines that the current consumption has  
fallen below the trigger value. (Default = On.)  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alarm Configuration  
Email Message: Enables/Disables email notification for this alarm. (Default = On.)  
Note: The Email Message parameter offers four different options: On, Off, On  
(Copy to All Triggers) or Off (Copy to All Triggers). If either of the "Copy to All  
Triggers" options is selected, then email notification for all other alarms will be  
switched On or Off as indicated by this parameter. For example, If "Off (Copy  
to All Triggers)" is selected, then Email notification will be disabled for all other  
alarms too.  
Address 1, 2, and 3: These parameters are used to select which of the three email  
addresses defined via the "Email Messages" menu (see Section 5.9.11) will receive  
the email alarm notification messages generated by this alarm. The Address  
parameters can be used to select one, or any combination of the addresses defined  
via the Email Messages menu. (Default = All On.)  
Note: If Email addresses have been previously defined, then the text under the  
parameters will list the current, user selected email addresses.  
Subject: This parameter is used to define the text that will appear in the "Subject"  
field for all email notification messages generated by the alarm.  
(Defaults:  
• Over Current (Initial) = "Alarm: Over Current (Initial)"  
• Over Current (Critical) = "Alarm: Over Current (Critical)")  
Load Shedding: Provides access to a submenu, which is used to configure  
and enable the Load Shedding feature for the Over Current Alarm. When Load  
Shedding is enabled and properly configured, the MPC will switch specific,  
user-selected plugs On or Off whenever the current load exceeds the Alarm Set  
Threshold value. If the Auto Recovery feature is enabled, the MPC can also return  
these user-selected plugs to their prior status, when current load falls below the  
Alarm Clear Threshold value. For more information on the Load Shedding Feature  
and Auto Recovery, please refer to Section 7.1.1.  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alarm Configuration  
7.1.1. Over Current Alarms - Load Shedding and Auto Recovery  
The Load Shedding feature is used to switch specific, user-defined, non-essential plugs  
On or Off whenever current load exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold value. This allows  
the MPC to automatically shut Off plugs in order to reduce current load when the load  
approaches user-defined critical levels. When the Auto Recovery feature is enabled,  
the MPC can also automatically "undo" the effects of the Load Shedding feature when  
current load again falls to a user-defined non-critical level.  
The MPC also allows you to define separate Load Shedding/Recovery actions for an  
Over Current Branch Alarm and an Over Current Line Alarm. For example, if the Line  
Alarm is triggered, Load Shedding can switch Off Plugs A1 and B1, yet when the Branch  
"A" Alarm is triggered, the MPC can switch Off Plugs A1 and A2.  
Together, the Load Shedding and Auto Recovery features allow the MPC to shut off  
power to non-essential devices when the current load is too high, and then switch those  
same non-essential devices back On again when the load falls to an acceptable level.  
Notes:  
• The Load Shedding Configuration Menus for all Over Current Alarms offer  
essentially the same set of parameters, but the parameters defined for each  
alarm are separate and unique. For example, parameters defined for Over  
Current (Initial) Alarm Load Shedding will not be applied to Over Current  
(Critical) Alarm Load Shedding and vice versa.  
• The Load Shedding Configuration Menus for the Text Interface and Web  
Browser Interface differ slightly; in the Web Browser Interface the Local/  
AUX setting and Branch/Line setting are defined via the Over Current  
Alarm Configuration Menu, whereas in the Text Interface, these settings are  
accessed via submenus of the Load Shedding Configuration Menu.  
7.1.1.1. Load Shedding & Auto Recovery Configuration - Text Interface  
In the Text Interface, Load Shedding parameters for the Over Current Alarms are defined  
as follows:  
1. Access the Over Current Alarm Configuration Menu as described in Section 7.1.  
2. At the Over Current Alarm Configuration Menu, type 5and press [Enter] to access  
the Load Shedding Configuration Menu. The following parameters will be available:  
1. Unit to Configure: When optional, remote MPC or BPM units have been  
connected to your local MPC's AUX ports, this parameter is used to select the  
Local or AUX unit that you wish to define Load Shedding parameters for.  
(Default = Local.)  
2. Branch A Load Shedding: Defines the Load Shedding actions that will be  
executed by the selected (Local or AUX) MPC unit when an Over Current  
Branch Alarm is triggered at Branch "A".  
3. Branch B Load Shedding: Defines the Load Shedding actions that will be  
executed by the selected (Local or AUX) MPC unit when an Over Current  
Branch Alarm is triggered at Branch "B".  
4. Line Load Shedding: Defines the Load Shedding actions that will be executed  
by the selected (Local or AUX) MPC unit when an Over Current Line Alarm is  
triggered.  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alarm Configuration  
3. After defining the "Unit to Configure" parameter, use items 2, 3, and 4 to select  
Load Shedding parameters for the selected branch or line. The Branch/Line Load  
Shedding Configuration Menus offer the following parameters:  
1. Enable: Enables/Disables Load Shedding for the corresponding alarm. When  
enabled, the MPC will switch the user specified plugs whenever current load  
exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold value. (Default = Disable.)  
2. Plug State: Determines whether the selected plugs/plug groups will be  
switched On or Off when Load Shedding is enabled and current load exceeds  
the user-defined Alarm Set Threshold. For example, if the Plug State is set to  
"Off", then the selected plugs/plug groups will be switched Off when the Alarm  
Set Threshold is exceeded. (Default = Off.)  
3. Auto Recovery: Enables/Disables the Auto Recovery feature for the selected  
unit/branch/line. When both Load Shedding and Auto Recovery are enabled,  
the MPC will return plugs to their former On/Off state after the current load falls  
below the Alarm Clear Threshold value. This allows the MPC to "undo" the  
effects of the Load Shedding feature after the current load has returned to an  
acceptable level. (Default = Off.)  
4. Plug Access: Determines which Plug(s) will be switched when the current  
load exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold and the Load Shedding feature is  
triggered. For example, if plugs A1, A2 and A3 are selected, then these plugs  
will be switched On or Off whenever the current load exceeds the Alarm Set  
Threshold. (Default = undefined.)  
Notes:  
• In the Text Interface, Plug Access is configured by typing 4, pressing [Enter]  
and then selecting the desired Plug(s) from the resulting submenu.  
• If your installation includes optional AUX units, please refer to Section 7.1.1.3  
for additional instructions regarding granting access to plugs on AUX units.  
5. Plug Group Access: Determines which Plug Group(s) will be switched when  
the Load Shedding feature is triggered. For example, if you have defined  
a Plug Group named "test", which includes Plugs B3, B4 and B5, and then  
selected the "test" Plug Group via the Plug Group Access parameter, then all  
of the plugs in the "test" Plug Group will be switched On or Off whenever the  
current load exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold. (Default = undefined.)  
Notes:  
• In the Text Interface, Plug Group Access is configured by typing 5, pressing  
[Enter] and then selecting the desired Plug Group(s) from the resulting  
submenu.  
• Plug Groups must first be defined (as described in Section 5.6) before they  
will be displayed in the Load Shedding menu's Plug Group Access submenu.  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alarm Configuration  
7.1.1.2. Load Shedding & Auto Recovery Configuration - Web Browser Interface  
In the Web Browser Interface, Load Shedding and Auto Recovery parameters are  
defined as follows:  
1. Access the Over Current Alarm Configuration Menu as described in Section 7.1.  
2. At the Over Current Alarm Configuration Menu, use the two drop down menus next  
to the Load Shedding button to determine the Local/AUX MPC unit and the desired  
Branch or Line.  
a) Local/AUX: ("Unit to Configure") When optional, remote MPC or BPM units  
have been connected to your local MPC's AUX ports, this parameter is used to  
select the Local or AUX unit that you wish to define Load Shedding parameters  
for. (Default = Local.)  
b) Branch/Line: Selects the configuration menu for the Branch A, Branch B or  
Line Load Shedding actions. This allows you to define one set of actions that  
will be performed when an alarm is triggered at Branch A, a different set of  
actions that will be performed when an alarm is triggered at Branch B, and yet  
another set of actions that will be performed when an alarm is triggered by the  
Over Current Line Alarm.  
Notes:  
• The Over Current Line Alarm is only available in units that feature two or more  
branches per input line.  
• When an Over Current Alarm is triggered, the MPC will automatically perform  
the set of actions that have been defined for the corresponding branch or  
line.  
3. After selecting the Local/AUX unit and power branch or line, click on the Load  
Shedding button to select parameters for the selected unit/branch/line. The  
resulting submenu will offer the following options:  
Enable: Enables/Disables Load Shedding for the selected unit and branch or  
line. When enabled, the MPC will switch the user specified Plugs or Plug Groups  
whenever the current load exceeds the user-defined Alarm Set Threshold value.  
(Default = Disable.)  
Plug State: Determines whether the selected plugs/plug groups will be switched  
On or Off when Load Shedding is enabled and current load exceeds the user-  
defined Alarm Set Threshold. For example, if the Plug State is set to "Off",  
then the selected plugs/plug groups will be switched Off when the Alarm Set  
Threshold is exceeded at the selected unit/branch/line. (Default = Off.)  
Auto Recovery: Determines whether the selected plugs/plug groups will be  
switched On or Off when Load Shedding is enabled and current load exceeds the  
user-defined Alarm Set Threshold at the selected unit/branch/line. For example, if  
the Plug State is set to "Off", then the selected plugs/plug groups will be switched  
Off when the Alarm Set Threshold is exceeded. (Default = Off.)  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alarm Configuration  
Plug Access: Determines which Plug(s) will be switched when the current load  
exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold and the Load Shedding feature is triggered at  
the selected unit/branch/line. For example, if plugs A1, A2 and A3 are selected,  
then these plugs will be switched On or Off whenever the current load exceeds  
the Alarm Set Threshold at the selected unit/branch/line. (Default = undefined.)  
Notes:  
• In the Web Browser Interface, Plug Access is configured by clicking on the  
"plus" symbol in the "Configure Plug Access" field to display the drop down  
menu, and then selecting the desired Plug(s) from the drop down menu.  
• If your installation includes optional AUX units, please refer to Section 7.1.1.3  
for additional instructions regarding granting access to plugs on AUX units.  
Plug Group Access: Determines which Plug Group(s) will be switched when  
the current exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold and the Load Shedding feature is  
triggered at the selected unit/branch/line. For example, if you have defined a  
Plug Group named "test", which includes Plugs B3, B4 and B5, and then selected  
the "test" Plug Group via the Plug Group Access parameter, then all of the plugs  
in the "test" Plug Group will be switched On or Off whenever the current exceeds  
the Alarm Set Threshold at the selected unit/branch/line. (Default = undefined.)  
Notes:  
• In the Web Browser Interface, Plug Group Access is configured by clicking  
on the "plus" symbol in the "Configure Plug Group Access" field to display  
the drop down menu, and then selecting the desired Plug Group(s) from the  
drop down menu.  
• Plug Groups must first be defined (as described in Section 5.6) before they  
will be displayed in the Load Shedding menu's Plug Group Access submenu.  
4. After setting parameters for a given unit and branch or line, you may also define  
additional parameters for other attached units or branches. To set Load Shedding  
parameters for other units, branches or lines, return to the Alarm Configuration  
menu and then repeat steps two and three.  
7-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alarm Configuration  
7.1.1.3. Granting Access to Plugs on AUX Units  
Web Browser Interface  
To grant access to plugs on AUX units, simply select the desired plugs from the  
"Configure Plug Access" drop down menu and then click on the "Change Load  
Shedding" button.  
Text Interface  
When Plug Access is defined via the Text Interface, the following procedure is used to  
grant access to plugs on optional AUX/Remote units:  
1. From the Load Shedding menu, type 4and press [Enter] to display the Plug  
Access menu. At the Plug Access menu, select plugs for your local MPC unit  
as you normally would, and when finished, press [Enter] to return to the Load  
Shedding menu.  
2. To grant access to plugs on AUX units, type 4and press [Enter] again to return to  
the Plug Access menu, and then type >(greater than symbol) and press [Enter] to  
scroll to the desired AUX MPC unit. When the desired AUX unit is displayed, select  
plugs for the AUX unit as you normally would, and then press [Enter] to return to  
the Load Shedding Menu.  
Note: The first line of the Plug Access menu will indicate the name of the AUX  
or Local MPC unit that is currently selected.  
3. Repeat Step 2 above to grant access to plugs on additional AUX units.  
4. When you have finished granting Plug Access rights for this alarm, define any other  
desired parameters required, and then make certain to press [Esc] several times  
until the "Saving Configuration" message is displayed and the unit returns to the  
MPC command prompt.  
7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alarm Configuration  
7.2. The Over Temperature Alarms  
The Over Temperature Alarms are designed to inform you when the temperature level  
inside your equipment rack reaches or exceeds certain user-defined levels. There  
are two separate Over Temperature Alarms; the Initial Threshold alarm and the Critical  
Threshold Alarm.  
Typically, the Initial Threshold alarm is used to notify you when the temperature within  
your equipment rack reaches a point where you might want to investigate it, whereas the  
Critical Threshold alarm is used to notify you when the temperature approaches a level  
that may harm equipment or inhibit performance. The trigger for the Initial Threshold  
alarm is generally set lower than the Critical Threshold alarm.  
If the user-defined trigger levels for temperature are exceeded, the MPC can  
automatically shut off power to non-essential devices ("Load Shedding") in order to  
reduce the amount of temperature that is being generated within the rack. In addition,  
the Load Shedding feature can also be used to switch On additional components, such  
as fans or cooling systems in order to dissipate the excess heat. After Load Shedding  
has taken place, the Load Shedding Recovery feature can be used to return plugs to  
their previous state after the temperature drops to an acceptable level.  
Notes:  
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via Email, communication  
parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5.9.11.  
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via Syslog Message, Syslog  
parameters must first be defined and Syslog Messages must be enabled as  
described in Section 5.9.2 and Section 11.  
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via SNMP Trap, SNMP  
parameters must first be defined, and SNMP Traps must be enabled as  
described in Section 5.9.7 and Section 12.  
• When additional, optional remote MPC units have been connected to the  
AUX Ports on your local MPC unit, Over Temperature alarms can also be  
separately defined for each individual Local/AUX unit.  
To configure the Over Temperature Alarms, access the MPC command mode using a  
password that permits Administrator Level commands, and then proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /ACand then press [Enter] to display the Alarm Configuration  
Menu. From the Alarm Configuration Menu, either type 3and press [Enter] to  
access the Over Temperature (Initial Threshold) Alarm, or type 4and press [Enter]  
to access the Over Temperature (Critical Threshold) Alarm.  
Web Browser Interface: Click the "Alarm Configuration" link, located on the left  
hand side of the screen to display the Alarm Configuration Menu. From the Alarm  
Configuration Menu, click on either the "Over Temperature (Initial Threshold)" link or  
the "Over Temperature (Critical Threshold)" link to access the desired menu.  
Note that both the Initial Threshold menus and Critical Threshold menus offer essentially  
the same set of parameters, but the parameters defined for each alarm are separate  
and unique. Therefore, parameters defined for the Critical Threshold Alarm will not be  
applied to the Initial Threshold Alarm and vice versa.  
7-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alarm Configuration  
Both the Over Temperature (Initial Threshold) alarm and the Over Temperature (Critical  
Threshold) alarm offer the following parameters:  
Trigger Enable: Enables/Disables the trigger for this alarm. When Disabled, this  
alarm will be suppressed. (Default = On.)  
Note: To cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the  
alarm, simply toggle the Trigger Enable parameter Off and then back On again.  
Alarm Set Threshold: The trigger level for this alarm. When temperature exceeds  
the Alarm Set Threshold, the MPC can send an alarm (if enabled) and/or begin  
Load Shedding (if enabled.) For more information on Load Shedding for the Over  
Temperature Alarm, please refer to Section 7.2.1. (Initial Threshold: Default = 90°F  
or 32°C, Critical Threshold: Default = 100°F or 38°C.)  
Alarm Clear Threshold: Determines how low the temperature must drop in order  
for the Alarm condition to be cancelled and for Load Shedding (if enabled) to occur.  
For more information on Load Shedding for the Over Temperature Alarm, please  
refer to Section 7.2.1. (Initial Threshold: Default = 80°F or 27°C, Critical Threshold:  
Default = 90°F or 38°C.)  
Note: The System Parameters menu is used to set the temperature format for  
the MPC unit to either Fahrenheit or Celsius as described in Section 5.3.  
Resend Delay: Determines how long the MPC will wait to resend an email  
message generated by this alarm, when the initial attempt to send notification was  
unsuccessful. (Default = 60 Minutes.)  
Notify Upon Clear: When this item is enabled, the MPC will send additional  
notification when the situation that caused the alarm has been corrected. For  
example, when Notify Upon Clear is enabled, the MPC will send initial notification  
when it detects that the temperature has exceeded the trigger value, and then send  
a second notification when it determines that the temperature has fallen below the  
trigger value. (Default = On.)  
Email Message: Enables/Disables email notification for this alarm. (Default = On.)  
Note: The Email Message parameter offers four different options: On, Off, On  
(Copy to All Triggers) or Off (Copy to All Triggers). If either of the "Copy to All  
Triggers" options is selected, then email notification for all other alarms will be  
switched On or Off as indicated by this parameter. For example, If "Off (Copy  
to All Triggers)" is selected, then Email notification will be disabled for all other  
alarms too.  
7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alarm Configuration  
Address 1, 2, and 3: These parameters are used to select which of the three email  
addresses, defined via the "Email Messages" menu (see Section 5.9.11,) will receive  
the email alarm notification messages generated by this alarm. The Address  
parameters can be used to select one, or any combination of the addresses defined  
via the Email Messages menu. (Default = All On.)  
Note: If Email addresses have been previously defined, then the text under the  
parameters will list the current, user defined email addresses.  
Subject: This parameter is used to define the text that will appear in the "Subject"  
field for all email notification messages generated by this alarm. (Default = "Alarm:  
Over Temperature (Initial)" or "Alarm: Over Temperature (Critical)".)  
Load Shedding: Provides access to a submenu, which is used to configure  
and enable the Load Shedding feature for the Over Temperature alarms. When  
Load Shedding is enabled and properly configured, the MPC will switch specific,  
user-selected plugs On or Off whenever the temperature exceeds the Alarm Set  
Threshold value. If the Auto Recovery feature is enabled, the MPC can also return  
these user-selected plugs to their prior status, when the temperature falls below the  
Alarm Clear Threshold value. For more information on the Load Shedding Feature  
and Auto Recovery, please refer to Section 7.2.1.  
7.2.1. Over Temperature Alarms - Load Shedding and Auto Recovery  
In the case of the Over Temperature Alarms, the Load Shedding feature is used to switch  
specific, user-defined plugs On or Off whenever the temperature exceeds the Alarm Set  
Threshold value. This allows the MPC to automatically shut Off non-essential devices in  
order to reduce the temperature being generated within the rack, or automatically switch  
On devices such as fans or cooling systems in order to dissipate heat from the rack.  
When the Auto Recovery feature is enabled, the MPC can also automatically "undo" the  
effects of the Load Shedding feature when the temperature again falls to a user-defined  
non-critical level.  
When additional, optional remote MPC units have been connected to the AUX ports on  
your local MPC unit, separate Load Shedding and Auto Recovery actions can also be  
separately defined for each individual Local/AUX unit.  
Notes:  
• The Load Shedding Configuration Menus for both the Initial and Critical Over  
Temperature Alarms offer essentially the same set of parameters, but the  
parameters defined for each alarm are separate and unique. For example,  
parameters defined for Over Temperature (Initial) Alarm Load Shedding will  
not be applied to Over Temperature (Critical) Alarm Load Shedding and  
vice versa.  
• The Load Shedding Configuration Menus for the Text Interface and Web  
Browser Interface differ slightly; in the Web Browser Interface the Local/  
AUX setting is defined via the Over Temperature Alarm Configuration Menu,  
whereas in the Text Interface, this setting is accessed via submenus of the  
Load Shedding Configuration Menu.  
7-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alarm Configuration  
7.2.1.1. Load Shedding & Auto Recovery Configuration - Text Interface  
In the Text Interface, Load Shedding parameters for the Over Temperature Alarm are  
defined as follows:  
1. Access the Over temperature Alarm Configuration Menu as described in  
Section 7.2.  
2. At the Over Temperature Alarm Configuration Menu, type 5and press [Enter] to  
access the Load Shedding Configuration Menu. The following parameters will be  
available:  
1. Unit to Configure: When optional, remote MPC or BPM units have been  
connected to your local MPC's AUX ports, this parameter is used to select the  
Local or AUX unit that you wish to define Load Shedding parameters for.  
(Default = Local.)  
2. Configure Load Shedding for Unit: Provides access to a submenu that is  
used to define Over Temperature Alarm Load Shedding parameters for the unit  
selected at the "Unit to Configure" prompt as described in the next step.  
3. After defining the "Unit to Configure" parameter, use type 2 and press [Enter] to  
define Load Shedding parameters for the selected unit. The Over Temperature  
Alarm Load Shedding Configuration Menu offers the following parameters:  
1. Enable: Enables/Disables Load Shedding for the Over Temperature Alarm.  
When enabled, the MPC will switch the user specified plugs whenever the  
temperature exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold value. (Default = Disable.)  
2. Plug State: Determines whether the selected plugs/plug groups will be  
switched On or Off when Load Shedding is enabled and temperature exceeds  
the user-defined Alarm Set Threshold. For example, if the Plug State is set to  
"Off", then the selected plugs/plug groups will be switched Off when the Alarm  
Set Threshold is exceeded. (Default = Off.)  
3. Auto Recovery: Enables/Disables the Auto Recovery feature for the selected  
unit. When both Load Shedding and Auto Recovery are enabled, the MPC will  
return plugs to their former On/Off state after the temperature falls below the  
Alarm Clear Threshold value. This allows the MPC to "undo" the effects of the  
Load Shedding feature after the temperature returned to an acceptable level.  
(Default = Off.)  
4. Plug Access: Determines which Plug(s) will be switched when the  
temperature exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold and the Load Shedding feature  
is triggered. For example, if plugs A1, A2 and A3 are selected, then these  
plugs will be switched On or Off whenever the temperature exceeds the Alarm  
Set Threshold. (Default = undefined.)  
Notes:  
• In the Text Interface, Plug Access is configured by typing 4, pressing [Enter]  
and then selecting the desired Plug(s) from the resulting submenu.  
• If your installation includes optional AUX units, please refer to Section 7.2.1.3  
for additional instructions regarding granting access to plugs on AUX units.  
7-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alarm Configuration  
5. Plug Group Access: Determines which Plug Group(s) will be switched when  
the Load Shedding feature is triggered. For example, if you have defined  
a Plug Group named "test", which includes Plugs B3, B4 and B5, and then  
selected the "test" Plug Group via the Plug Group Access parameter, then all  
of the plugs in the "test" Plug Group will be switched On or Off whenever the  
temperature exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold. (Default = undefined.)  
Notes:  
• In the Text Interface, Plug Group Access is configured by typing 5, pressing  
[Enter] and then selecting the desired Plug Group(s) from the resulting  
submenu.  
• Plug Groups must first be defined (as described in Section 5.6) before they  
will be displayed in the Load Shedding menu's Plug Group Access submenu.  
7.1.1.2. Load Shedding & Auto Recovery Configuration - Web Browser Interface  
In the Web Browser Interface, Load Shedding and Auto Recovery parameters for the  
Over Temperature Alarms are defined as follows:  
1. Access the Over Temperature Alarm Configuration Menu as described in  
Section 7.2.  
2. At the Over Temperature Alarm Configuration Menu, use the drop down menu next  
to the Load Shedding button to determine the Local/AUX MPC unit. When optional,  
remote MPC or BPM units have been connected to your local MPC's AUX ports,  
this parameter is used to select the Local or AUX unit that you wish to define Over  
Temperature Alarm Load Shedding parameters for. (Default = Local.)  
3. After selecting the Local/AUX unit, click on the Load Shedding button to select  
parameters for the selected unit. The resulting submenu will offer the following  
options:  
Enable: Enables/Disables Load Shedding for the selected unit. When enabled,  
the MPC will switch the user specified Plugs or Plug Groups whenever the  
temperature exceeds the user-defined Alarm Set Threshold value.  
(Default = Disable.)  
Plug State: Determines whether the selected plugs/plug groups will be switched  
On or Off when Load Shedding is enabled and the temperature exceeds the  
user-defined Alarm Set Threshold. For example, if the Plug State is set to "Off",  
then the selected plugs/plug groups will be switched Off when the Alarm Set  
Threshold is exceeded at the selected unit. (Default = Off.)  
Auto Recovery: Determines whether the selected plugs/plug groups will be  
switched On or Off when Load Shedding is enabled and the temperature exceeds  
the user-defined Alarm Set Threshold at the selected unit. For example, if the  
Plug State is set to "Off", then the selected plugs/plug groups will be switched Off  
when the Alarm Set Threshold is exceeded. (Default = Off.)  
7-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alarm Configuration  
Plug Access: Determines which Plug(s) will be switched when the temperature  
exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold and the Load Shedding feature is triggered at  
the selected unit. For example, if plugs A1, A2 and A3 are selected, then these  
plugs will be switched On or Off whenever the temperature exceeds the Alarm  
Set Threshold at the selected unit/branch/line. (Default = undefined.)  
Notes:  
• In the Web Browser Interface, Plug Access is configured by clicking on the  
"plus" symbol in the "Configure Plug Access" field to display the drop down  
menu, and then selecting the desired Plug(s) from the drop down menu.  
• If your installation includes optional AUX units, please refer to Section 7.2.1.3  
for additional instructions regarding granting access to plugs on AUX units.  
Plug Group Access: Determines which Plug Group(s) will be switched when the  
temperature exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold and the Load Shedding feature  
is triggered at the selected unit. For example, if you have defined a Plug Group  
named "test", which includes Plugs B3, B4 and B5, and then selected the "test"  
Plug Group via the Plug Group Access parameter, then all of the plugs in the  
"test" Plug Group will be switched On or Off whenever the temperature exceeds  
the Alarm Set Threshold at the selected unit. (Default = undefined.)  
Notes:  
• In the Web Browser Interface, Plug Group Access is configured by clicking  
on the "plus" symbol in the "Configure Plug Group Access" field to display  
the drop down menu, and then selecting the desired Plug Group(s) from the  
drop down menu.  
• Plug Groups must first be defined (as described in Section 5.6) before they  
will be displayed in the Load Shedding menu's Plug Group Access submenu.  
4. After setting parameters for a given unit, you may also define additional parameters  
for other attached units. To set Load Shedding parameters for other units, return to  
the Alarm Configuration menu and then repeat steps two and three.  
7-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alarm Configuration  
7.2.1.3. Granting Access to Plugs on AUX Units  
Web Browser Interface  
To grant access to plugs on AUX units, simply select the desired plugs from the  
"Configure Plug Access" drop down menu and then click on the "Change Load  
Shedding" button.  
Text Interface  
When Plug Access is defined via the Text Interface, the following procedure is used to  
grant access to plugs on optional AUX units:  
1. From the Load Shedding menu, type 4and press [Enter] to display the Plug  
Access menu. At the Plug Access menu, select plugs for your local MPC unit  
as you normally would, and when finished, press [Enter] to return to the Load  
Shedding menu.  
2. To grant access to plugs on AUX units, type 4and press [Enter] again to return to  
the Plug Access menu, and then type >(greater than symbol) and press [Enter] to  
scroll to the desired AUX MPC unit. When the desired AUX unit is displayed, select  
plugs for the AUX unit as you normally would, and then press [Enter] to return to  
the Load Shedding Menu.  
Note: The first line of the Plug Access menu will indicate the name of the AUX  
or Local MPC unit that is currently selected.  
3. Repeat Step 2 above to grant access to plugs on additional AUX units.  
4. When you have finished granting Plug Access rights for this alarm, define any other  
desired parameters required, and then make certain to press [Esc] several times  
until the "Saving Configuration" message is displayed and the unit returns to the  
MPC command prompt.  
7-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alarm Configuration  
7.3. The Circuit Breaker Open Alarm  
The Circuit Breaker Alarm is intended to provide notification in the event that one of the  
MPC's circuit breakers is opened. When a circuit breaker is open, the MPC can provide  
prompt notification via Email, Syslog Message or SNMP Trap.  
Notes:  
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via Email, communication  
parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5.9.11.  
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via Syslog Message, Syslog  
parameters must first be defined and Syslog Messages must be enabled as  
described in Section 5.9.2 and Section 11.  
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via SNMP Trap, SNMP  
parameters must first be defined, and SNMP Traps must be enabled as  
described in Section 5.9.7 and Section 12.  
To configure the Circuit Breaker Alarm, access the MPC command mode using a  
password that permits Administrator Level commands, and then proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /ACand then press [Enter] to display the Alarm Configuration  
Menu. From the Alarm Configuration Menu, type 5and press [Enter] to access the  
configuration menu for the Circuit Breaker Alarm.  
Web Browser Interface: Click the "Alarm Configuration" link, located on the  
left hand side of the screen to display the Alarm Configuration Menu. From the  
Alarm Configuration Menu, click on the "Circuit Breaker Open" link to access the  
configuration menu.  
The Circuit Breaker Open Alarm Configuration Menu offers the following parameters:  
Trigger Enable: Enables/Disables the trigger for this alarm. When Disabled, this  
alarm will be suppressed. (Default = On.)  
Note: To cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the  
alarm, simply toggle the Trigger Enable parameter Off and then back On again.  
Resend Delay: Determines how long the MPC will wait to resend an email  
message generated by this alarm, when the initial attempt to send the notification  
was unsuccessful. (Default = 60 Minutes.)  
Notify Upon Clear: When this item is enabled, the MPC will send additional  
notification when the situation that caused the alarm has been corrected. For  
example, when Notify Upon Clear is enabled, the MPC can send initial notification  
when it detects an open circuit breaker, and then send a second notification when it  
determines that the circuit breaker has been closed. (Default = On.)  
7-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alarm Configuration  
Email Message: Enables/Disables email notification for this alarm. (Default = On.)  
Note: The Email Message parameter offers four different options: On, Off, On  
(Copy to All Triggers) or Off (Copy to All Triggers). If either of the "Copy to All  
Triggers" options is selected, then email notification for all other alarms will be  
switched On or Off as indicated by this parameter. For example, If "Off (Copy  
to All Triggers)" is selected, then Email notification will be disabled for all other  
alarms too.  
Address 1, 2, and 3: These parameters are used to select which of the three email  
addresses defined via the "Email Messages" menu (see Section 5.9.11) will receive  
the email alarm notification messages generated by this alarm. The Address  
parameters can be used to select one, or any combination of the addresses defined  
via the Email Messages menu. (Default = All On.)  
Note: If Email addresses have been previously defined, then the text under the  
parameters will list the current, user selected email addresses.  
Subject: This parameter is used to define the text that will appear in the "Subject"  
field for all email notification messages generated by this alarm. (Default = "Alarm:  
Circuit Breaker Open")  
7.4. The Lost Communication with AUX Units Alarm  
The Lost Communication with AUX Units Alarm is intended to provide prompt  
notification when communication with the optional AUX MPC units is disrupted.  
When communication with an attached AUX unit is interrupted, the MPC can provide  
notification via Email, Syslog Message or SNMP Trap.  
Notes:  
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via Email, communication  
parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5.9.11.  
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via Syslog Message, Syslog  
parameters must first be defined and Syslog Messages must be enabled as  
described in Section 5.9.2 and Section 11.  
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via SNMP Trap, SNMP  
parameters must first be defined, and SNMP Traps must be enabled as  
described in Section 5.9.7 and Section 12.  
To configure the Lost Communication with AUX Alarm, access the MPC command mode  
using a password that permits Administrator Level commands, then proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /ACand then press [Enter] to display the Alarm Configuration  
Menu. From the Alarm Configuration Menu, type 6and press [Enter] to access the  
configuration menu for the Lost Communication with AUX Units Alarm.  
Web Browser Interface: Click the "Alarm Configuration" link, located on the left  
hand side of the screen to display the Alarm Configuration Menu. From the Alarm  
Configuration Menu, click on the "Lost Communication with AUX Units" link to  
access the configuration menu.  
7-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alarm Configuration  
The Lost Communication with AUX Units Alarm Configuration Menu offers the following  
parameters:  
Trigger Enable: Enables/Disables the trigger for this alarm. When Disabled, this  
alarm will be suppressed. (Default = On.)  
Note: To cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the  
alarm, simply toggle the Trigger Enable parameter Off and then back On again.  
Resend Delay: Determines how long the MPC will wait to resend an email  
message generated by this alarm, when the initial attempt to send the notification  
was unsuccessful. (Default = 60 Minutes.)  
Notify Upon Clear: When this item is enabled, the MPC will send additional  
notification when the situation that caused the alarm has been corrected. For  
example, when Notify Upon Clear is enabled, the MPC will send initial notification  
when it detects lost communication with the AUX unit, and then send a second  
notification when it determines that communication has been restored.  
(Default = On.)  
Email Message: Enables/Disables email notification for this alarm. (Default = On.)  
Note: The Email Message parameter offers four different options: On, Off, On  
(Copy to All Triggers) or Off (Copy to All Triggers). If either of the "Copy to All  
Triggers" options is selected, then email notification for all other alarms will be  
switched On or Off as indicated by this parameter. For example, If "Off (Copy  
to All Triggers)" is selected, then Email notification will be disabled for all other  
alarms too.  
Address 1, 2, and 3: These parameters are used to select which of the three email  
addresses defined via the "Email Messages" menu (see Section 5.9.11) will receive  
the email alarm notification messages generated by this alarm. The Address  
parameters can be used to select one, or any combination of the addresses defined  
via the Email Messages menu. (Default = All On.)  
Note: If Email addresses have been previously defined, then the text under the  
parameters will list the current, user defined email addresses.  
Subject: This parameter is used to define the text that will appear in the "Subject"  
field for all email notification messages generated by this alarm. (Default = "Alarm:  
Lost Comm with AUX Unit")  
7-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alarm Configuration  
7.5. The Lost Voltage (Line In) Alarm  
The Lost Voltage (Line In) Alarm is intended to provide notification when one of the  
power input lines connected to the MPC unit, is lost or disconnected. When one of the  
power supplies is lost, the MPC can provide notification via Email, Syslog Message or  
SNMP Trap.  
Notes:  
• The Lost Voltage (Line In) alarm will provide notification when one of the  
available power supplies is lost or disconnected. This alarm will not function  
if all input power to the MPC unit is lost. To provide notification when all input  
power is lost and restored, please use the Power Cycle Alarm as described  
in Section 7.8.  
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via Email, communication  
parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5.9.11.  
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via Syslog Message, Syslog  
parameters must first be defined and Syslog Messages must be enabled as  
described in Section 5.9.2 and Section 11.  
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via SNMP Trap, SNMP  
parameters must first be defined, and SNMP Traps must be enabled as  
described in Section 5.9.7 and Section 12.  
To configure the Lost Voltage (Line In) Alarm, access the MPC command mode using a  
password that permits Administrator Level commands, and then proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /ACand then press [Enter] to display the Alarm Configuration  
Menu. From the Alarm Configuration Menu, type 7and press [Enter] to access the  
configuration menu for the Lost Voltage (Line In) Alarm.  
Web Browser Interface: Click the "Alarm Configuration" link, located on the  
left hand side of the screen to display the Alarm Configuration Menu. From the  
Alarm Configuration Menu, click on the "Lost Voltage (Line In)" link to access the  
configuration menu.  
The Lost Voltage Alarm Configuration menu offers the following parameters:  
Trigger Enable: Enables/Disables the trigger for this alarm. When Disabled, this  
alarm will be suppressed. (Default = On.)  
Note: To cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the  
alarm, simply toggle the Trigger Enable parameter Off and then back On again.  
Resend Delay: Determines how long the MPC will wait to resend an email  
message generated by this alarm, when the initial attempt to send the notification  
was unsuccessful. (Default = 60 Minutes.)  
Notify Upon Clear: When this item is enabled, the MPC will send additional  
notification when the situation that caused the alarm has been corrected. For  
example, when Notify Upon Clear is enabled, the MPC will send initial notification  
when it detects that one of it's power supplies has been lost or disconnected, and  
then send a second notification when it determines that power has been restored.  
(Default = On.)  
7-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alarm Configuration  
Email Message: Enables/Disables email notification for this alarm. (Default = On.)  
Note: The Email Message parameter offers four different options: On, Off, On  
(Copy to All Triggers) or Off (Copy to All Triggers). If either of the "Copy to All  
Triggers" options is selected, then email notification for all other alarms will be  
switched On or Off as indicated by this parameter. For example, If "Off (Copy  
to All Triggers)" is selected, then Email notification will be disabled for all other  
alarms too.  
Address 1, 2, and 3: These parameters are used to select which of the three email  
addresses defined via the "Email Messages" menu (see Section 5.9.11) will receive  
the email alarm notification messages generated by this alarm. The Address  
parameters can be used to select one, or any combination of the addresses defined  
via the Email Messages menu. (Default = All On.)  
Note: If Email addresses have been previously specified, then the text under  
the parameters will list the current, user defined email addresses.  
Subject: This parameter is used to define the text that will appear in the "Subject"  
field for all email notification messages generated by this alarm. (Default = "Alarm:  
Lost Voltage (Line In)")  
7-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alarm Configuration  
7.6. The Ping-No-Answer Alarm  
The Ping-No-Answer Alarm is intended to provide notification when one of the IP  
addresses defined via the Ping-No-Answer Reboot feature (as described in Section 6.1)  
fails to respond to a Ping command. When one of the user-defined IP addresses fails to  
answer a Ping command, the MPC can provide notification via Email, Syslog Message  
or SNMP Trap.  
Notes:  
• In order for this alarm to function, IP Addresses for the Ping-No-Answer  
reboot feature must first be defined as described in Section 6.1.  
• When a Ping-No-Answer condition is detected, the MPC can still reboot the  
user-selected outlet(s) as described in Section 6.1, and can also send an  
email, Syslog Message and/or SNMP trap if properly configured as described  
in this section.  
• In order for the MPC to provide Email alarm notification, communication  
parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5.9.11.  
• In order for the MPC to provide Syslog Message notification, Syslog  
parameters must first be defined and Syslog Messages must be enabled as  
described in Section 5.9.2 and Section 11.  
• In order for the MPC to provide SNMP Trap notification when this alarm is  
triggered, SNMP parameters must first be defined, and SNMP Traps must be  
enabled as described in Section 5.9.7 and Section 12.  
To configure the Lost Voltage (Line In) Alarm, access the MPC command mode using a  
password that permits Administrator Level commands, and then proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /ACand then press [Enter] to display the Alarm Configuration  
Menu. From the Alarm Configuration Menu, type 8and press [Enter] to access the  
configuration menu for the Ping-No-Answer Alarm.  
Web Browser Interface: Click the "Alarm Configuration" link, located on the left  
hand side of the screen to display the Alarm Configuration Menu. From the Alarm  
Configuration Menu, click on the "Ping-No-Answer" link to access the configuration  
Menu.  
7-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alarm Configuration  
The Ping-No-Answer alarm configuration menu offers the following parameters:  
Trigger Enable: Enables/Disables the trigger for this alarm. When Disabled, this  
alarm will be suppressed. (Default = On.)  
Note: To cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the  
alarm, simply toggle the Trigger Enable parameter to Off and then back On  
again.  
Resend Delay: Determines how long the MPC will wait to resend an email  
message generated by this alarm, when the initial attempt to send the notification  
was unsuccessful. (Default = 60 Minutes.)  
Notify Upon Clear: When this item is enabled, the MPC will send additional  
notification when the situation that caused the alarm has been corrected. For  
example, when Notify Upon Clear is enabled, the MPC will send initial notification  
when it detects that a Ping command has failed, and then send a second  
notification when it determines that the IP address is again responding to the Ping  
command. (Default = On.)  
Email Message: Enables/Disables email notification for this alarm. (Default = On.)  
Note: The Email Message parameter offers four different options: On, Off, On  
(Copy to All Triggers) or Off (Copy to All Triggers). If either of the "Copy to All  
Triggers" options is selected, then email notification for all other alarms will be  
switched On or Off as indicated by this parameter. For example, If "Off (Copy  
to All Triggers)" is selected, then Email notification will be disabled for all other  
alarms too.  
Address 1, 2, and 3: These parameters are used to select which of the three email  
addresses defined via the "Email Messages" menu (see Section 5.9.11) will receive  
the email alarm notification messages generated by this alarm. The Address  
parameters can be used to select one, or any combination of the addresses defined  
via the Email Messages menu. (Default = All On.)  
Note: If Email addresses have been previously specified, then the text under  
the parameters will list the current, user defined email addresses.  
Subject: This parameter is used to define the text that will appear in the "Subject"  
field for all email notification messages that are generated by this alarm.  
(Default = "Alarm: Ping-No-Answer")  
7-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alarm Configuration  
7.7. The Invalid Access Lockout Alarm  
The Invalid Access Lockout Alarm is intended to provide notification when the MPC  
has locked the Network port due to repeated, invalid attempts to access command  
mode. Normally, the Invalid Access Lockout feature (discussed in Section 5.3.2) will  
lock the network port whenever the MPC detects that a user-defined number of invalid  
passwords have been entered at the Network Port. When the Invalid Access Lockout  
Alarm is properly configured and enabled as described in this section, the MPC can also  
provide notification via Email, Syslog Message or SNMP Trap.  
Notes:  
• In order for this alarm to function, Invalid Access Lockout parameters must  
first be configured and enabled as described in Section 5.3.2.  
• When an Invalid Access Lockout occurs, the MPC can still lock the network  
port as described in Section 5.3.2, and can also send an email, Syslog  
Message and/or SNMP trap if properly configured.  
• If desired, the MPC can be configured to count Invalid Access attempts and  
provide notification when the counter exceeds a user defined trigger level,  
without actually locking the port in question. To do this, enable the Invalid  
Access Lockout Alarm as described here, but when you configure Invalid  
Access Lockout parameters as described in Section 5.3.2, set the Lockout  
Attempts and Lockout Duration as you would normally, and then set the  
"Lockout Enable" parameter to "Off."  
• In order for the MPC to provide Email alarm notification, communication  
parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5.9.11.  
• In order for the MPC to provide Syslog Message notification, Syslog  
parameters must first be defined and Syslog Messages must be enabled as  
described in Section 5.9.2 and Section 11.  
• In order for the MPC to provide SNMP Trap notification when this alarm is  
triggered, SNMP parameters must first be defined, and SNMP Traps must be  
enabled as described in Section 5.9.7 and Section 12.  
To configure the Invalid Access Lockout Alarm, access the MPC command mode using  
a password that permits Administrator Level commands, and then proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /ACand then press [Enter] to display the Alarm Configuration  
Menu. From the Alarm Configuration Menu, type 9and press [Enter] to access the  
configuration menu for the Invalid Access Lockout Alarm.  
Web Browser Interface: Click the "Alarm Configuration" link, located on the  
left hand side of the screen to display the Alarm Configuration Menu. From the  
Alarm Configuration Menu, click on the "Invalid Access Lockout" link to access the  
configuration menu.  
7-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alarm Configuration  
The Invalid Access Lockout alarm configuration menu offers the following parameters:  
Trigger Enable: Enables/Disables the trigger for this alarm. When Disabled, this  
alarm will be suppressed. (Default = On.)  
Note: To cancel an alarm without unlocking the port, simply toggle the Trigger  
Enable parameter Off and then back On again.  
Resend Delay: Determines how long the MPC will wait to resend an email  
message generated by this alarm, when the initial attempt to send the notification  
was unsuccessful. (Default = 60 Minutes.)  
Notify Upon Clear: When this item is enabled, the MPC will send additional  
notification when the situation that caused the alarm has been corrected. For  
example, when Notify Upon Clear is enabled, the MPC will send initial notification  
when it detects that an Invalid Access Lockout has occurred, and then send a  
second notification when it determines that the port has been unlocked.  
(Default = On.)  
Email Message: Enables/Disables email notification for this alarm. (Default = On.)  
Note: The Email Message parameter offers four different options: On, Off, On  
(Copy to All Triggers) or Off (Copy to All Triggers). If either of the "Copy to All  
Triggers" options is selected, then email notification for all other alarms will be  
switched On or Off as indicated by this parameter. For example, If "Off (Copy  
to All Triggers)" is selected, then Email notification will be disabled for all other  
alarms too.  
Address 1, 2, and 3: These parameters are used to select which of the three email  
addresses defined via the "Email Messages" menu (see Section 5.9.11) will receive  
the email alarm notification messages generated by this alarm. The Address  
parameters can be used to select one, or any combination of the addresses defined  
via the Email Messages menu. (Default = All On.)  
Note: If Email addresses have been previously specified, then the text under  
the parameters will list the current, user defined email addresses.  
Subject: This parameter is used to define the text that will appear in the "Subject"  
field for all email notification messages generated by this alarm. (Default = "Alarm:  
Invalid Access Lockout")  
7-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alarm Configuration  
7.8. The Power Cycle Alarm  
The Power Cycle Alarm can provide notification when all input power to the MPC unit is  
lost and then restored. When one of the power supplies is lost, the MPC can provide  
notification via Email, Syslog Message or SNMP Trap.  
Notes:  
• The Power Cycle alarm can provide notification when all input power to the  
MPC unit is lost and then restored. This alarm will not function when only  
one power input line is disconnected. To provide notification when one  
power input line is lost or disconnected, please use the Lost Voltage (Line In)  
Alarm as described in Section 7.5.  
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via Email, communication  
parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5.9.11.  
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via Syslog Message, Syslog  
parameters must first be defined and Syslog Messages must be enabled as  
described in Section 5.9.2 and Section 11.  
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via SNMP Trap, SNMP  
parameters must first be defined, and SNMP Traps must be enabled as  
described in Section 5.9.7 and Section 12.  
To configure the Power Cycle Alarm, access the MPC command mode using a  
password that permits Administrator Level commands, and then proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /ACand then press [Enter] to display the Alarm Configuration  
Menu. From the Alarm Configuration Menu, type 10and press [Enter] to access  
the configuration menu for the Power Cycle Alarm.  
Web Browser Interface: Click the "Alarm Configuration" link, located on the left  
hand side of the screen to display the Alarm Configuration Menu. From the Alarm  
Configuration Menu, click on the "Power Cycle" link to access the configuration  
menu.  
The Power Cycle Alarm configuration menu offers the following parameters:  
Trigger Enable: Enables/Disables the trigger for this alarm. When Disabled, this  
alarm will be suppressed. (Default = On.)  
Email Message: Enables/Disables email notification for this alarm. (Default = On.)  
Note: The Email Message parameter offers four different options: On, Off, On  
(Copy to All Triggers) or Off (Copy to All Triggers). If either of the "Copy to All  
Triggers" options is selected, then email notification for all other alarms will be  
switched On or Off as indicated by this parameter. For example, If "Off (Copy  
to All Triggers)" is selected, then Email notification will be disabled for all other  
alarms too.  
7-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alarm Configuration  
Address 1, 2, and 3: These parameters are used to select which of the three email  
addresses defined via the "Email Messages" menu (see Section 5.9.11) will receive  
the email alarm notification messages generated by this alarm. The Address  
parameters can be used to select one, or any combination of the addresses defined  
via the Email Messages menu. (Default = All On.)  
Note: If Email addresses have been previously specified, then the text under  
the parameters will list the current, user defined email addresses.  
Subject: This parameter is used to define the text that will appear in the "Subject"  
field for all email notification messages generated by this alarm. (Default = "Alarm:  
Power Cycle")  
7-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8. The Status Screens  
The Status Screens are used to display status information about the switched outlets,  
Network Port, Plug Groups, Current and Power Metering and the Alarm Log and Audit  
Log. The Status Screens are available via both the Text Interface and Web Browser  
Interface.  
8.1. Product Status  
The Product Status Screen lists the model number, power rating, input line count, input  
line frequency and software version for your local MPC unit as well as any optional  
remote units that have been connected to the local unit's AUX ports.  
To view the Product Status Screen, access the command mode and then proceed as  
follows:  
Text Interface: Type /J * and press [Enter].  
Web Browser Interface: Click on the "Product Status" link on the left hand side of  
the screen.  
The Product Status Screen lists the following items for the local MPC unit as well as any  
optional AUX MPC units:  
Product: The make/model number of the MPC unit.  
Rating: The current rating, in Amps.  
Line Count: The number of power line inputs included on the MPC unit.  
Branch Count: The number of power branches present on the MPC unit.  
Line Frequency: The line frequency in Hertz.  
SW Version: The software version that is currently installed on the MPC unit.  
8-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Status Screens  
8.2. The Network Status Screen  
The Network Status screen shows activity at the MPC's 16 virtual network ports, and lists  
the TCP Port Number, Active/Free Status and current user name for each virtual  
network port.  
To view the Network Status Screen, access command mode using a password that  
permits access to Administrator Level commands and then proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /SNand press [Enter].  
Web Browser Interface: Click on the "Network Status" link on the left hand side of  
the screen.  
The Network Status Screen lists the following items:  
Port: The virtual network port for each connection.  
TCP Port: The number of the TCP Port for each connection.  
Status: This column will read "Free" if no users are currently connected to the  
corresponding port, or "Active" if a user has currently accessed command mode via  
this port.  
User Name: The user name for the account that has currently accessed command  
mode via this port. Note that when the Network Status Screen is viewed via the Text  
Interface, usernames that are longer than 22 characters will be truncated and the  
remaining characters will be displayed as two dots (..).  
8-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Status Screens  
8.3. The Plug Status Screen  
The Plug Status screen shows the On/Off status of the MPC's switched outlets, and lists  
user-defined Plug Names, Boot/Sequence Delay values, and Default On/Off settings.  
Note:  
• When the Plug Status Screen is viewed by an account with "Administrator"  
or "SuperUser" command access, all MPC plugs are listed. When the Plug  
Status Screen is viewed by an account with "User" or "ViewOnly" command  
access, then the screen will list only the outlets that are allowed by that  
account.  
• Section 5.7 describes the procedure for configuring the plug parameters that  
are listed in the Plug Status Screen.  
• When the Plug Status Screen is viewed via the Text Interface, only the first 16  
plugs will be displayed. If you are viewing the status of a 20 plug unit, press  
[Enter] to display the additional plugs. Press [Esc] to exit from the Plug  
Status Screen.  
To view the Plug Status Screen, access the MPC command mode and then proceed as  
follows:  
Text Interface: Type /Sand press [Enter].  
Web Browser Interface: Click on the "Plug Status" link on the left hand side of  
the screen.  
The Plug Status Screen lists the following parameters for each switched outlet:  
Plug: The alphanumeric number of each switched outlet.  
Note: If an asterisk appears next to the plug number in this column, this  
indicates that the plug is "busy", and still in the process of completing a  
previous command. This could be a command that was invoked by the current  
user or another user.  
Name: The user-defined name for each switched outlet.  
Status: The current On/Off status of each switched outlet. If the Status column  
includes an asterisk, this means that this outlet is busy completing another  
command, that was previously invoked, either by you or another user.  
Boot Seq. Delay: The user-defined Boot/Sequence Delay for each switched outlet.  
Default: The Default On/Off value for each switched outlet.  
Priority: The user-defined priority setting for each switched outlet.  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Status Screens  
8.4. The Plug Group Status Screen  
The Plug Group Status screen shows the configuration details and On/Off status for the  
MPC's user-defined Plug Groups.  
Notes:  
• When the Plug Group Status Screen is viewed by an account with  
"Administrator" or "SuperUser" command access, all MPC plugs and plug  
groups are listed. When the Plug Status Screen is viewed by an account with  
"User" or "ViewOnly" command access, then the screen will list only the plugs  
and plug groups that are allowed by that account.  
• The procedure for defining parameters for individual plugs is described  
in Section 5.7. The procedure for defining Plug Groups is described in  
Section 5.6.  
• In order to display the Plug Group Status screen, you must first define at least  
one Plug Group as described in Section 5.6.  
• When the Plug Group Status Screen is viewed via the Text Interface, only the  
first 16 plugs will be displayed. Press [Enter] to display the additional plugs.  
Press [Esc] to exit from the Plug Status Screen.  
To view the Plug Group Status Screen, access the MPC command mode and then  
proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /SGand press [Enter].  
Web Browser Interface: Click on the "Plug Group Status" link on the left hand side  
of the screen. The MPC will display a screen that lists all currently defined Plug  
Groups. Click the check box(es) next to the Plug Group(s) that you want to review,  
and then click on the "Get Plug Group Status" button.  
The Plug Group Status Screen lists the following parameters for each Plug Group:  
Group Name: The user-defined name for each Plug Group.  
Unit: This field will read "Local" if the outlet is located on your local MPC unit, or  
"Remote", if the outlet is located on an optional, remote AUX MPC unit.  
Plug: The alphanumeric number of each switched outlet in the Plug Group.  
Plug Name: (Web Interface Only) The User Defined name for each switched outlet  
in the Plug Group.  
Default: The Default On/Off value for each switched outlet in the Plug Group.  
Boot Seq. Delay: The user-defined Boot/Sequence Delay for each switched outlet  
in the Plug Group.  
Status: The On/Off status of each switched outlet in the Plug Group. If the Status  
column includes an asterisk, this means that this outlet is busy completing another  
command, that was previously invoked, either by you or another user.  
8-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Status Screens  
8.5. The Current Metering Status Screen  
The Current Metering Status screen is used to display up-to-date readings for Amps,  
Watts, Voltage and temperature for the MPC unit as well as any optional AUX MPC units  
that may be connected.  
To view the Current Metering Log screen, access the MPC command mode and then  
proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /Mand press [Enter].  
Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "Current Metering" link on the  
left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "Current  
Metering Status" link.  
The Current Metering Status screen lists the following parameters for your local MPC  
unit, as well as any attached AUX/Remote MPC units:  
Current A: The total current consumption, in Amps, for power circuit A.  
Voltage A: The total voltage for power circuit A.  
Power A: The total power consumption, in Watts, for power circuit A.  
Current B: The total current consumption, in Amps, for power circuit B (if present.)  
Voltage B: The total voltage for power circuit B (if present.)  
Power B: The total power consumption, in Watts, for power circuit B (if present.)  
Current C: The total current consumption, in Amps, for power circuit C (if present.)  
Voltage C: The total voltage for power circuit C (if present.)  
Power C: The total power consumption, in Watts, for power circuit C (if present.)  
Current D: The total current consumption, in Amps, for power circuit D (if present.)  
Voltage D: The total voltage for power circuit D (if present.)  
Power D: The total power consumption, in Watts, for power circuit D (if present.)  
Temperature: The rack temperature(s) currently detected by the MPC unit(s).  
Total Current: The total current, in Amps, for both power circuits.  
Total Power: The total power, in Watts, for both power circuits.  
Over Temperature: Lists the values for the Initial Threshold and Critical Threshold  
for the Over Temperature Alarms. Note that when the Current Metering Status  
Screen is viewed via the Web Browser Interface, Over Temperature Alarm settings  
are not listed. To view Over Temperature Alarm settings via the Web Browser  
Interface, please use the Current History Screen as described in Section 8.6. For  
more information on the Over Temperature Alarms, please refer to Section 7.2.  
Over Current: Lists the values (as a percentage) for the Initial Threshold and  
Critical Threshold for the Over Current Alarms. For more information on the Over  
Current Alarms, please refer to Section 7.1.  
Power Factor: The user-defined Power Factor value.  
Power Efficiency: The user-defined Power Efficiency value.  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Status Screens  
8.6. The Current History Screen  
The Current History Screen is used to display current, voltage and temperature  
readings as a function of time. In the Web Browser Interface, the Current History can be  
displayed as a graph, downloaded in CSV format, or downloaded in XML format. In the  
Text Interface, the Current History can be displayed as straight, ASCII data, or can be  
downloaded in CSV or XML format.  
To view the Current History Screen, access the MPC command mode and then proceed  
as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /Land press [Enter] to access the "Display Logs" main  
menu. From the "Display Logs" menu, type 3and press [Enter] to display the  
Current Metering Log Menu. From the Current Metering Log Menu, you can display  
the Current Metering Log in ASCII, CSV or XML format or erase the existing Current  
Metering Log.  
Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "Current Metering" link on the  
left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "Current  
History" link to display the Current Metering Log menu. At the Current Metering Log  
menu, you can display the Current Metering Log as a graph, or download or display  
the log in ASCII, CSV or XML format.  
When the Current History Screen is displayed in ASCII, CSV or XML format, the MPC  
will show Branch Current, Branch Voltage and temperature readings in tabular format.  
When the Current History Screen is displayed in graph format, via the Web Browser  
Interface, the MPC will display a page with four graphs:  
Branch Current: This graph shows current consumption versus time for each  
available branch, and also shows the Initial Threshold and Critical Threshold values  
for the Over Current Branch Alarms.  
Branch Voltage: This graph shows voltage consumption versus time for each  
available branch.  
Line Current: This graph shows current consumption versus time for each  
available line, and will also show the Initial Threshold and Critical Threshold values  
for the Over Current Line Alarms.  
Note: The Line Current History graph and the Over Current Line Alarms are not  
available on MPC units that include two power inputs.  
Temperature: This graph shows unit temperature versus time for the MPC unit,  
and also shows the Initial Threshold and Critical Threshold values for the Over  
Temperature Alarms.  
When the Current History Screen is displayed in graph format via the Web Browser, the  
resulting page will also include a drop down menu which can be used to graph current  
history for either the local MPC unit or remote MPC units, and another drop down menu  
with can be used to graph current history on a daily, weekly, monthly or yearly basis,  
or show "Live" current history, which graphs current consumption during the last ten  
minutes (approximately.)  
8-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Status Screens  
To save Current History data, access command mode using an account that permits  
Administrator level commands, and then proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /Land press [Enter] to show the Display Logs menu. From  
the Display Logs menu, type 3and press [Enter] to display the Current History  
menu, which allows you to either display the Current History log in ASCII format,  
download and save in CSV or XML format, or erase the Current History Log.  
Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "Current Metering" link on the  
left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "Current  
History" link to display the Current Metering Log menu, which offers the choice to  
display Current History in graph, ASCII, CSV or XML format.  
ASCII: To save in ASCII format, click the "Display ASCII" link. The MPC will  
prompt you to select the desired unit; use the drop down menu to select either  
the local MPC unit or a Remote/AUX MPC unit and then click on the "Get History"  
link. The MPC will display Current History data in ASCII format; to save the data,  
copy and paste to Windows Notepad or a similar ASCII text editing program and  
then save the file using the ".txt" filename extension.  
CSV: Click the "Display CSV" link. Windows will then prompt you to either save  
the Current History data or display it using your default CSV program.  
XML: Click the "Display XML" link; the MPC will display Current History data  
in XML format. To save the data, copy and paste to Windows Notepad or a  
similar ASCII text editing program and then save the file using the ".xml" filename  
extension.  
For more information on Current Metering and Current History, please refer to  
Section 5.3.4  
8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Status Screens  
8.7. The Power Range Status Screen  
The Power Range Status Screen can be used to display power consumption readings  
over a user-selected period of time, for the MPC unit as well as any optional remote  
MPC units that may be connected.  
To view the Power Range Status Screen, access the MPC command mode using an  
account that permits access to Administrator or SuperUser level commands and then  
proceed as follows:  
Text Interface: Type /Land press [Enter] to access the "Display Logs" menu.  
From the Display Logs menu, type 4and press [Enter] to display the Power  
Metering Log menu, then type 1and press [Enter] to access the Power Metering  
menu. At the Power Metering menu, you can use item 1to select the MPC unit to  
view and item 2to select the duration period for the Power Metering status screen.  
After selecting the unit to view and duration period, type 3and press [Enter] to view  
the Power Metering Status Screen.  
Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "Power Metering" link on the  
left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "Power  
Range" link to display the Power Metering menu. At the Power Metering menu, key  
in the start date and the end date, and then use the drop-down menu to determine  
whether the MPC will display data for only the Local MPC unit, or display total  
power consumption for the Local MPC unit and all connected AUX MPC units. Click  
on the "Get Chart" button to display the Power Metering Status Screen.  
The MPC will display a chart that graphs power consumption versus time, and also lists  
the following for each available branch:  
Kilowatt Hours: The number of Kilowatt Hours that were consumed by each  
branch during the specified time period.  
Average Current: The average current draw for each branch during the specified  
time period.  
Average % of Max.: The average percentage of maximum available current that  
was used by each branch during the specified time period.  
Average Power: The average power consumption for each branch during the  
specified time period.  
8-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Status Screens  
8.8. The Power History Screen  
The Power History Screen provides a graph that shows power consumption versus time.  
To view the Power History Screen, access the MPC command mode using an account  
that permits access to Administrator or SuperUser level commands, and then proceed  
as follows:  
Text Interface:  
Type /Land press [Enter] to access the "Display Logs" menu. From the Display Logs  
menu, type 4and press [Enter] to display the Power Metering Log menu, then type 2  
and press [Enter] to access the Power History menu.  
The Power History menu offers three options:  
1. Display Power History: Type 1and press [Enter] to access the "Display Power  
History" menu, which allows you to select the duration period (date) for the Power  
History screen and then display the resulting data.  
2. Download Power History in CSV Format: Type 2and press [Enter] to access  
the "Download Power History CSV" menu, which allows you to select the duration  
period (date) for the Power History report and then download the resulting data in  
CSV format.  
3. Download Power History in XML Format: Type 3and press [Enter] to access  
the "Download Power History XML" menu, which allows you to select the duration  
period (date) for the Power History report and then download the resulting data in  
XML format.  
Web Interface:  
Place the cursor over the "Power Metering" link on the left hand side of the screen.  
When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "Power History" link to display the Power  
History menu. The Power History menu offers the options to display Power History as a  
graph, or download the Power History in ASCII, CSV or XML format.  
To save Power History data, click on the "Power History" link on the left hand side of  
the screen to display the Power History menu, which offers the choice to display Power  
History in graph, ASCII, CSV or XML format:  
ASCII: To save in ASCII format, click the "Display ASCII" link. The MPC will prompt  
you to select the time resolution for the Power History report; use the drop down  
menu to select either "Day" or "Month" and then click on the "Get History" link. The  
MPC will display Power History data in ASCII format; to save the data, copy and  
paste to Windows Notepad or a similar ASCII text editing program and then save  
the file using the ".txt" filename extension.  
CSV: Click the "Display CSV" link. Windows will then prompt you to either save the  
Power History data or display it using your default CSV program.  
XML: Click the "Display XML" link; the MPC will display Power History data in XML  
format. To save the data, copy and paste to Windows Notepad or a similar ASCII  
text editing program and then save the file using the ".xml" filename extension.  
8-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9. Operation  
The MPC offers two separate command interfaces; the Web Browser Interface and  
the Text Interface. Both interfaces offer essentially the same command options and  
features, and in most cases, parameters defined via the Web Browser Interface will also  
apply when communicating via the Text Interface (and vice versa.)  
9.1. Operation via the Web Browser Interface  
When using the Web Browser Interface, switching commands are invoked via the Plug  
Control Screen and Plug Group Control Screen.  
9.1.1. The Plug Control Screen - Web Browser Interface  
The Plug Control Screen lists the current On/Off status of the MPC’s Switched Outlets  
and is used to control switching and rebooting of the outlets.  
To invoke On, Off, or Reboot commands, proceed as follows:  
1. Access the MPC Command Mode as described in Section 5.1.  
2. Click on the "Plug Control" link on the left hand side of the screen to display the  
Plug Control Screen.  
Notes:  
• When switching and reboot operations are initiated, Boot/Sequence Delay  
times will be applied as described in Section 5.7.  
• If a switching or reboot command is directed to a plug that is already in the  
process of being switched or rebooted by a previous command, then the  
new command will be placed in a queue until the plug is ready to receive  
additional commands.  
• If the Status column in the Plug Control Screen includes an asterisk, this  
means that the corresponding outlet is busy completing a previously invoked  
command.  
• When the Plug Control Screen is displayed by an account that permits  
Administrator or SuperUser level commands, all switched outlets will be  
displayed.  
• When the Plug Control Screen is displayed by a User level account, the  
screen will only include the switched outlets that are allowed by the account.  
9-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation  
3. Initiating a Reboot Cycle: From the Plug Control Menu, click the down arrow  
in the "Action" column for the desired outlet(s), then select "Reboot" from the  
dropdown menu and click on the "Confirm Plug Actions" button.  
4. Switching Outlets Off: From the Plug Control Menu, click the down arrow in the  
"Action" column for the desired outlet(s), then select "Off" from the dropdown menu  
and click on the "Confirm Plug Actions" button.  
5. Switching Outlets On: From the Plug Control Menu, click the down arrow in the  
"Action" column for the desired outlet(s), then select "On" from the dropdown menu  
and click on the "Confirm Plug Actions" button.  
6. Set Outlets to Default On/Off Status: From the Plug Control Menu, click the down  
arrow in the "Action" column for the desired outlet(s), then select "Default" from the  
dropdown menu and click on the "Confirm Plug Actions" button..  
When the "Confirm Plug Actions" button is pressed, the MPC will display a screen which  
lists the selected action(s) and asks for confirmation before proceeding. To implement  
the selected plug action(s), click on the "Execute Plug Actions" button. The MPC will  
display a screen which indicates that a switching operation is in progress, then display  
the Plug Status screen when the command is complete. At that time, the Status Screen  
will list the updated On/Off status of each plug.  
9.1.2. The Plug Group Control Screen - Web Browser Interface  
The Plug Group Control Screen is used to send switching and reboot commands to  
the user-defined Plug Groups. As described in Section 5.6, Plug Groups allow you to  
specify a group of outlets that are dedicated to a similar purpose or client, and then  
direct switching and reboot commands to the group, rather than switching one plug  
at a time.  
To invoke On, Off, or Reboot commands, proceed as follows:  
1. Access the MPC Command Mode as described in Section 5.1.  
2. Click on the "Plug Group Control" link on the left hand side of the screen to display  
the Plug Group Control Screen.  
Notes:  
• When switching and reboot operations are initiated, Boot/Sequence Delay  
times will be applied as described in Section 5.7.  
• If a switching or reboot command is directed to a plug that is already in the  
process of being switched or rebooted by a previous command, then the  
new command will be placed in a queue until the plug is ready to receive  
additional commands.  
• When the Plug Group Control Screen is displayed by an account that permits  
Administrator or SuperUser level commands, all user-defined Plug Groups  
will be displayed.  
• When the Plug Control Screen is displayed by a User level account, the  
screen will only include the Plug Groups that are specifically allowed for  
that account.  
9-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation  
3. Initiating a Reboot Cycle: From the Plug Group Control screen, locate the Plug  
Group(s) that you wish to control, then click the down arrow in the task selector box  
in the "Action" column and use the dropdown menu to select the "Reboot" option.  
Then click on the "Confirm Plug Group Actions" button to execute the Reboot  
command.  
4. Switching Plug Groups Off: From the Plug Group Control screen, locate the Plug  
Group(s) that you wish to control, then click the down arrow in the task selector box  
in the "Action" column and use the dropdown menu to select the "Off" option. Then  
click on the "Confirm Plug Group Actions" button to switch all plugs in the group  
Off.  
5. Switching Plug Groups On: From the Plug Group Control screen, locate the Plug  
Group(s) that you wish to control, then click the down arrow in the task selector box  
in the "Action" column and use the dropdown menu to select the "On" option. Then  
click on the "Confirm Plug Group Actions" button to switch all plugs in the group  
On.  
6. Setting Plug Groups to Default On/Off Status: From the Plug Group Control  
screen, locate the Plug Group(s) that you wish to control, then click the down arrow  
in the task selector box in the "Action" column and use the dropdown menu to  
select the "Default" option. Then click on the "Confirm Plug Group Actions" button  
to set all plugs in the selected Plug Group(s) to their user defined default On/Off  
settings.  
When the "Confirm Plug Group Actions" button is pressed, the MPC will display a screen  
which lists the selected plug group(s) and action(s) and asks for confirmation before  
proceeding. To implement the selected plug group action(s), click on the "Execute Plug  
Group Actions" button. The MPC will display a screen which indicates that a switching  
operation is in progress, then display the Plug Status screen when the command is  
complete. At that time, the Status Screen will list the updated On/Off status of each  
plug.  
9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation  
COMMAND MENU:  
Version 1.60  
DISPLAY  
/S  
/SG  
/SN  
/H  
CONFIGURATION  
/F  
/P [AUX]  
/PL [n]  
/G  
/N  
/RB  
/AC  
/I  
Plug Status  
System Parameters  
Port Parameters  
Plug Parameters  
Plug Grouping Parameters  
Network Configuration  
Reboot Options  
Alarm Configuration  
Reboot System  
Plug Group Status  
Network Status  
Command Menu (Help)  
Log  
Current Metering  
Site ID  
/L  
/M  
/J [*]  
CONTROL  
<Enter>  
/X  
/C <n>  
/D <n>  
/BOOT <n>  
/ON <n>  
/OFF <n>  
/DPL  
/U  
/K <k>  
/UL  
Add ,Y to bypass “Sure?”  
MPC>  
Enter Command Mode  
Exit Command Mode  
Connect - Local  
Disconnect Port  
Boot Plug n  
/UF  
/TEST  
Upgrade Firmware  
Test Network Options  
+-------------------------------+  
| n Plug/Port # or name  
| n:n = plug n through plug n  
| n+n = plug n and plug n  
| k Key type (1-3)  
| * “all”  
| <> Required entry  
| [] Optional entry  
| , Link multiple plug commands|  
+-------------------------------+  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Turn on Plug n  
Turn off Plug n  
Default all plugs  
Send Parameter File  
Send SSH Keys  
Unlock (Invalid Access)  
Figure 9.1: The Help Menu (Administrator Mode; Text Interface)  
9.2. Operation via the Text Interface  
When using the Text Interface, all switching functions are performed by invoking simple,  
ASCII commands. ASCII commands are also used to display status screens and to log  
out of command mode. The Text Interface includes a Help Menu, which summarizes all  
available MPC commands. To display the Text Interface Help Menu (Figure 9.1), type /H  
and press [Enter].  
Note: When the Help Menu is displayed by a SuperUser, User or ViewOnly  
level account, the screen will not include commands that are only available to  
Administrator level accounts.  
9.2.1. The Plug Status Screen - Text Interface  
When you login to the MPC command mode via the Text Interface, the first screen  
displayed after login is the Plug Status Screen. The Plug Status Screen lists the current  
status of the MPC’s Switched AC Outlets and displays the currently defined Site I.D.  
Message.  
Normally, the Plug Status Screen will also be re-displayed each time a command  
is successfully executed. Note however, that if desired, the Automated Mode (See  
Section 9.3) can be enabled to suppress the display of the Plug Status Screen after  
each command.  
9-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation  
9.2.2. Switching and Reboot Commands - Text Interface  
These commands can be used to switch or reboot the MPC’s switched plugs, and can  
also be used to set plugs to the user-defined Power-Up Default values. Plugs may be  
specified by name or number.  
Notes:  
• If a switching or reboot command is directed to a plug that is already being  
switched or rebooted by a previous command, then the new command will  
be placed in a queue until the plug is ready to receive additional commands.  
• If an asterisk appears in the "Status" column for any given plug, this indicates  
that the plug is currently busy, processing a previously issued command.  
• Commands are not case sensitive. All commands are invoked by pressing  
[Enter].  
• When the Plug Control Screen is displayed by an account that permits  
Administrator level command access, all switched outlets will be displayed.  
• When you have accessed command mode using an account that permits  
Administrator or SuperUser level commands, then switching and reboot  
commands can be applied to all plugs.  
• When you have accessed command mode via a User level account,  
switching and reboot commands can only be applied to the plugs that are  
specifically allowed for that account.  
• If command confirmation is enabled, the MPC will display the Status Screen  
after commands are successfully completed.  
• When switching and reboot operations are initiated, Boot/Sequence Delay  
times will be applied as described in Section 5.7.  
• When used in On/Off/Reboot command lines, plug names and plug group  
names are not case sensitive.  
9-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation  
When switching and reboot commands are executed, the MPC will display a "Sure?"  
prompt, wait for user response, and then complete the command. The unit will pause  
for a moment while the command is executed, and then return to the Plug Status  
Screen. To Switch Plugs, or initiate a Reboot Cycle, proceed as follows:  
1. Switch Plug(s) On:  
a) Local MPC Units or Individual MPC Units: To power-on a plug or Plug  
Group, type /ON n and press [Enter]. Where "n" is the alphanumeric number  
or name of the desired plug or Plug Group. For example:  
/ON A1 [Enter] or /ON ROUTER [Enter]  
b) AUX/Remote MPC Units: If your local MPC unit is connected to one or more  
optional AUX/Remote MPC units, type /ON aux n and press [Enter]. Where  
"aux" is the AUX/Remote unit and "n" is the alphanumeric number or name of  
the desired plug. For Example, to switch On Plug A1 on the AUX1 unit, enter  
the following:  
/ON AUX1 A1 [Enter]  
Note: Enter a space to separate the AUX parameter from the Plug number.  
2. Switch Plug(s) Off:  
a) Local MPC Units or Individual MPC Units: To power-off a plug or Plug  
Group, type /OFF nand press [Enter]. Where "n" is the alphanumeric number  
or name of the desired plug or Plug Group. Note that the “/OFF” command  
can also be entered as “/OF”. For example:  
/OFF B2 [Enter] or /OF ROUTER [Enter]  
b) AUX/Remote MPC Units: If your local MPC unit is connected to one or more  
optional AUX/Remote MPC units, type /OFF aux n and press [Enter]. Where  
"aux" is the AUX/Remote unit and "n" is the alphanumeric number or name  
of the desired plug. Note that the “/OFF” command can also be entered as  
/OF”. For Example, to switch Off Plug A2 on the AUX3 unit, enter either of the  
following command lines:  
/OFF AUX3 A2 [Enter] or /OF AUX3 A2 [Enter]  
Note: Enter a space to separate the AUX parameter from the Plug number.  
9-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation  
3. Reboot Plug(s):  
a) Local MPC Units or Individual MPC Units: To initiate a Boot cycle, type  
/BOOT nand press [Enter]. Where "n" is the alphanumeric number or name  
of the desired plug or Plug Group. Note that the "/BOOT" command can also  
be entered as "/BO". For example:  
/BOOT B3 [Enter] or /BO ATMSWTCH [Enter]  
b) AUX/Remote MPC Units: If your local MPC unit is connected to one or more  
optional AUX/Remote MPC units, type /BOOT aux n and press [Enter].  
Where "aux" is the AUX/Remote unit and "n" is the alphanumeric number  
or name of the desired plug. Note that the “/BOOT” command can also be  
entered as “/BO”. For Example, to boot Plug A4 on the AUX2 unit, enter either  
of the following command lines:  
/BOOT AUX2 A4 [Enter] or /BO AUX2 A4 [Enter]  
Note: Enter a space to separate the AUX parameter from the Plug number.  
4. Set All Plugs to Power Up Defaults: Type /DPLand press [Enter]. All plugs  
permitted by your account will be set to their default On/Off status, which is defined  
via the Plug Parameters Menu as described in Section 5.7.  
Notes:  
• When you have accessed command mode using an Administrator or  
SuperUser level account, the Default command will be applied to all plugs.  
• When you have accessed command mode using an account that permits  
only User level command access, the Default command will only be applied  
to the plugs specifically allowed by that account.  
• The /DPL command is not available in ViewOnly mode.  
• The /DPL command will also be applied to any optional AUX/Remote MPC  
units that have been connected to your Local MPC unit's AUX Ports  
5. Suppress Command Confirmation Prompt: To execute a Boot/On/Off command  
without displaying the "Sure?" prompt, include the ",Y" option at the end of the  
command line. For example:  
/ON ROUTER,Y or /BOOT B2,Y  
9-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation  
9.2.3. Applying Commands to Several Plugs - Text Interface  
As described below, switching and reboot commands can be applied to only one  
Switched AC Outlet, or to an assortment of outlets. In addition, when optional AUX/  
Remote MPC units have been connected to the AUX ports, the same command line can  
also be used to switch outlets on several different AUX units.  
Note: When switching and reboot operations are initiated, Boot/Sequence  
Delay times will be applied as described in Section 5.7.  
1. Switch Several Plugs: To apply a command to several plugs, enter the numbers  
or names for the plugs, separated by a "plus sign" (+) or a comma (,).  
Note: In order for the "+" or "," operators to work, there must be no spaces  
between the plug name or number and the plus sign or comma.  
a) Switch Several Plugs on Local Unit: When switching more than one plug on  
your local MPC unit, simply enter the numbers of the desired plugs, separated  
by commas or plus signs. For example to switch plugs A1, A3, and A4 on your  
local MPC unit Off, enter either of the following commands:  
/OFF A1+A3+A4 [Enter]  
or  
/OFF A1,A3,A4 [Enter]  
b) Switch Several Plugs on AUX/Remote Units: Use the same command format  
described above, except pair each plug number with the AUX port where the  
plug resides. For example, to switch On Plug A1 on the AUX1 unit, Plug A3  
on the AUX2 unit and Plug A4 on the AUX3 unit, enter either of the following  
command lines:  
/ON AUX1 A1+AUX2 A3+AUX3 A4 [Enter]  
or  
/ON AUX1 A1,AUX2 A3,AUX3 A4 [Enter]  
Note: Enter a space to separate the AUX parameter from the Plug number.  
c) Switch Several Plugs on Both Local and AUX Units: Use the same  
command format described above. However, note that in the case of the Local  
MPC unit, it is not necessary to enter the AUX argument. For example, to  
switch On Plug A1 on your Local MPC unit, Plug A1 on the AUX1 unit and Plug  
A1 on the AUX2 unit, enter either of the following command lines:  
/ON A1+AUX1 A1+AUX2 A1 [Enter]  
or  
/ON A1+AUX1 A1+AUX2 A1 [Enter]  
Note: Enter a space to separate the AUX parameter from the Plug number.  
9-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation  
2. Switch a Series of Plugs: To apply a command to a series of plugs, enter the  
alphanumeric number for the plugs that mark the beginning and end of the series,  
separated by a colon.  
a) Switch a Series of Plugs on Local Unit: When switching a series of plugs  
on your local MPC unit, simply enter the numbers for the plugs that mark the  
beginning and end of the series, separated by a colon. For example to switch  
On plugs A1 through A4 on your local MPC unit, enter the following:  
/ON A1:A4 [Enter]  
b) Switch a Series Plugs on AUX/Remote Units: If optional AUX/Remote units  
are connected to your Local unit, use the same command format described  
above for the Local Unit, except pair each plug number with the AUX port  
where the plug resides. For example, to switch On plugs A1 through A4 on the  
AUX 2 unit, enter the following:  
/ON AUX2 A1:A4 [Enter]  
Note: Enter a space to separate the AUX parameter from the Plug numbers.  
c) Switch a Series of Plugs on Both Local and AUX Units: Use the same  
command format described above for AUX units. However, note that in the  
case of the Local MPC unit, it is not necessary to enter the AUX argument. For  
example, to switch On Plugs A1 through A3 on your Local MPC unit, and Plugs  
A2 through A4 on the AUX1 unit, enter either of the following command lines:  
/ON A1:A3+AUX1 A2:A4 [Enter]  
or  
/ON A1:A3,AUX1 A2:A4 [Enter]  
Note: Enter a space to separate the AUX parameter from the Plug number.  
4. All Plugs: To apply a command to all plugs, enter an asterisk in place of the name  
or number. For example, to Boot all plugs, enter the following:  
/BO * [Enter]  
Notes:  
• When this command is invoked by a User level account, it will only be  
applied to the plugs that are specifically allowed for that account.  
• If your local MPC unit is connected to one or more AUX/Remote units,  
commands that include the asterisk character will also be applied to all  
permitted plugs on the AUX/Remote units.  
9-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
9.2.4. Connecting to Serial Ports - Text Interface  
In addition to their default functions, the Console Port, Remote Port and AUX ports can  
also be used for connection to serial console ports on rack mounted devices, providing  
convenient back door access. Normally, the Remote Port is used for connection to the  
optional MPC-DISPLAY unit, the AUX ports are used for connection to additional, remote  
MPC units, and the Console port is used for connection to a local control device.  
However, if the Remote port and AUX ports have been reconfigured as described in  
Section 5.8.2, then Administrators, SuperUsers and Users will be able to connect to  
these ports by accessing command mode via the Text Interface and invoking the /C  
command.  
Notes:  
• In order to connect to the Remote or AUX ports, you must first configure  
these ports as serial ports as described in Section 5.8.2.  
• User level accounts will only be able to connect to the ports that are  
specifically permitted by the account as described in Section 5.5.  
• Administrator accounts, SuperUser accounts and properly configured User  
accounts will always be allowed to connect to the serial Console port.  
To create a connection to a serial port, first make certain that the port is configured  
for serial mode, then use an Administrator account, SuperUser account or properly  
configured User account to access the Text Interface via the Network Port, and proceed  
as follows:  
1. Console Port Connection: To connect to the Console port, type /C 1and  
press [Enter].  
2. Remote Port Connection: To connect to the Remote port, type /C REMOTE  
and press [Enter].  
3. AUX Port Connection: To connect to one of the three AUX ports, proceed as  
follows:  
a) AUX1 Port: Type /C AUX1and press [Enter].  
b) AUX2 Port: Type /C AUX2and press [Enter].  
c) AUX3 Port: Type /C AUX3and press [Enter].  
To terminate a connection between your port and another serial port, type ^X([Ctrl]  
plus [X]) or issue the currently defined disconnect sequence. To terminate a connection  
between two other serial ports, type /D n and then press [Enter] (where n is the  
number or name of one of the two connected ports  
9-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation  
9.3. The Automated Mode  
The Automated Mode allows the MPC to execute switching and reboot commands,  
without displaying menus or generating response messages. Automated Mode is  
designed to allow the MPC to be controlled by a device which can generate commands  
to control power switching functions without human intervention.  
When Automated Mode is enabled, the /ON, /OFF, /BOOT, /DPL and /X commands  
are executed without a "Sure?" confirmation prompt and without command response  
messages; the only reply to these commands is the "MPC>" prompt, which is displayed  
when the command is complete.  
Note that although Automated Mode can be enabled using either the Web Browser  
Interface or Text Interface, Automated Mode is designed primarily for users who wish to  
send ASCII commands to the MPC without operator intervention, and therefore does not  
specifically apply to the Web Browser Interface. When Automated Mode is enabled, the  
Web Browser Interface can still be used to invoke On / Off / Boot commands.  
Notes:  
• When Automated Mode is enabled, all MPC password security functions are  
disabled, and users are able to access System Level command functions  
(including the configuration menus) and control plugs without entering a  
password.  
• If you need to enable the Automated Mode, but want to restrict network  
access to MPC configuration menus, it is recommended to enable and  
configure the IP Security Function as described in Section 5.9.3.  
To enable/disable Automated Mode, access the System Parameters menu (see  
Section 5.3,) then set the "Automated Mode" option to "On". When Automated Mode is  
enabled, MPC functions will change as follows:  
1. All Password Security Suppressed: When a user attempts to access command  
mode, the password prompt will not be displayed at either the Console Port or  
the Network Port. Unless specifically restricted by the IP Security Function, all  
users will be allowed to access both switching and configuration functions, and  
all commands will be immediately accepted without the requirement to enter a  
password.  
2. Status Screen Suppressed: The status screens will not be automatically  
displayed after commands are successfully executed. Note however, that the /S  
command can still be invoked to display the status screen as needed.  
3. "Sure?" Prompt Suppressed: All commands are executed without prompting for  
user confirmation.  
4. Error Messages Suppressed: If the [Enter] key is pressed without entering a  
command, the MPC will not respond with the "Invalid Command" message. Note  
however, that an error message will still be generated if commands are invoked  
using invalid formats or arguments.  
All other status display and configuration commands will still function as normal.  
9-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation  
9.4. Manual Operation  
In addition to the command driven functions available via the Web Browser Interface and  
Text Interface, some MPC functions can also be controlled manually. For a summary of  
front panel control functions, please refer to Section 2.1 and Section 2.3.  
9.5. Logging Out of Command Mode  
When you have finished communicating with the MPC, it is important to always  
disconnect using either the "LogOut" link (Web Browser Interface) or the /X command  
(Text Interface), rather than by simply closing your browser window or communications  
program. When communicating via a PDA, use the PDA's "Close" function to disconnect  
and logout.  
When you disconnect using the LogOut link or /X command, this ensures that the MPC  
has completely exited from command mode, and is not waiting for the inactivity timeout  
period to elapse before allowing additional connections.  
9-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
10. SSH Encryption  
In addition to standard Telnet protocol, the MPC also supports SSH connections, which  
provide secure, encrypted access via network. In order to communicate with the MPC  
using SSH protocol, your network node must include an appropriate SSH client.  
Note that when the /K (Send SSH Key) command is invoked, the MPC can also provide  
you with a public SSH key, which can be used to streamline connection to the MPC  
when using SSH protocol.  
Although you can establish an SSH connection to the unit without the public key,  
the public key provides validation for the MPC, and once this key is supplied to the  
SSH client, the client will no longer display a warning indicating that the MPC is not a  
recognized user when the client attempts to establish a connection.  
The /K command uses the following format:  
/K <k> [Enter]  
Where kis an argument that determines which type of public key will be displayed, and  
the kargument offers the following options:  
1. SSH1  
2. SSH2 RSA  
3. SSH2 DSA  
For example, to obtain the public SSH key for an SSH2 RSA client, type /K 2and then  
press [Enter]. Note that when capturing the SSH key, you can either configure your  
terminal application to receive the parameter file, or simply copy and paste the resulting  
SSH key.  
Notes:  
• Although the MPC does not support SSH1, the /K 1 command will still return  
a key for SSH1.  
• When capturing the SSH key, you can either configure your terminal  
application to receive the parameter file, or simply copy and paste the  
resulting key  
10-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
11. Syslog Messages  
The Syslog feature can create log records of each Alarm Event. As these event records  
are created, they are sent to a Syslog Daemon, located at an IP address defined via the  
Network Parameters menu.  
11.1. Configuration  
If you wish to employ this feature, you must set the real-time clock and calendar via the  
System Parameters Menu, and define the IP address for the Syslog Daemon via the  
Network Port Configuration menu.  
To configure the Syslog function, please proceed as follows:  
1. Access command mode: Note that the following configuration menus are only  
available to accounts that permit Administrator level commands.  
2. System Parameters Menu: Access the System Parameters Menu as described in  
Section 5.3, then set the following parameters:  
a) Set Clock and Calendar: Set the Real Time Clock and Calendar and/or  
configure and enable the NTP server feature.  
3. Network Parameters Menu: Access the Network Parameters Menu as described  
in Section 5.9, then set the following parameters:  
a) Syslog IP Address: Determine the IP address for the device that will run the  
Syslog Daemon, then use the Network Port Configuration menu to define the IP  
Address for the Syslog Daemon.  
4. Syslog Daemon: In order to capture messages sent by the MPC, a computer must  
be running a Syslog Daemon (set to UDP Port 514) at the IP address specified in  
Step 3 above.  
Once the Syslog Address is defined, Syslog messages will be generated whenever one  
of the alarms discussed in Section 7 is triggered.  
11-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Syslog Messages  
TEST NETWORK OPTIONS:  
1. SNMP Trap Test Manager 1  
2. SNMP Trap Test Manager 2  
3. Syslog Test  
4. Ping  
Enter: #<CR> to select,  
<ESC> to exit ...  
Figure 11.1: The Test Menu (Text Interface, Administrator Mode Only)  
11.2. Testing Syslog Configuration  
After you have configured the MPC as described in Section 11.1, the /TEST command  
can be used to make certain that the function is properly set up. To test the Syslog  
function, access the MPC command mode via the Text Interface using an account that  
permits Administrator level commands, then type /TEST and press [Enter] to display  
the Test Menu shown in Figure 11.1.  
When the Syslog Test feature is selected, the MPC will attempt to send a test Syslog  
message, using the current Syslog configuration. If the test message is not received by  
your Syslog Daemon, review the procedure outlined in Section 11.1 to make certain the  
MPC and the Syslog Daemon are properly configured.  
In addition to providing a means to test the Syslog and SNMP Trap features, the Test  
Menu also includes a Ping command option, which can be used in a manner similar  
to the DOS ping command to check to make certain that the unit is communicating  
properly. Note that in order for the Ping command to function with domain names, you  
must first configure Domain Name Server parameters as described in Section 5.9.5.  
11-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
12. SNMP Traps  
SNMP is an acronym for "Simple Network Management Protocol". The SNMP Trap  
function allows the MPC to send Alarm Notification messages to two different SNMP  
managers, each time one of the Alarms discussed in Section 7 is triggered.  
Note:  
• The SNMP feature cannot be configured via the SNMP Manager.  
• SNMP reading ability is limited to the System Group.  
• The SNMP feature includes the ability to be polled by an SNMP Manager.  
• Once SNMP Trap Parameters have been defined, SNMP Traps will be  
sent each time an Alarm is triggered. For more information on Alarm  
Configuration, please refer to Section 7.  
12.1. Configuration:  
To configure the SNMP Trap function, proceed as follows:  
1. Access command mode using an account that permits Administrator level  
commands.  
2. SNMP Trap Parameters: Access the SNMP Trap Parameters Menu as described in  
Section 5.9.7. Set the following:  
a) SNMP Managers 1 and 2: The address(es) that will receive SNMP Traps  
that are generated by one of the Alarms discussed in Section 7. Consult  
your network administrator to determine the IP address(es) for the SNMP  
Manager(s), then use the Network Parameters menu to set the IP address  
for each SNMP Manager. Note that it is not necessary to define both SNMP  
Managers.  
Note: To enable the SNMP Trap feature, you must define at least one SNMP  
Manager. SNMP Traps are automatically enabled when at least one SNMP  
Manager has been defined.  
b) Trap Community: Consult your network administrator, and then use the  
Network Parameters menus to set the Trap Community.  
Once SNMP Trap Parameters have been defined, the MPC will send an SNMP Trap each  
time an alarm is triggered.  
12-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SNMP Traps  
12.2. Testing the SNMP Trap Function  
After you have finished setting up the SNMP Trap function, it is recommended to test the  
configuration to ensure that it is working correctly. To test configuration of the SNMP  
Trap function, proceed as follows:  
1. Configure the SNMP Trap function as described in Section 12.1.  
2. Access the Text Interface command mode using an account that permits  
Administrator level commands, then invoke the "/TEST" command at the MPC  
command prompt. Note that the /TEST Command is only available in Administrator  
Mode.  
3. Select Item 1 or 2 to send an SNMP test trap to Manager 1 or 2, respectively. It is  
possible that the ARP table will not be properly setup. If this occurs a message to  
that effect is displayed and the MPC immediately refreshes the ARP table. Repeat  
steps 2 and 3 to try again.  
For more information on the /TESTcommand and the Test Menu, please refer to  
Section 11.2.  
12-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
13. Operation via SNMP  
If SNMP Access Parameters have been defined as described in Section 5.9.6, then you  
will be able to manage user accounts, control power and reboot switching and display  
unit status via SNMP. This section describes SNMP communication with the MPC unit,  
and lists some common commands that can be employed to manage users, control  
switching and reboot actions and display unit status.  
13.1. MPC SNMP Agent  
The MPC’s SNMP Agent supports various configuration, control, status and event  
notification capabilities. Managed objects are described in the WTI-MPC-MIB.txt  
document, which can be found on the CDROM included with the MPC unit, or in the  
user's guide archive on the WTI web site (http://www.wti.com/manuals.htm).  
The WTI-MPC-MIB.txt document can be compiled for use with your SNMP client.  
13.2. SNMPv3 Authentication and Encryption  
The major limitations of SNMPv2 were the failure to include proper username/password  
login credentials (v2 only used a password type of login, i.e., community name) and the  
exclusion of encryption for data moving over the internet. SNMPv3 addresses both of  
these shortcomings.  
For SNMPv3, the MPC supports two forms of Authentication/Privacy: Auth/noPriv which  
requires a username/password, but does not encrypt data going over the internet and  
Auth/Priv which requires a username/password AND encrypts the data going over the  
internet using DES (AES is not supported at this time). For the Password protocol, the  
MPC supports either MD5 or SHA1.  
13-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation via SNMP  
13.3. Configuration via SNMP  
MPC User accounts can be viewed, created, modified, and deleted via SNMP. User  
accounts are arranged in a table of 128 rows, and indexed 1-128. User account  
parameters, as seen through the SNMP, are summarized below.  
userTable::userName– 32 character username  
userTable::userPasswd– 16 character password  
userTable::userAccessLevel– Account access level.  
0– View Access  
1– User Access  
2– Superuser Access  
3– Administrator Access  
userTable::userPortAccess- Determines which AUX/Remote ports the user  
will be allowed to connect to. This parameter only applies when the AUX/Remote  
ports have been configured as serial ports.  
userTable::userLocalAccess– A string of 20 characters, with one character  
for each of the 20 possible plugs on the LOCAL MPC unit. A ‘0’ indicates that the  
account does not have access to the plug, and a ‘1’ indicates that the user does  
have access to the plug.  
userTable::userAux1Access– A string of 20 characters, with one character for  
each of the 20 possible plugs on the AUX1 MPC unit. 0’ indicates that the account  
cannot access the plug, and ‘1’ indicates that the user can access the plug.  
userTable::userAux2Access– A string of 20 characters, with one character for  
each of the 20 possible plugs on the AUX2 MPC unit. 0’ indicates that the account  
cannot access the plug, and ‘1’ indicates that the user can access the plug.  
userTable::userAux3Access– A string of 20 characters, with one character for  
each of the 20 possible plugs on the AUX3 MPC unit. 0’ indicates that the account  
cannot access the plug, and ‘1’ indicates that the user can access the plug.  
userTable::userGroupAccess– A string of 54 characters, with one character  
for each of the 54 possible plug groups in the system. 0’ indicates that the account  
cannot access the group, and ‘1’ indicates that the user can access the group.  
userTable::userSerialAccess– Access to the serial interface  
0– No access  
1– Access  
userTable::userTelnetSshAccess– Access to the Telnet/SSH interface  
0– No access  
1- Access  
userTable::userWebAccess– Access to the Web interface  
0– No access  
1- Access  
userTable::userCurrentPowerMetering– Access to the systems current/  
power metering  
0– No access  
1– Access  
userTable::userCallbackNum– 32 character callback number for account  
userTable::userSubmit– Set to 1to submit changes.  
13-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation via SNMP  
13.3.1. Viewing Users  
To view users, issue a GET request on any of the user parameters for the index  
corresponding to the desired user.  
13.3.2. Adding Users  
For an empty index, issue a SET request on the desired parameters. Minimum  
requirement is a username and password to create a user, all other parameters will  
be set to defaults if not specified. To create the user, issue a SET request on the  
userSubmit object.  
13.3.3. Modifying Users  
For the index corresponding to the user you wish to modify, issue a SET request on  
the desired parameters to be modified. Once complete, issue a SET request on the  
userSubmit object.  
13.3.4. Deleting Users  
For the index corresponding to the user you wish to delete, issue a SET request on the  
username with a blank string. Once complete, issue a SET request on the userSubmit  
object.  
13-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation via SNMP  
13.4. Plug Control via SNMP  
13.4.1. Controlling Plugs  
ON, OFF, BOOT, and DEFAULT commands can be issued for plugs via SNMP. Plugs  
are arranged in a table of N rows, where N is the number of plugs in the system. Plug  
parameters are described below.  
plugTable::plugID– String indicating the plug's ID.  
plugTable::plugName- String indicating the plug's user-defined name.  
plugTable::plugStatus– Current state of the plug  
0– Plug is OFF  
1– Plug is ON  
plugTable::plugAction– Action to be taken on plug  
1– Mark to turn ON (does not execute)  
2– Mark to turn OFF (does not execute)  
3– Mark to BOOT (does not execute)  
4 – Mark to DEFAULT (does not execute)  
5 – Mark to turn ON and execute plug actions  
6 - Mark to turn OFF and execute plug actions  
7 - Mark to BOOT and execute plug actions  
8 - Mark to DEFAULT and execute plug actions  
Set plugTable::plugActionto desired action, as specified by values 1-4 above, for  
each plug index the action is to be applied to. For the last plug you wish to set before  
executing the commands, use values 5-8 instead, which will invoke the requested  
commands all at once.  
13.4.2. Controlling Plug Groups  
ON, OFF, BOOT, and DEFAULT commands can be issued for plug groups via SNMP.  
Plug groups are arranged in a table of 54 rows, one row for each plug group in the  
system. Plug Group parameters are described below.  
plugGroupTable::plugGroupName– String indicating the plug groups name  
plugGroupTable::plugGroupAction– Action to be taken on plug group  
1– Mark to turn ON (does not execute)  
2– Mark to turn OFF (does not execute)  
3– Mark to BOOT (does not execute)  
4– Mark to DEFAULT (does not execute)  
5– Mark to turn ON and execute plug group actions  
6- Mark to turn OFF and execute plug group actions  
7- Mark to BOOT and execute plug group actions  
8- Mark to DEFAULT and execute plug group actions  
Set plugGroupTable::plugGroupActionto desired action, as specified by values  
1-4 above, for each plug group index the action is to be applied to. For the last plug  
group you wish to set before executing the commands, use values 5-8 instead, which  
will invoke the requested commands all at once.  
13-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation via SNMP  
13.5. Viewing MPC Status via SNMP  
Status of various components of the MPC can be retrieved via SNMP. Plug Status, and  
Environmental Status are currently supported.  
13.5.1. Plug Status  
The status of each plug in the system can be retrieved using the command below.  
plugTable::plugStatus– The status of the plug.  
0– Plug is OFF  
1– Plug is ON  
plugTable::plugName- String indicating the plug's user-defined name.  
13.5.2. Unit Environment Status  
The environment status can be retrieved for various variables for all of the MPC units in  
the system. The environmentUnitTable contains four rows, one row for each unit in the  
system (LOCAL, AUX1, AUX2, AUX3.)  
environmentUnitTable::environmentUnitName– The unit (LOCAL, AUX1,  
AUX2, or AUX3.)  
environmentUnitTable::environmentUnitTemperature– The temperature  
of the given unit.  
environmentUnitTable::environmentUnitCurrentA– Unit's total current  
for Branch A. Note that Current will be reported in tenths of an Amp (divide result  
by ten to determine value in Amps.)  
environmentUnitTable::environmentUnitVoltageA– Unit voltage for  
Branch A  
environmentUnitTable::environmentUnitPowerA– Power drawn by  
Branch A  
environmentUnitTable::environmentUnitCurrentB– Unit's total current  
for Branch B. Note that Current will be reported in tenths of an Amp.  
environmentUnitTable::environmentUnitVoltageB– Unit voltage for  
Branch B  
environmentUnitTable::environmentUnitPowerB– Power drawn on  
Branch B  
environmentUnitTable::environmentUnitCurrentC– Unit's total current  
for Branch C. Note that Current will be reported in tenths of an Amp.  
environmentUnitTable::environmentUnitVoltageC– Unit voltage for  
Branch C  
environmentUnitTable::environmentUnitPowerC– Power drawn on  
Branch C  
environmentUnitTable::environmentUnitCurrentD– Unit's total current  
for Branch D. Note that Current will be reported in tenths of an Amp.  
environmentUnitTable::environmentUnitVoltageD– Unit voltage for  
Branch D  
environmentUnitTable::environmentUnitPowerD– Power drawn on  
Branch D  
13-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation via SNMP  
13.5.3. System Environment Status  
The system environment status for the local MPC unit and all connected AUX units can  
be retrieved for the entire system.  
environmentBranchATotalCurrentTotal Branch A current for MPC system  
(LOCAL and AUX units.) Note that Total Current will be reported in tenths of an Amp  
(divide result by ten to determine value in Amps.)  
environmentBranchATotalPowerTotal Branch A power for MPC system  
(LOCAL and AUX units)  
environmentBranchBTotalCurrentTotal Branch B current for MPC system  
(LOCAL and AUX units.) Note that Total Current will be reported in tenths of an Amp  
(divide result by ten to determine value in Amps.)  
environmentBranchBTotalPowerTotal Branch B power for MPC system  
(LOCAL and AUX units)  
environmentBranchCTotalCurrentTotal Branch C current for MPC system  
(LOCAL and AUX units.) Note that Total Current is reported in tenths of an Amp.  
environmentBranchCTotalPowerTotal Branch C power for MPC system  
(LOCAL and AUX units)  
environmentBranchDTotalCurrentTotal Branch D current for MPC system  
(LOCAL and AUX units.) Note that Total Current is reported in tenths of an Amp.  
environmentBranchDTotalPowerTotal Branch D power for MPC system  
(LOCAL and AUX units)  
environmentSystemTotalCurrent- Total current drawn by Branch A plus  
Branch B. Note that Total Current will be reported in tenths of an Amp (divide result  
by ten to determine value in Amps.)  
environmentSystemTotalPower- Total power drawn by Branch A plus  
Branch B.  
environmentMonthlyPowerLog- The monthly power usage log.  
13.6. Sending Traps via SNMP  
Traps that report various unit conditions can be sent to an SNMP Management Station  
from the MPC. The following traps are currently supported.  
WarmStartTrap – Trap indicating a warm start  
ColdStartTrap – Trap indicating a cold start  
AlarmTrap – Trap indicating an alarm condition  
TestTrap – Test trap invoked by user via the Text Interface (CLI.)  
AlarmTrap – Trap indicating an alarm condition. A trap with a unique enterprise  
OID is defined for every possible alarm in the system, under which several specific  
trap-types are defined to indicate the setting or clearing of that particular alarm  
condition.  
13-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
14. Setting Up SSL Encryption  
This section describes the procedure for setting up a secure connection via an https  
web connection to the MPC.  
Note: SSL parameters cannot be defined via the Web Browser Interface. In  
order to set up SSL encryption, you must contact the MPC via the Text Interface.  
There are two different types of https security certificates: "Self Signed" certificates and  
"Signed" certificates.  
Self Signed certificates can be created by the MPC, without the need to go to an outside  
service, and there is no need to set up your domain name server to recognize the MPC.  
The principal disadvantage of Self Signed certificates, is that when you access the MPC  
command mode via the Web Browser Interface, the browser will display a message  
which warns that the connection might be unsafe. Note however, that even though this  
message is displayed, communication will still be encrypted, and the message is merely  
a warning that the MPC is not recognized and that you may not be connecting to the  
site that you intended.  
®
Signed certificates must be created via an outside security service (e.g., VeriSign ,  
Thawte™, etc.) and then uploaded to the MPC unit to verify the user's identity. In order  
to use Signed certificates, you must contact an appropriate security service and set up  
your domain name server to recognize the name that you will assign to the MPC unit  
(e.g., service.wti.com.) Once a signed certificate has been created and uploaded to  
the MPC, you will then be able to access command mode without seeing the warning  
message that is normally displayed for Self Signed certificate access.  
WEB ACCESS:  
HTTP:  
1. Enable: On  
2. Port:  
80  
HTTPS:  
3. Enable: Off  
4. Port: 443  
SSL Certificates:  
5. Common Name:  
6. State or Province:  
7. Locality:  
8. Country:  
9. Email Address:  
10. Organization Name:  
11. Organizational Unit:  
12. Create CSR:  
15. Export Server Private Key:  
16. Import Server Private Key:  
13. View CSR:  
14. Import CRT:  
Enter: #<CR> to change,  
<ESC> to return to previous menu ...  
Figure 14.1: Web Access Parameters (Text Interface Only)  
14-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Saving and Restoring Configuration Parameters  
14.1. Creating a Self Signed Certificate  
To create a Self Signed certificate, access the Text interface via Telnet or SSH, using a  
password that permits access to Administrator level commands and then proceed as  
follows:  
1. Type /Nand press [Enter] to display the Network Parameters menu.  
2. At the Network Parameters menu, type 23and press [Enter] to display the  
Web Access menu (Figure 14.1.) Type 3and press [Enter] and then follow the  
instructions in the resulting submenu to enable HTTPS access.  
3. Next, use the Web Access menu to define the following parameters.  
Note: When configuring the MPC, make certain to define all of the following  
parameters. Although most SSL applications require only the Common Name,  
in the case of the MPC all of the following parameters are mandatory.  
5. Common Name: A domain name, that will be used to identify the MPC unit.  
If you will use a Self Signed certificate, then this name can be any name that you  
choose, and there is no need to set up your domain name server to recognize  
this name. However, if you will use a Signed certificate, then your domain name  
server must be set up to recognize this name (e.g., service.wti.com.)  
6. State or Province: The name of the state or province where the MPC unit will  
be located (e.g., California.)  
7. Locality: The city or town where the MPC unit will be located (e.g., Irvine.)  
8. Country: The two character country code for the nation where the MPC will  
be located (e.g., US.)  
9. Email Address: An email address, that can be used to contact the person  
responsible for the MPC (e.g., [email protected].)  
10. Organizational Name: The name of your company or organization  
(e.g., Western Telematic.)  
11. Organizational Unit: The name of your department or division; if necessary,  
any random text can be entered in this field (e.g., tech support.)  
14-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Saving and Restoring Configuration Parameters  
4. After you have defined parameters 5 through 11, type 12and press [Enter] (Create  
CSR) to create a Certificate Signing Request. By default, this will overwrite any  
existing certificate, and create a new Self Signed certificate.  
a) The MPC will prompt you to create a password. Key in the desired password  
(up to 16 characters) and then press [Enter]. When the MPC prompts you  
to verify the password, key it again and then press [Enter] once. After a brief  
pause, the MPC will return to the Web Access Menu, indicating that the CSR  
has been successfully created.  
b) When the Web Access Menu is re-displayed, press [Esc] several times until  
you exit from the Network Parameters menu and the "Saving Configuration"  
message is displayed.  
5. After the new configuration has been saved, test the Self Signed certificate by  
accessing the MPC via the Web Interface, using an HTTPS connection.  
a) Before the connection is established, the MPC should display the warning  
message described previously. This indicates that the Self Signed certificate  
has been successfully created and saved.  
b) Click on the "Yes" button to proceed. The MPC will prompt you to enter a user  
name and password. After keying in your password, the main menu should be  
displayed, indicating that you have successfully accessed command mode.  
14.2. Creating a Signed Certificate  
To create a Signed certificate, and eliminate the warning message, first set up your  
domain name server to recognize the Common Name (item 5) that you will assign to  
the unit. Next, complete steps one through five as described in Section 14.1 and then  
proceed as follows:  
1. Capture the Newly Created Certificate: Type 13and press [Enter] (View CSR).  
The MPC will prompt you to configure your communications (Telnet) program to  
receive the certificate. Set up your communications program to receive a binary  
file, and then press [Enter] to capture the file and save it. This is the Code Signing  
Request that you will send to the outside security service (e.g., VeriSign, Thawte,  
etc.) in order to have them sign and activate the certificate.  
2. Obtain the Signed Certificate: Send the captured certificate to the outside  
security service. Refer to the security service's web page for further instructions.  
14-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Saving and Restoring Configuration Parameters  
3. Upload the Signed Certificate to the MPC: After the "signed" certificate is  
returned from the security service, return to the Web Access menu.  
a) Access the MPC command mode via the Text Interface using an account that  
permits Administrator level commands as described previously, then type /N  
and press [Enter] to display the Network Parameters menu, and then type 23  
and press [Enter] to display the Web Access menu.  
b) From the Web Access menu, type 14and press [Enter] (Import CRT) to  
begin the upload process. At the CRT Server Key submenu, type 1and press  
[Enter] to choose "Upload Server Key."  
c) Use your communications program to send the binary format Signed  
Certificate to the MPC unit. When the upload is complete, press [Escape] to  
exit from the CRT Server Key submenu.  
d) After you exit from the CRT Server Key submenu, press [Escape] several times  
until you have exited from the Network Parameters menu and the "Saving  
Configuration" message is displayed.  
4. After the configuration has been saved, test the signed certificate by accessing the  
MPC via the Web Browser Interface, using an HTTPS connection. For example, if  
the common name has been defined as "service.companyname111.com", then you  
would enter "https://service.companyname111.com" in your web browser's  
address field. If the Signed Certificate has been properly created and uploaded,  
the warning message should no longer be displayed.  
14.3. Downloading the Server Private Key  
When configuring the MPC's SSL encryption feature (or setting up other security/  
authentication features), it is recommended to download and save the Server Private  
Key. To download the Server Private Key, access the Text interface via Telnet or SSH,  
using a password that permits access to Administrator level commands and then  
proceed as follows:  
1. Type /Nand press [Enter] to display the Network Parameters menu.  
2. At the Network Parameters menu, type 23and press [Enter] to display the Web  
Access menu (Figure 14.1.)  
a) To download the Server Private Key from the MPC unit, make certain that SSL  
parameters have been defined as described in Section 14.1, then type 15and  
press [Enter] and store the resulting key on your hard drive.  
b) To upload a previously saved Server Private Key to the MPC unit, make certain  
that SSL parameters have been defined as described in Section 14.1, then type  
16and press [Enter] and follow the instructions in the resulting submenu.  
14-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
15. Saving and Restoring Configuration Parameters  
Once the MPC is properly configured, parameters can be downloaded and saved as an  
ASCII text file. Later, if the configuration is accidentally altered, the saved parameters  
can be uploaded to automatically reconfigure the unit without the need to manually  
assign each parameter.  
Saved parameters can also be uploaded to other identical MPC units, allowing rapid  
set-up when several identical units will be configured with the same parameters.  
The "Save Parameters" procedure can be performed from any terminal emulation  
©
program (e.g. HyperTerminal™, TeraTerm , etc.), that allows downloading of ASCII files.  
Note: The Save and Restore features described in this section are only  
available via the Text Interface.  
15.1. Sending Parameters to a File  
1. Start your terminal emulation program and access the Text Interface command  
mode using an account that permits Administrator level commands.  
2. When the command prompt appears, type /Uand press [Enter]. The MPC will  
prompt you to configure your terminal emulation program to receive an ASCII  
download.  
a) Set your terminal emulation program to receive an ASCII download, and the  
specify a name for a file that will receive the saved parameters (e.g. MPC.PAR).  
b) Disable the Line Wrap function for your terminal emulation program. This will  
prevent command lines from being broken in two during transmission.  
3. When the terminal emulation program is ready to receive the file, return to the  
MPC’s Save Parameter File menu, and press [Enter] to proceed. MPC parameters  
will be saved on your hard drive in the file specified in Step 2 above.  
4. The MPC will send a series of ASCII command lines which specify currently  
selected parameters. When the download is complete, press [Enter] to return to  
the command prompt.  
15-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Saving and Restoring Configuration Parameters  
15.2. Restoring Saved Parameters  
This section describes the procedure for using your terminal emulation program to send  
saved parameters to the MPC.  
1. Start your terminal emulation program and access the MPC’s Text Interface  
command mode using an account that permits Administrator level commands.  
2. Configure your terminal emulation program to upload an ASCII text file.  
3. Upload the ASCII text file with the saved MPC parameters. If necessary, key in the  
file name and directory path.  
4. Your terminal emulation program will send the ASCII text file to the MPC. When the  
terminal program is finished with the upload, make certain to terminate the Upload  
mode.  
Note: If the MPC detects an error in the file, it will respond with the "Invalid  
Parameter" message. If an error message is received, carefully check the  
contents of the parameters file, correct the problem, and then repeat the Upload  
procedure.  
5. If the parameter upload is successful, the MPC will send a confirmation message,  
and then return to the command prompt. Type /Sand press [Enter], the Status  
Screen will be displayed. Check the Status Screen to make certain the unit has  
been configured with the saved parameters.  
15-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Saving and Restoring Configuration Parameters  
15.3. Restoring Previously Saved Parameters  
If you make a mistake while configuring the MPC unit, and wish to return to the  
previously saved parameters, the Text Interface's "Reboot System" command (/I)  
offers the option to reinitialize the MPC unit using previously backed up parameters.  
This allows you to reset the unit to previously saved parameters, even after you have  
changed parameters and saved them.  
Notes:  
• The MPC will automatically backup saved parameters once a day, shortly  
after Midnight. This configuration backup file will contain only the most  
recently saved MPC parameters, and will be overwritten by the next night's  
daily backup.  
• When the /I command is invoked, a submenu will be displayed which  
offers several Reboot options. Options 5 and 6 are used to restore the  
configuration backup file. The dates shown next to options 5 and 6 indicate  
the date that you last changed and saved unit parameters.  
• If the daily automatic configuration backup has been triggered since the  
configuration error was made, and the previously saved configuration has  
been overwritten by newer, incorrect parameters, then this function will not  
be able to restore the previously saved (correct) parameters.  
To restore the previously saved configuration, proceed as follows:  
1. Access command move via the Text Interface, using a username/password that  
permits access to Administrator level commands (see Section 5.1.1.)  
2. At the MPC command prompt, type /Iand press [Enter]. The MPC will display a  
submenu that offers several different reboot options.  
3. At the submenu, you may choose either Item 5 (Reboot & Restore Last Known  
Working Configuration) or Item 6 (Restore Last Known Working Configuration.) Key  
in the number for the desired option, and then press [Enter].  
Note: When invoking the /I command to restore configuration parameters,  
Item 5 is recommended.  
4. The MPC will reboot and previously saved parameters will be restored.  
15-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
16. Upgrading MPC Firmware  
When new, improved versions of the MPC firmware become available, the "Upgrade  
Firmware" function can be used to update the unit. Updates can be uploaded via FTP  
or SFTP protocols.  
Notes:  
• The FTP/SFTP servers can only be started via the Text Interface.  
• All other ports will remain active during the firmware upgrade procedure.  
• If the upgrade includes new parameters or features not included in the  
previous firmware version, these new parameters will be set to their default  
values.  
• The upgrade procedure will require approximately 15 minutes for your local  
MPC unit, plus 30 minutes for each attached AUX/Remote unit.  
1. Obtain the update file. Firmware modifications can either be mailed to the  
customer, or downloaded from WTI. Place the upgrade CDR in your disk drive or  
copy the file to your hard drive.  
2. Access Text Interface command mode via Serial Port, Telnet or SSH client session,  
using a username/password and port that permit Administrator level commands.  
3. When the command prompt appears, type /UFand then press [Enter]. The MPC  
will display a screen which offers the following options:  
a) Start FTP/SFTP Servers Only (Do NOT default parameters): To proceed  
with the upgrade, while retaining user-defined parameters, type 1and press  
[Enter]. All existing parameter settings will be restored when the upgrade is  
complete.  
b) Start FTP/SFTP Servers & Default (Keep IP parameters & SSH Keys): To  
proceed with the upgrade and default all user-defined parameters except for  
the IP Parameters and SSH Keys, type 2and press [Enter]. When the upgrade  
is complete, all parameter settings except the IP Parameters and SSH Keys,  
will be reset to factory default values.  
c) Start FTP/SFTP Servers & Default (Default ALL parameters): To proceed  
with the upgrade, and reset parameters to default settings, type 3and press  
[Enter]. When the upgrade is complete, all parameters will be set to default  
values.  
Note that after any of the above options is selected, the MPC will start the receiving  
servers and wait for an FTP/SFTP client to make a connection and upload a valid  
firmware binary image.  
4. To proceed with the upgrade, select either option 1 or option 2. The MPC will  
display a message that indicates that the unit is waiting for data. Leave the current  
Telnet/SSH client session connected at this time.  
16-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Upgrading MPC Firmware  
5. Open your FTP/SFTP application and (if you have not already done so,) login to the  
MPC unit, using a username and password that permit access to Administrator  
level commands.  
6. Transfer the md5 format upgrade file to the MPC.  
7. After the file transfer is complete, the MPC will install the upgrade file and then  
reboot itself and break all port connections. Note that it will take approximately 10  
minutes to complete the installation process. The unit will remain accessible until it  
reboots.  
a) Some FTP/SFTP applications may not automatically close when the file transfer  
is complete. If this is the case, you may close your FTP/SFTP client manually  
after it indicates that the file has been successfully transferred.  
b) When the upgrade process is complete, the MPC will send a message to all  
currently connected network sessions, indicating that the MPC is going down  
for a reboot.  
Note: Do not power down the MPC unit while it is in the process of installing  
the upgrade file. This can damage the unit's operating system.  
8. If you have accessed the MPC via the Network Port, in order to start the FTP/SFTP  
servers, the MPC will break the network connection when the system is reinitialized.  
• If you initially selected "Start FTP/SFTP Servers and Save Parameters", you may  
then reestablish a connection with the MPC using your former IP address.  
• If you initially selected "Start FTP/SFTP Servers and Default Parameters", you  
must then login using the MPC’s default IP address (Default = 192.168.168.168)  
or access command mode via Serial Port 1 or 2 or via Modem.  
When firmware upgrades are available, WTI will provide the necessary files. At that time,  
an updated Users Guide or addendum will also be available.  
16-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
17. Command Reference Guide  
17.1. Command Conventions  
Most commands described in this section conform to the following conventions:  
Text Interface: Commands discussed in this section, can only be invoked via the  
Text Interface. These commands cannot be invoked via the Web Browser Interface.  
Slash Character: Most MPC Text Interface commands begin with the Slash  
Character (/).  
Apply Command to All Plugs: When an asterisk is entered as the argument of  
the /ON(Switch Plugs On), /OFF(Switch Plugs Off) or /BOOT(Reboot Plugs)  
commands, the command will be applied to all plugs. For example, to reboot all  
allowed plugs, type /BOOT * [Enter].  
Command Queues: If a switching or reboot command is directed to a plug that  
is already being switched or rebooted by a previous command, then the new  
command will be placed into a queue until the plug is ready to receive additional  
commands.  
"Busy" Plugs: If the "Status" column in the Plug Status Screen includes an asterisk,  
this means that the plug is currently busy, and is in the process of completing a  
previously issued command. If a new command is issued to a busy plug, then the  
new command will placed into a queue to be executed later, when the plug is ready  
to receive additional commands.  
Plug Name Wild Card: It is not always necessary to enter the entire plug name.  
Plug names can be abbreviated in command lines by entering the first character(s)  
of the name followed by an asterisk (*). For example, a plug named "SERVER" can  
be specified as "S*". Note however, that this command would also be applied to  
any other plug name that begins with an "S".  
Suppress Command Confirmation Prompt: When the /ON(Switch Plug  
On), /OFF(Switch Plug Off), /BOOT(Reboot Plug) or /DPL(Default All Plugs)  
commands are invoked, the ",Y" option can be included to override the Command  
Confirmation ("Sure?") prompt. For example, to reboot Plug A4 without displaying  
the Sure prompt, type /BOOT A4,Y [Enter].  
Enter Key: Most commands are invoked by pressing [Enter].  
Configuration Menus: To exit from a configuration menu, press [Esc].  
17-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Reference Guide  
17.2. Command Summary  
Function  
Command Syntax  
Command Access Level  
Admin. SuperUser  
User ViewOnly  
Display  
Plug Status  
/S [Enter]  
/SG [Enter]  
/SN [Enter]  
/H [Enter]  
/L [Enter]  
/M [Enter]  
/J[*] [Enter]  
X  
X  
X
X  
X  
X
X  
X  
X
X  
X  
X
Plug Group Status  
Network Status  
Help Menu  
X  
X
X  
X
X  
X  
Log Functions  
Current Metering  
Site ID / Unit Information  
Control  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Exit Command Mode  
Boot Plug n  
/X [Enter]  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
/BOOT <n>[,Y] [Enter]  
/ON <n>[,Y] [Enter]  
/OFF <n>[,Y] [Enter]  
/DPL[,Y] [Enter]  
/C [n] [Enter]  
/D [n] [Enter]  
Turn Plug n On  
Turn Plug n Off  
Default All Plugs  
Connect to Port  
Disconnect from Port  
Send Parameter File  
Send SSH Keys  
Unlock Invalid Access  
Configuration  
System Parameters  
Serial Port Parameters  
Plug Parameters  
Plug Group Parameters  
Network Configuration  
Reboot Options  
Alarm Configuration  
Reboot System  
/U [Enter]  
/K <n> [Enter]  
/UL [Enter]  
/F [Enter]  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
/P [n] [Enter]  
/PL [Enter]  
/G [Enter]  
/N [Enter]  
/RB [Enter]  
/AC [Enter]  
/I [Enter]  
Upgrade Firmware  
/UF [Enter]  
Test Network Configuration /TEST [Enter]  
In Administrator Mode and SuperUser Mode, all MPC outlets are displayed. In User Mode  
and ViewOnly Mode, the Plug Status Screen will only include the plugs that are allowed by  
your account.  
In Administrator Mode, all Plug Groups are displayed. In SuperUser Mode, User Mode and  
ViewOnly Mode, the Plug Group Status Screen will only include the Plug Groups that are  
allowed by your account.  
In Administrator Mode, the Help Menus will list all MPC commands. In the SuperUser Mode,  
User Mode and ViewOnly Mode, the Help Menus will only list the commands that are allowed  
by the access level.  
If the optional asterisk (*) argument is included in the command line, this command will also  
show model numbers, current ratings and software versions for the local MPC unit as well as  
any other MPC units that may be attached to the AUX ports.  
The ",Y" argument can be included in the command line to suppress the command  
confirmation prompt.  
The /C command can only be used to connect to the Remote and AUX ports when those  
ports have been specifically configured as serial ports.  
In SuperUser Mode, configuration menus can be displayed, but parameters cannot be  
changed.  
17-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Reference Guide  
17.3. Command Set  
This Section provides information on all Text Interface commands, sorted by  
functionality  
17.3.1. Display Commands  
/S  
Display Plug Status Screen  
Displays the Plug Status Screen, which lists the current On/Off state, plus the plug  
number, plug name, Boot/Sequence Delay value and Default On/Off value for each plug.  
For more information, please refer to Section 8.3.  
Note: In Administrator Mode and SuperUser Mode, all MPC outlets are  
displayed. In User Mode and ViewOnly Mode, the Plug Status Screen will only  
include the plugs allowed by your account.  
Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User, ViewOnly  
Format: /S [Enter]  
/SG  
Display Plug Group Status Screen  
Displays the Plug Group Status Screen, which lists the available Plug Groups, the  
numbers of the plugs included in each Plug Group, the current On/Off state, the user-  
defined Boot/Sequence Delay value, and the Default On/Off value for each plug. For  
more information, please refer to Section 8.4.  
Note: In Administrator Mode all user defined Plug Groups are displayed. In  
SuperUser Mode, User Mode and ViewOnly Mode, the Plug Group Status  
Screen will only include the Plug Groups allowed by your account.  
Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User, ViewOnly  
Format: /SG [Enter]  
/SN  
Display Network Status  
Displays the Network Status Screen, which lists current network connections to the  
MPC's Network Port. For more information, please refer to Section 8.2.  
Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User, ViewOnly  
Format: /SN [Enter]  
17-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Reference Guide  
/H  
Help  
Displays a Help Screen, which lists all available Text Interface commands along with a  
brief description of each command.  
Note: In the Administrator Mode, the Help Screen will list the entire MPC Text  
Interface command set. In SuperUser Mode, User Mode and ViewOnly Mode,  
the Help Screen will only list the commands that are allowed by the account's  
access level.  
Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User, ViewOnly  
Format: /H [Enter]  
/L  
Log Functions  
Provides access to a menu which allows you to display the Audit Log, Alarm Log  
Current Metering Log and Power Metering Log. For more information on Log Functions,  
please refer to Section 5.3.4 and Section 8.  
Availability: Administrator, SuperUser  
Format: /L [Enter]  
/M  
Current Metering Status  
Displays the Current Metering Status Screen, which lists current, voltage and power  
readings, and also lists the trigger settings for the Over Temperature Alarm and the Over  
Current Alarm. When one or more AUX/Remote MPC units are connected to your local  
MPC unit, the Current Metering Status screen will also show current levels at the AUX/  
Remote units. For more information on Current Metering, please refer to Section 8.4.  
For more information on Alarm Configuration, please refer to Section 7.  
Availability: Administrator, SuperUser  
Format: /M [Enter]  
/J  
Display Site ID / Unit Information  
Displays the user-defined Site I.D. message. If the optional asterisk (*) argument is  
included in the command line, the command will also show model numbers, current  
ratings, and software versions for the local MPC unit, as well as any remote MPC units  
that may be connected to the AUX ports.  
Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User, ViewOnly  
Format: /J[*] [Enter]  
Where *(asterisk) is an optional command argument, that is used to display the  
model number, current rating and software version for the local MPC unit, as well as  
any remote MPC units that may be connected to the AUX ports.  
17-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Reference Guide  
17.3.2. Control Commands  
/X Exit Command Mode  
Exits command mode. When issued at the Network Port, also ends the Telnet session.  
Note: If the /X command is invoked from within a configuration menu, recently  
defined parameters may not be saved. In order to make certain that parameters  
are saved, always press the [Esc] key to exit from all configuration menus and  
then wait until "Saving Configuration" message has been displayed and the  
cursor has returned to the command prompt before issuing the /X command.  
Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User, ViewOnly  
Format: /X [Enter]  
/BOOT Initiate Boot Cycle  
Initiates a boot cycle at the selected plug(s) or Plug Group(s). When a Boot cycle is  
performed, the MPC will first switch the selected plug(s) Off, then pause for the user-  
defined Boot/Sequence Delay Period, then switch the plug(s) back on. The /BOOT  
command can also be entered as /BO.  
Note: When this command is invoked in Administrator Mode or SuperUser  
Mode, it can be applied to all MPC plugs and Plug Groups. When this  
command is invoked in User Mode, it can only be applied to the plugs and/or  
Plug Groups that have been enabled for the account.  
Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User  
Format: /BOOT [aux] <n>[,Y] [Enter] or /BO [aux] <n> [Enter]  
Where:  
aux  
If you are directing the command to an outlet on an attached AUX/Remote  
MPC unit, then the auxargument must be included in the command line  
in order to route the command to the appropriate MPC unit. If your local  
MPC unit is not connected to AUX/Remote MPC units, then there is no  
need to include this argument in the command line.  
n
The number or name of the plug(s) or Plug Group(s) that you intend to  
boot. To apply the command to several plugs, enter a plus sign (+)  
between each plug number. To apply the command to a range of plugs,  
enter the numbers for the first and last plugs in the range, separated by a  
colon character (:). To apply the command to all plugs allowed by your  
account, enter an asterisk character (*).  
,Y  
(Optional) Suppresses the command confirmation prompt.  
Examples:  
Assume that your account allows access to Plug A2 and Plug A3. To initiate a boot  
cycle at Plugs A2 and A3, without displaying the optional command confirmation  
prompt, invoke either of the following command lines:  
/BOOT A2+A3,Y [Enter] or /BO A2+A3,Y [Enter]  
To direct the /BOOT command to plug B4 on an AUX/Remote MPC unit connected to  
the AUX2 port on your local MPC unit, invoke either of the following command lines:  
/BOOT aux2 B4 [Enter] or /BO aux2 B4 [Enter]  
17-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Reference Guide  
/ON  
Switch Plug(s) ON  
Switches selected plugs(s) or Plug Group(s) On, as described in Section 9.2.2. When  
the /ON command is used to switch more than one plug, Boot/Sequence Delay Period  
will be applied as described in Section 5.7.  
Note: When this command is invoked in Administrator Mode or SuperUser  
Mode, it can be applied to all MPC plugs and Plug Groups. When this  
command is invoked in User Mode, it can only be applied to the plugs and/or  
Plug Groups that have been enabled for the account.  
Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User  
Format: /ON [aux] <n>[,Y] [Enter]  
Where:  
aux  
If you are directing the command to an outlet on an attached AUX/Remote  
MPC unit, then the auxargument must be included in the command line  
in order to route the command to the appropriate MPC unit. If your local  
MPC unit is not connected to AUX/Remote MPC units, then there is no  
need to include this argument in the command line.  
n
The number or name of the plug(s) or Plug Group(s) that you intend to  
Switch On. To apply the command to several plugs, enter a plus sign (+)  
between each plug number. To apply the command to a range of plugs,  
enter the numbers for the first and last plugs in the range, separated by a  
colon character (:). To apply the command to all plugs allowed by your  
account, enter an asterisk character (*).  
,Y  
(Optional) Suppresses the command confirmation prompt.  
Examples:  
Assume that your account allows access to Plug A2 and Plug A3. To switch Plugs A2  
and A3 On, without displaying the optional command confirmation prompt, invoke  
following command line:  
/ON A2+A3,Y [Enter]  
To direct the /ON command to plug B4 on an AUX/Remote MPC unit connected to the  
AUX2 port on your local MPC unit, invoke the following command line:  
/ON aux2 B4 [Enter]  
17-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Reference Guide  
/OFF  
Switch Plug(s) OFF  
Switches selected plugs(s) or Plug Group(s) Off, as described in Section 9.2.2. When  
the /OFF command is used to switch more than one plug, Boot/Sequence Delay Period  
will be applied as described in Section 5.7. The /OFF command can also be entered  
as /OF.  
Note: When this command is invoked in Administrator Mode or SuperUser  
Mode, it can be applied to all MPC plugs and Plug Groups. When invoked in  
User Mode, the command can only be applied to the plugs and/or Plug Groups  
that are enabled for the account.  
Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User  
Format: /OFF [aux] <n>[,Y] [Enter] or /OF <n>[,Y] [Enter]  
Where:  
aux  
If you are directing the command to an outlet on an attached AUX/Remote  
MPC unit, then the auxargument must be included in the command line  
in order to route the command to the appropriate MPC unit. If your local  
MPC unit is not connected to AUX/Remote MPC units, then there is no  
need to include this argument in the command line.  
n
The number or name of the plug(s) or Plug Group(s) that you intend to  
Switch Off. To apply the command to several plugs, enter a plus sign (+)  
between each plug number. To apply the command to a range of plugs,  
enter the numbers for the first and last plugs in the range, separated by a  
colon character (:). To apply the command to all plugs allowed by your  
account, enter an asterisk character (*).  
,Y  
(Optional) Suppresses the command confirmation prompt.  
Examples:  
Assume that your account allows access to Plug A2 and Plug A3. To switch Plugs  
A2 and A3 on your local MPC unit Off, without displaying the optional command  
confirmation prompt, invoke either of the following command lines:  
/OFF A2+A3,Y [Enter] or /OF A2+A3,Y [Enter]  
To direct the /OFF command to plug B4 on an AUX/Remote MPC unit connected to the  
AUX2 port on your local MPC unit, invoke either of the following command lines:  
/OFF aux2 B4 [Enter] or /OF aux2 B4 [Enter]  
17-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Reference Guide  
/DPL  
Set All Plugs to Default States  
Sets all switched outlets to their user-defined default state. For information on setting  
outlet defaults, please refer to Section 5.7.  
Notes:  
• When this command is invoked in Administrator Mode or SuperUser Mode,  
it will be applied to all MPC outlets. When invoked in User Mode, the  
command will only be applied to the plugs that are allowed by the account.  
• If one or more optional AUX/Remote MPC units are connected to the AUX  
ports on your local unit, then the /DPL command will be applied to both the  
local MPC unit as well as any AUX/Remote MPC units.  
Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User  
Format: /DPL[,Y] [Enter]  
Where ,Y is an optional command argument, which can be included to suppress the  
command confirmation prompt.  
/C  
Connect to Serial Port  
When the RJ-45 AUX Ports and/or Remote Port have been configured as Serial Ports  
as described in Section 5.8.2, the /C command can be used to create a connection  
between the Network port and a serial mode AUX or Remote Port. In addition, the /C  
command can also be invoked to create a connection between the Network Port and  
the Console Port.  
Notes:  
• User level accounts can only connect to the ports that are specifically  
permitted by the account.  
• The /C command cannot be used to create a connection between two serial  
ports.  
• Administrator and SuperUser level accounts are allowed to connect to any  
MPC Serial Port.  
To terminate a serial port connection, either type ^X([Ctrl] plus [X]) or invoke  
the currently defined disconnect sequence.  
Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User  
Format: /C <x> [Enter]  
Where xis the name of the serial port that you wish to connect to. The available  
ports are "1" (the Console Port), "Remote", "AUX1", "AUX2" and "AUX3".  
17-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Reference Guide  
/D  
Third Party Disconnect  
Invoke the /D command at your resident port to disconnect two other ports.  
Notes:  
• The /D command cannot disconnect your resident port  
• Users are limited to the ports that are specifically allowed by their accounts.  
Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User  
Format: /D[/Y] <x> [x] [Enter]  
Where:  
/Y  
x
(Optional) suppresses the "Sure?" prompt.  
Is the number or name of the port(s) to be disconnected. To disconnect  
all allowed ports, enter an asterisk. To disconnect a Telnet session, enter  
the "Nn" format Network Port Number.  
Response: "Are you Sure (y/n)?", if Y, unit will respond with "Disconnected".  
Example: To disconnect Port 2 from Port 3 without the "Sure?" prompt, access the  
Command Mode from a third port with Administrator level command capability and type:  
/D/Y 2 [Enter] or /D/Y 3 [Enter]  
/U  
Send Parameters to File  
Sends all MPC configuration parameters to an ASCII text file as described in Section 13.  
This allows you to back up the configuration of your MPC unit.  
Availability: Administrator  
Format: /U [Enter]  
/K  
Send SSH Key  
Instructs the MPC to provide you with a public SSH key for validation purposes. This  
public key can then be provided to your SSH client, in order to prevent the SSH client  
from warning you that the user is not recognized when you attempt to create an SSH  
connection. For more information, please refer to Section 10.  
Availability: Administrator  
Format: /K k [Enter]  
Where k is a required argument, which indicates the key type. The k argument  
provides the following options: 1 (SSH1), 2 (SSH2 RSA), 3 (SSH2 DSA.)  
17-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Reference Guide  
/UL  
Unlock Port (Invalid Access Lockout)  
Manually cancels the MPC’s Invalid Access Lockout feature. Normally, when a series of  
failed login attempts are detected, the Invalid Access Lockout feature can shut down the  
network port for a user specified time period in order to prevent further access attempts.  
When the /UL command is invoked, the MPC will immediately unlock all network ports  
that are currently in the locked state.  
Availability: Administrator  
Format: /UL [Enter]  
Response: The MPC will unlock all MPC RS232 Ports.  
17.3.3. Configuration Commands  
/F  
Set System Parameters  
Displays a menu which is used to define the Site ID message, create user accounts, set  
the system clock, and configure and enable the Invalid Access Lockout feature. Note  
that all functions provided by the /F command are also available via the Web Browser  
Interface. For more information, please refer to Section 5.3.  
Availability: Administrator  
Format: /F [Enter]  
/P  
Set Serial Port Parameters  
Displays a menu that is used to select options and parameters for the MPC's Serial  
Console Port, Remote Port and AUX Ports. Note that all functions provided by the /P  
command are also available via the Web Browser Interface. Section 5.8 describes  
the procedure for defining serial port parameters for both the Console Port and RJ-45  
Remote and AUX ports.  
Availability: Administrator  
Format: /P <n> [Enter]  
Where nis used to indicate the Console Port or AUX/Remote ports. The available  
command arguments are "1" (Console Port) or AUX(AUX and Remote Ports.)  
/PL  
Set Plug Parameters  
Displays a menu that is used to select options and parameters for the MPC's switched  
outlets (plugs). Note that all functions provided by the /PL command are also available  
via the Web Browser Interface. Section 5.7 describes the procedure for defining plug  
parameters.  
Availability: Administrator  
Format: /PL [Enter]  
17-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Reference Guide  
/G  
Plug Group Parameters  
Displays a menu that is used to View, Add, Modify or Delete Plug Groups. For more  
information on Plug Groups, please refer to Section 5.6.  
Availability: Administrator  
Format: /G [Enter]  
/N  
Network Port Parameters  
Displays a menu which is used to select parameters for the Network Port. Also allows  
access to the IP Security function, which can restrict network access by unauthorized IP  
addresses. Note that all of the functions provided by the /N command are also available  
via the Web Browser Interface. For more information, please refer to Section 5.9.  
Availability: Administrator  
Format: /N [Enter]  
/RB  
Reboot Options  
Displays a menu that is used to configure Scheduled Reboots and Ping-No-Answer  
Reboots. Scheduled Reboots allow the MPC to be rebooted on a regular basis,  
according to a user defined schedule. Ping-No-Answer Reboots allow the MPC to  
automatically reboot user-designated outlets when a user-specified IP address does not  
respond to a Ping command. For more information on Reboot options, please refer to  
Section 6.  
Note: If desired, the Ping-No-Answer Reboot function can also be configured  
to send email notification whenever a Ping-No-Answer Reboot is generated. For  
more information, please refer to Section 7.6.  
Availability: Administrator  
Format: /RB [Enter]  
/AC  
Alarm Configuration Parameters  
Displays a menu that is used to configure and enable the Over Current Alarms, Over  
Temperature Alarms, Circuit Breaker Open Alarm, Lost Communication with AUX Units  
Alarm, Lost Voltage Alarm, Ping-No-Answer Alarm, and the Invalid Access Lockout  
Alarm. When properly configured, the Over Current Alarms and Over Temperature  
Alarms offer the option of "Load Shedding", which allows the unit to automatically switch  
Off user-specified non-essential outlets when temperature or current readings exceed  
user-defined values. For more information on Alarm Configuration, please refer to  
Section 7.  
Availability: Administrator  
Format: /AC [Enter]  
17-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Reference Guide  
/I  
Reboot System (Default)  
Reinitializes the MPC unit and offers the option to keep user-defined parameters or reset  
to default parameters. As described in Section 5.10.1, the /I command can also be used  
to restore the unit to previously saved parameters. When the /I command is invoked,  
the unit will offer the following reboot options:  
• Unit to Reboot  
• Reboot Only (Do NOT default parameters)  
• Reboot & Default (Keep IP Parameters & SSH Keys; Default all other parameters)  
• Reboot & Default (Default ALL parameters)  
• Reboot & Restore Last Known Working Configuration  
• Restore Last Known Working Configuration  
Note: When optional AUX/Remote MPC units have been connected to the AUX  
ports on your local MPC unit, the "Unit to Reboot" option allows you to specify  
which unit will be rebooted. When this option is selected, the MPC will display  
an additional submenu, which allows you to select the local unit, any of the AUX  
MPC units, or all connected MPC units.  
Availability: Administrator, SuperUser  
Format: /I [Enter]  
/UF  
Upgrade Firmware  
When new versions of the MPC firmware become available, this command is used to  
update existing firmware as described in Section 15.  
Note: When a firmware upgrade is performed, the MPC will require 15 minutes  
to upgrade your local MPC unit, plus 30 minutes for each optional AUX/Remote  
MPC unit that is connected to your local MPC unit.  
Availability: Administrator  
Format: /UF [Enter]  
/TEST Test Network Parameters  
Displays a menu which is used to test configuration of the Syslog and SNMP Trap  
functions and can also be used to invoke a Ping Command. For more information,  
please refer to Section 11.2 and Section 12.2.  
Notes:  
• In order for the ping command to function with domain names, Domain Name  
Server parameters must be defined as described in Section 5.9.5.  
• The Test Menu's Ping command is not effected by the status of the Network  
Parameters Menu's Ping Access function.  
Availability: Administrator  
Format: /TEST [Enter]  
17-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix A.  
Specifications  
Physical/Environmental:  
Models MPC-8H-1, MPC-8H-2, MPC-18H-1 and MPC-18H-2:  
Width: 19” (48.3 cm) (Including Rack Brackets)  
Depth: 8.7” (22.1 cm)  
Height: 1.75” (4.5 cm) One Rack U  
Models MPC-16H-1 & MPC-16H-2:  
Width: 19” (48.3 cm) (Including Rack Brackets)  
Depth: 8.7” (22.1 cm)  
Height: 3.5” (8.9 cm) Two Rack U  
Models MPC-20V-1 & MPC-20V-2:  
Width: 4.5” (11.4 cm)  
Depth: 3.0” (7.6 cm)  
Length: 31” (78.7 cm) Zero Rack U  
All Other MPC-V Series Models:  
Width: 4" (10.2 cm)  
Depth: 3.2" (8.1 cm)  
Length: 31" (78.7 cm)  
Operating Temperature: 32˚F to 122˚F (0˚C to 50˚C)  
Humidity: 10 - 90% RH  
Apx-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix B.  
Interface Descriptions  
DB9  
DCD  
RXD  
TXD  
DTR  
GND  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Carrier Detect  
Data In  
Data Out  
RS232  
Port  
Ready Out  
X
X
RTS  
CTS  
Request to Send  
Clear to Send  
Figure B.1: RS232 Console Port Interface  
B.1. Serial Console Port (RS232)  
DCD and DTR hardware lines function as follows:  
1. When connected:  
a) If either port is set for Modem Mode, the DTR output at either port reflects the  
DCD input at the other end.  
b) If neither port is set for Modem Mode, DTR output is held high (active).  
2. When not connected:  
a) If the port is set for Modem Mode, upon disconnect DTR output is pulsed for  
0.5 seconds and then held high.  
b) If the port is not set for Modem Mode, DTR output is controlled by the DTR  
Output option (Serial Port Parameters Menu, Option 23). Upon disconnect,  
Option 23 allows DTR output to be held low, held high, or pulsed for 0.5  
seconds and then held high.  
Apx-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendices  
B.2. RJ-45 AUX Port Interface  
The MPC AUX Port is described in Figure B.2 below.  
Note: The MPC AUX ports do not support DTR or DCD lines.  
RJ-45  
Pin No.  
RTS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Request to Send  
X
TXD  
Data Out  
Ground  
GND  
Pin 1  
Pin 8  
RXD  
CTS  
Data In  
X
Clear to Send  
Figure B.2: MPC Series AUX Port Interface  
Apx-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix C.  
Connecting Devices to AUX & Remote Ports  
As discussed in Section 2, the MPC unit includes three RJ-45 AUX Ports and one  
RJ-45 Remote Port. Typically, the AUX ports are used for connection to up to three  
additional MPC units (allowing control of up to 80 plugs), and the Remote Port is used  
for connection to the optional MPC-DISPLAY unit (allowing you to easily see readings on  
MPC units that may be buried deep within an equipment rack.)  
Note however, that in addition to their primary functions, the AUX and Remote ports  
can also be used for connection to routers and other DCE devices as described in this  
section. For a description of the AUX port interface, please refer to Appendix B.2. For  
a description of the procedure that is used to configure the AUX and Remote ports for  
connection to DCE devices, please refer to Section 5.8.2.  
C.1. Connecting an Auxiliary MPC Unit to the MPC AUX Port  
Use a DX9F-DTE-RJ Snap Adapter and an RJ-45 Straight Cable to connect an optional  
Auxiliary MPC unit to the AUX Port on your MPC master unit as shown in Figure C.1 and  
Figure C.2 below. For instructions on unit configuration, please refer to Section 5.  
RJ-45  
DB-9F  
Pin No.  
Pin No. Signal  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
CTS  
DCD  
Pin 1  
1
2
RXD  
GND  
5
X
Pin 8  
Pin 1  
3
4
7
TXD  
DTR  
RTS  
Female  
Figure C.1: DX9F-DTE-RJ Snap Adapter Interface  
DB-9M DTE  
RJ-45 DCE  
AUX Port  
Optional  
Auxilliary  
MPC Unit  
Console Port  
MPC Series  
Master  
Straight  
RJ-45 Cable  
Unit  
DX9F-DTE-RJ  
Snap Adapter  
Figure C.2: Connecting an Optional MPC Auxilliary unit to the MPC Master Unit  
Apx-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendices  
C.2. Connecting an MPC-DISPLAY Unit to an MPC Master Unit  
Use an RJ-45 Straight Cable to connect the optional MPC-DISPLAY unit to your MPC  
series master unit. Connect one end of the cable to the RJ-45 serial port on the back of  
the MPC-DISPLAY unit, and the other end of the cable to the "Remote" port on the face  
of the MPC series master unit.  
When connecting an MPC-DISPLAY unit to your MPC master unit, please refer to  
Figure C.3 below:  
RJ-45  
Remote Port  
RJ-45  
Serial Port  
MPC Series  
Master Unit  
Optional  
MPC-DISPLAY  
Unit  
Straight  
RJ-45 Cable  
Figure C.3: Connecting an Optional MPC-DISPLAY Unit to an MPC Series Master Unit  
Apx-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendices  
C.3. Connecting Other RJ-45 DCE Devices to the AUX & Remote Ports  
An RJ-ROLL Rollover cable can be used to connect the following RJ-45 DCE devices to  
the MPC's RJ-45 serial ports:  
• Cisco Routers with RJ-45 DCE Console Port  
• Sun Routers with RJ-45 DCE Console Port  
• Other Devices with RJ-45 DCE Console Port  
When connecting an RJ-45 DCE device to the MPC, please refer to Figure C.4 below:  
AUX or Remote  
RJ-45 DCE  
RJ-45 DCE  
Serial Port  
Cisco Router,  
Sun Router  
or other  
Serial Port  
MPC Series  
Unit  
Rollover  
RJ-45 Cable  
Device  
with RJ-45  
DCE Interface  
Figure C.4: Connecting RJ-45 DCE Devices to the AUX & Remote Ports  
Apx-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix D.  
Customer Service  
Customer Service hours are from 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM, PST, Monday through Friday.  
When calling, please be prepared to give the name and make of the unit, its serial  
number and a description of its symptoms. If the unit should need to be returned for  
factory repair it must be accompanied by a Return Authorization number from Customer  
Service.  
WTI Customer Service  
5 Sterling  
Irvine, California 92618  
Local Phone: (949) 586-9950  
Toll Free Service Line: 1-888-280-7227  
Service Fax: (949) 457-8138  
Apx-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix E.  
Rack Mounting  
The MPC offers a variety of different mounting options to allow the unit to be easily  
mounted in almost any equipment rack available. In addition to the standard "L"  
brackets included with all units, MPC-20V series units can also be mounted using  
mounting buttons, "Hook" Brackets for Dell™ style racks or Zero-U Pocket Brackets for  
©
APC style racks or any rack that features a "pocket" or channel for Zero Unit mounting.  
E.1. "L" Bracket Mounting  
The standard "L" brackets, included with the unit, can be used to mount all MPC-8H,  
MPC-18H, MPC-16H or MPC-20V series units in most standard equipment racks.  
The "L" brackets allow horizontal format MPC-H units to be mounted facing forward or  
facing backward or mounted in the front of the rack or rear of the rack. When the "L"  
brackets are used with the vertical format MPC-20V, units can also be mounted facing  
either side of the rack.  
1. Attaching the Brackets to the MPC: First determine which direction the MPC will  
face after mounting, and then secure the "L" Brackets to the MPC accordingly, using  
the screws provided with the mounting brackets.  
a) MPC-8H & MPC-18H Series (Horizontal) Units: Each end of the unit has  
four screw holes that are used for mounting the "L" brackets to the MPC. The  
"L" brackets can either be mounted facing the front of the unit or the rear of the  
unit, using the same four holes. Use four screws (supplied with the bracket) to  
secure each bracket to the MPC.  
b) MPC-16H Series (Horizontal) Units: Each end of the unit has eight screw  
holes; four screw holes for front mounting, and four screw holes for rear  
mounting. Use four screws (supplied with the bracket) to secure an "L" bracket  
to each side of the unit. If the front of the MPC unit will face outwards, use the  
front four holes; if the back of the MPC unit will face outward, use the rear four  
holes.  
c) MPC-20V Series (Vertical) Units: The "L" brackets can either be attached to  
the back or side of the unit, and the unit can also be installed to face the front,  
rear, or either side of the equipment rack. Each end of the MPC features seven  
screw holes for attaching the brackets, this allows you to mount the brackets  
on either side of the unit, and in one of two possible positions on the back.  
When mounting the brackets on the back of the unit, use screw holes 1 and 2  
or 2 and 3 as shown in Figure E.1. Use two screws (supplied with the bracket)  
to secure one bracket to the top of the MPC and the second bracket to the  
bottom of the MPC.  
Apx-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendices  
4
2
5
1
3
Figure E.1: Mounting Holes; MPC-20V Back Panel  
Equipment Rack  
MPC-20V Unit  
Retaining Screws  
LBracket  
Figure E.2: Attaching the "L" Brackets to the Equipment Rack (MPC-20V Shown)  
2. Attaching the "L" Brackets to the Equipment Rack: Determine which direction  
the MPC unit will face in the rack, then line the "U" slots in the "L" Bracket up with  
two holes in the equipment rack mounting strip. Make certain that the unit is  
level, and then use two screws to secure each "L" bracket to the rack as shown in  
Figure E.2.  
Apx-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendices  
E.2. Mounting Buttons  
The Mounting Buttons allow MPC-20V series (vertical) units to be mounted in any  
equipment rack that includes mounting button holes, as shown in Figure E.4.  
Depending on the location of the mounting button holes in your equipment rack, this  
can allow the MPC-20V to be mounted on the posts at the rear of the equipment rack, or  
in some cases, even mounted on the outside of the rack corner posts.  
1. Attaching the Mounting Buttons to the MPC-20V: Attach four Mounting Buttons  
to the back panel of the MPC-20V unit as described below:  
a) Insert a retaining screw into each Mounting Button with the top of the screw  
aligned with the large end of the Mounting Button, as shown in Figure E.3.  
b) Locate the screw holes for the Mounting Buttons on the MPC-20V back panel.  
There are two screw holes at the top of the back panel and two holes at the  
bottom. Note that the screw holes for the Mounting Buttons are not the same  
holes shown in Figure E.1; the Mounting Button screw holes are located at the  
top of the unit, directly above the screw holes shown in Figure E.1, and at the  
bottom, about three inches below the holes shown in Figure E.1.  
c) Firmly attach two Mounting Buttons to the screw holes at the top of the MPC  
and two Mounting Buttons to the screw holes at the bottom of the unit.  
2. Attach the MPC to the Equipment Rack: Align the Mounting Buttons with the top  
end of each mounting button hole (see Figure E.4.) Press the mounting buttons  
into the mounting button holes, and then slide the unit downwards, so each  
Mounting Button seats firmly in the lower end of each corresponding mounting  
button hole.  
Retaining Screw  
Mounting Button  
Screw Hole on  
MPC-20V Back Panel  
Figure E.3: Attaching Mounting Buttons to MPC-20V (Vertical) Units  
Approx. 3/4 Inch  
Approx. 3/8 Inch  
Figure E.4: Mounting Button Holes  
Apx-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendices  
E.3. Hook Bracket Mounting (MPC-20V Series Only)  
The Hook Brackets allow MPC-20V series (vertical) units to be easily mounted in Dell™  
style equipment racks. The Hook Brackets can be used to mount the MPC-20V in any  
rack that includes Dell style mounting rails as shown in Figure E.5.  
The Hook Brackets, which are supplied in a right and left hand pair, allow MPC-20V units  
to be mounted to any one of the four corner posts in a Dell style equipment rack.  
1. Attaching the Brackets to the MPC-20V: First determine which direction the  
MPC will face after mounting, and then secure the Hook Brackets to the MPC-20V  
accordingly, using the screws provided.  
a) The Hook Brackets can be attached to the back or side of the unit, and the unit  
can also be installed to face the front, rear, or either side of the equipment rack.  
b) Each end of the MPC features seven screw holes for attaching the brackets,  
this allows you to mount the brackets on either side of the unit, and in one of  
two possible positions on the back. When mounting the brackets on the back  
of the unit, use screw holes 1 and 2 or 2 and 3 as shown in Figure E.1.  
c) Use two screws (supplied with the bracket) to secure one bracket to the top of  
the MPC-20V and the second bracket to the bottom of the MPC-20V.  
2. Attaching the Hook Brackets to the Equipment Rack: Insert each Hook Bracket's  
tab into one of the square holes in the corner post, then slide the bracket down  
until the hook locks in place with the rack as shown in Figure E.5. After each Hook  
Bracket is firmly seated, use a retaining screw to secure each Hook Bracket to the  
equipment rack.  
Hook Bracket  
Hook Bracket Tab  
(Hooked into Rack)  
MPC-20V Unit  
Equipment  
Rack  
Figure E.5: Attaching the Hook Brackets to the Equipment Rack  
Apx-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendices  
E.4. Zero-U Pocket Bracket Mounting (MPC-20V Series Only)  
©
The Zero-U Pocket Brackets allow you to mount MPC-20V series units in APC style  
racks, that include a pocket or channel for zero unit mounting as shown in Figures E.6  
and E.7.  
The Zero-U Pocket Brackets allow MPC-20V series units to be mounted directly into the  
channel or pocket at the rear of the rack, and can either be nested inside the pocket  
in order to use as little space as possible, or mounted on top of the pocket, in order to  
provide a convenient cavity for cable routing. When the Zero-U Pocket Bracket is used,  
the MPC-20V will always be mounted facing the interior of the rack.  
1. Attaching the Zero-U Pocket Brackets to the MPC:  
a) Determine whether the MPC-20V will be nested within the rack pocket, or will  
be mounted outside the pocket in order to provide a cavity for cable routing.  
b) Insert the screws supplied with the bracket into the three holes in the center  
of the Zero-U Pocket Bracket and then thread them into holes 4, 2 and 5 (see  
Figure E.1) on the back of the MPC-20V unit as shown in Figures E.6 and E.7.  
2. Attaching the Zero-U Pocket Brackets to the Equipment Rack: Align the MPC  
with the rack pocket and then use appropriate retaining screws to secure the  
Zero-U Pocket Brackets to the rack pocket as shown in Figures E.6 and E.7.  
Rack Pocket  
Mounting  
Screws  
Mounting  
Screws  
MPC-20V  
Unit  
Zero-U Pocket  
Bracket  
Figure E.6: Zero-U Pocket Brackets (Cross Section; Nested in Pocket)  
Rack Pocket  
Mounting  
Screws  
Cavity Left  
for Routing  
Zero-U Pocket  
Bracket  
Cables  
MPC-20V  
Unit  
Figure E.7: Zero-U Pocket Brackets (Cross Section; Outside Pocket to Allow Cable Cavity)  
Apx-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendices  
E.5. Universal Mounting Bracket (MPC-20V Series Only)  
The Universal Mounting Brackets are used to mount vertical format MPC units to  
equipment rack posts or mounting pads. The Universal Mounting Brackets are often  
used in cases where the power supply cable enters the rack from above, and allow the  
unit to be easily mounted upside down.  
To mount the unit using the Universal Mounting Brackets, proceed as follows:  
1. Attach the Brackets to the Unit:  
a) Locate the two pairs of mounting holes at the top and bottom of the MPC back  
panel. There should be a pair of holes at the top of the back panel and a pair  
of holes at the bottom.  
b) Refer to Figure E-8 on the following page, and then use the retainer screws to  
attach one Universal Mounting Bracket to the top of the back panel, and one  
Universal Mounting Bracket to the bottom of the back panel. Prior to attaching  
the mounting brackets, make certain that the beveled edge of the screw holes  
faces outward, so the head of the screw will nest within the bevel.  
2. Attach the MPC unit to the Rack:  
a) Use a retaining screw to secure the top mounting bracket to the equipment  
rack post or mounting pad as shown in Figure E-8.  
b) Make certain that the MPC hangs level and straight, and then use a retaining  
screw to attach the bottom mounting bracket to the lower portion of the rack  
post or mounting pad, securing the unit to the rack.  
Apx-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendices  
Universal Mounting  
Bracket  
Screw Holes  
Retaining  
Screws  
MPC Back Panel  
Figure E.8: Attaching the Universal Mounting Bracket to the MPC Unit  
Universal Mounting  
Bracket  
Screw  
Hole  
Retaining  
Screw  
Rack  
Post  
MPC Front Panel  
Figure E.9: Attaching the Universal Mounting Brackets to the Rack  
Apx-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix F.  
Output Cable Keeper  
The Output Cable Keeper extends approximately two inches above the face of the  
MPC-20V series unit, and provides a convenient means to tie output cables in place, to  
prevent cables from being accidentally disconnected.  
To install the Output Cable Keeper on your MPC-20V series unit, please proceed as  
follows:  
1. Refer to the electrical safety warnings in Section 4 and at the beginning of this  
user's guide, and then disconnect the input power supply cables from the MPC-20V  
unit. Next, remove the output cables from the MPC-20V, noting the precise plug/  
location where each output cable was plugged in.  
2. Align the Output Cable Keeper with the face of the MPC-20V unit as shown in  
Figure F.1 below. Note that there are two horizontally aligned screw holes at the  
top of the MPC-20V unit, and two vertically aligned screw holes at the bottom of  
the MPC-20V unit. Use the supplied mounting screws to securely attach the Cable  
Keeper to the face of the MPC-20V unit.  
3. Reconnect the output cables to the same locations where they were previously  
plugged in, and then use a tie wrap to secure each output cable to the Cable  
Keeper.  
Mounting  
Screws  
Outlet Cable Keeper  
AUX  
3
AUX  
1
AUX  
2
REMOTE  
DISPLA  
Y
T
AUL  
DEF  
AUDIBLE  
ALARM  
Ethernet  
10/100  
ON  
Y
Screw  
Holes  
DISPLA  
SELECTION  
CONSOLE  
TEMP  
TS  
VOL  
TS  
KWA  
AMPS  
.8  
.8  
8
.8  
.8  
INPUT  
B
8
INPUT  
A
ntroller  
ower Co  
Managed  
P
-20V  
MPC  
Mounting  
Screws  
Screw  
Holes  
Figure F.1: Installing the Output Cable Keeper (MPC-20V Series Units Only)  
Apx-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendices  
Trademark and Copyright Information  
WTI and Western Telematic are trademarks of Western Telematic Inc.. All other product  
names mentioned in this publication are trademarks or registered trademarks of their  
respective companies.  
Information and descriptions contained herein are the property of Western Telematic  
Inc.. Such information and descriptions may not be copied, disseminated, or distributed  
without the express written consent of Western Telematic Inc..  
© Copyright Western Telematic Inc., 2008.  
August, 2008  
Part Number: 13762, Revision: H  
Trademarks and Copyrights Used in this Manual  
Hyperterminal is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation. Portions  
copyright Hilgraeve, Inc.  
ProComm is a trademark of Datastorm Technologies, Inc™.  
Crosstalk is a trademark of Digital Communications Associates, Inc.  
Teraterm is a copyright of Ayera Technologies, Inc.  
Dell is a trademark of the Dell corporation  
APC is a copyright of the American Power Conversion Corporation.  
BlackBerry is a registered trademark of Research In Motion Limited.  
JavaScript is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.  
Telnet is a trademark of Telnet Communications, Inc.  
Thawte is a trademark of Thawte, Inc.  
VeriSign is a registered trademark of VeriSign, Incorporated  
All other trademarks mentioned in this manual are acknowledged to be the property of  
the trademark owners.  
Apx-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
A
Audit Log  
Authentication  
SNMPv3  
Accept Break  
Network Port  
Serial Port  
5-44 Authentication Port  
Access Level  
LDAP Group  
Accounting Port  
RADIUS  
RADIUS  
TACACS  
Authentication Protocol  
SNMPv3  
Authentication Type  
Add  
LDAP Group  
Ping-No-Answer Reboot  
Plug Groups  
5-62 Automated Mode  
6-2 Auto Recovery  
5-34 AUX Port  
Scheduled Reboot  
User Accounts  
Via SNMP  
AUX Units  
Connecting Devices  
Interface  
Address  
AUX Ports  
Circuit Breaker Open Alarm  
Invalid Access Lockout Alarm  
Lost Communication Alarm  
Lost Voltage Alarm  
Over Current Alarms  
Over Temperature Alarms  
Ping-No-Answer Alarm  
Power Cycle Alarm  
Administrator  
Horizontal Units  
Vertical Units  
7-19 AUX Port Configuration  
7-21 AUX Port Connection  
7-4 AUX Units  
B
Basic Configuration  
Baud Rate  
Serial Port  
Bind Type  
Bits and Parity  
Serial Port  
BlackBerry  
Boot/Sequence Delay  
BOOT Command  
Text Interface  
Boot Priority  
Button Functions  
Network Port  
Serial Port  
Supervisor Mode  
Administrator Mode  
Network Port  
Agency Approvals  
Alarm Clear Threshold  
Over Current Alarms  
Over Temperature Alarm  
Alarm Configuration  
Over Current Alarms  
Over Temperature Alarms  
Alarm Indicator Lights  
Alarm Log  
Alarm Set Threshold  
Over Current Alarms  
Over Temperature Alarm  
Allow List  
C
Cable Keepers  
Output  
Callback Security  
Callback Attempts  
Callback Delay  
Callback Enable  
Callback Number  
Certificate Signing Request  
Channel Mounting  
Circuit Breakers  
Asterisk Character  
Plug Control Screen  
Plug Group Status Screen  
Plug Status Screen  
Audible Alarm  
Horizontal Units  
Enable/Disable  
Horizontal Units  
Vertical Units  
Index-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
Circuit Breaker Open Alarm  
Address  
7-17 to 7-18 Current Capacity  
7-18 Current History Screen  
7-18 Current Metering  
Email Message  
Notify Upon Clear  
Resend Delay  
Subject  
Trigger Enable  
Text Interface  
7-17 Current Metering Log  
7-18 Current Metering Status Screen  
7-17 Customer Service  
Clock and Calendar  
Command Access Level  
Command Confirmation  
Command Echo  
Network Port  
Serial Port  
Command Mode  
Access  
D
Date  
Day  
Scheduled Reboot  
Debug  
RADIUS  
Defaulting Plugs  
Text Interface  
Default All Plugs  
Default Button  
Horizontal Units  
Vertical Units  
Delete  
Logging Out  
Command Prompt  
Command Reference Guide  
Command Set  
Text Interface  
Common Name  
Communication  
Configuration  
Menus  
Restore Previous  
Restoring  
LDAP Groups  
Ping-No-Answer Reboot  
Plug Groups  
Scheduled Reboot  
User Accounts  
Via SNMP  
Dell Brackets  
Deny List  
Saving  
Via SNMP  
Confirmation Prompt  
Connecting Ports  
Consecutive Failures  
Ping-No-Answer Reboot  
Console Port  
Administrator  
Configuration  
Connection  
Horizontal Units  
Interface  
DHCP  
Dialback Security  
Dictionary Support  
RADIUS  
Digital Display  
Horizontal Units  
Vertical Units  
Disconnecting Ports  
Display Selection Button  
Horizontal Units  
Vertical Units  
Domain Name  
Email Parameters  
Domain Name Server  
DSA Client  
SuperUser  
Supervisor Mode  
Vertical Units  
Copyrights  
Copy to All Triggers  
Circuit Breaker Open Alarm  
Invalid Access Lockout Alarm  
Lost Communication Alarm  
Lost Voltage Alarm  
Over Current Alarms  
Over Temperature Alarms  
Ping-No-Answer Alarm  
Country  
Create CSR  
CRT Server Key  
Upload  
Current/Power Metering  
LDAP Group  
DTR Output  
E
Email Address  
SSL Certificate  
Email Message  
Circuit Breaker Open Alarm  
Invalid Access Lockout Alarm  
Lost Communication Alarm  
Lost Voltage Alarm  
Over Current Alarms  
Over Temperature Alarms  
Ping-No-Answer Alarm  
Power Cycle Alarm  
Index-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Email Parameters  
Authentication Type  
Domain  
5-70 Initiating a Reboot Cycle  
Text Interface  
Web Browser Interface  
From Address  
From Name  
5-70 Input Voltage  
5-70 Interval After Failed Ping  
Password  
5-70 Invalid Access Lockout 5-7, 5-11, 7-24 to 7-26, 17-10  
Port Number  
Send Test Email  
SMTP Server  
To Address  
Lockout Attempts  
Lockout Duration  
Lockout Enable  
5-70 Invalid Access Lockout Alarm  
User Name  
Address  
Encryption  
Email Message  
Notify Upon Clear  
Resend Delay  
Subject  
Erasing Logs  
Ethernet Port  
Exit Command Mode  
Text Interface  
External Modem  
4-4 IP Address  
Trigger Enable  
Network Port  
Ping-No-Answer Reboot  
IP Security  
Adding IP Addresses  
Examples  
Operators and Wildcards  
F
Fallback  
Fallback Local  
RADIUS  
TACACS  
Fallback Timer  
RADIUS  
K
TACACS  
5-66 Kerberos  
Firmware Upgrade  
From Address  
Email Parameters  
From Name  
Email Parameters  
Front Panel Buttons  
Domain Realms  
Key Distribution Centers  
Port  
Realm  
Set Up  
L
G
LDAP  
Gateway Address  
Network Port  
Group Membership Attribute  
Group Membership Value Type  
Access Level  
Adding LDAP Groups  
Bind Type  
Current Monitoring  
Deleting Groups  
Enable  
H
Hang Up String  
Modem Mode  
Hardware Description  
Hardware Installation  
Help Screen  
Fallback  
Group Membership Attribute  
Group Membership Value Type  
Group Name  
Kerberos Set Up  
LDAP Group Setup  
LDAP Port  
Modifying LDAP Groups  
Parameters  
Plug Access  
Text Interface  
Hook Brackets  
HTTPS Access  
HTTPS Port  
HTTP Access  
HTTP Port  
Plug Group Access  
Primary Host  
I
Inactivity Timeout  
Network Port  
Search Bind DN  
Search Bind Password  
Secondary Host  
Service Access  
TLS/SSL Encryption  
Serial Port  
Indicator Lights  
Initialization String  
Modem Mode  
Index-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
LDAP (continued)  
User Search Base DN  
User Search Filter  
Viewing LDAP Groups  
LEDs  
Modem Access  
5-61 Modem Mode  
Hang Up String  
Initialization String  
Periodic Reset Value  
Reset String  
Line Power Source  
Link Ports  
Modify  
Horizontal Units  
Load Shedding  
Auto Recovery  
Branch Load Shedding  
Enable  
Line Load Shedding  
Plug Access  
Plug Group Access  
Plug State  
LDAP Groups  
Ping-No-Answer Reboot  
Plug Groups  
Scheduled Reboot  
User Accounts  
Via SNMP  
7-6, 7-8, 7-13, 7-15 Mounting  
7-6, 7-8, 7-14, 7-15 Mounting Brackets  
7-6, 7-8, 7-13, 7-15 Mounting Buttons  
14-2 MPC-DISPLAY  
Locality  
Lockout Attempts  
Lockout Duration  
Lockout Enable  
Logging Out  
Text Interface  
Login  
Logoff Character  
Network Port  
Serial Port  
Log Configuration  
Log Function  
Reading and Erasing  
Syslog  
Log Functions  
Text Interface  
Lost Communication Alarm  
Address  
Email Message  
Notify Upon Clear  
Resend Delay  
Subject  
Trigger Enable  
Lost Voltage Alarm  
Address  
Email Message  
Notify UPon Clear  
Resend Delay  
Subject  
Trigger Enable  
L Brackets  
Horizontal Units  
5-12 MPC-DISPLAY Unit  
5-12 MPC-DISPLAY unit  
N
Network Configuration  
Accept Break  
Administrator Mode  
Command Echo  
DHCP  
Domain Name Server  
Email Parameters  
Gateway Address  
HTTPS Access  
HTTPS Port  
HTTP Access  
HTTP Port  
Inactivity Timeout  
IP Address  
IP Security  
Kerberos Set Up  
LDAP Parameters  
Logoff Character  
Ping Access  
RADIUS  
Sequence Disconnect  
SNMP Parameters  
SSH Access  
SSH Port  
Static Route  
Subnet Mask  
Syslog Address  
TACACS  
Telnet Access  
Telnet Port  
M
Manual Controls  
Manual Operation  
Maximum Load  
Maximum per Source  
Menus  
5-52 Network Parameters  
MIB Parameters  
Model Numbers  
Modem  
Index-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Network Port  
5-51 Password  
P
Administrator  
Horizontal Units  
SuperUser  
Email Parameters  
SNMPv3  
Supervisor Mode  
Vertical Units  
5-51 PDAs  
2-6 Periodic Reset Value  
Network Port Parameters  
Network Status Screen  
Text Interface  
Normal Mode  
DTR Output  
Notify Upon Clear  
Circuit Breaker Open Alarm  
Invalid Access Lockout Alarm  
Lost Communication Alarm  
Lost Voltage Alarm  
Over Current Alarms  
Over Temperature Alarms  
Ping-No-Answer Alarm  
NTP  
8-2 to 8-3 Ping-No-Answer Alarm  
Modem Mode  
Address  
Email Message  
Notify Upon Clear  
Resend Delay  
Subject  
Trigger Enable  
7-19 Ping-No-Answer Reboot  
Adding Reboots  
Consecutive Failures  
Deleting  
Enable  
Interval After Failed Ping  
IP Address  
Modifying  
Ping Delay After Reboot  
Ping Interval  
Ping Test  
Plug Access  
Enable  
NTP Timeout  
Primary NTP Address  
Secondary NTP Address  
NTP Enable  
NTP Timeout  
Plug Group Access  
Reboot  
Reboot Action  
Viewing  
Ping Access  
Ping Delay After Reboot  
Ping Interval  
Ping-No-Answer Reboot  
Ping Test  
Plugs  
Horizontal Units  
Vertical Units  
Plug Access  
O
OFF Command  
ON Command  
Operation  
Organizational Name  
Organizational Unit  
Outlet Configuration  
Output Cable Keeper  
Over Current Alarms  
Address  
Alarm Clear Threshold  
Alarm Set Threshold  
Branch  
Email Message  
Line  
Notify Upon Clear  
Resend Delay  
AUX Units  
LDAP Group  
Ping-No-Answer Reboot  
Scheduled Reboot  
Plug Action  
Scheduled Reboot  
Plug Control  
Web Browser Interface  
Plug Control Screen  
Web Browser Interface  
Plug Groups  
Adding  
Deleting  
Editing  
Modifying  
Subject  
Trigger Enable  
Over Temperature Alarm  
Alarm Clear Threshold  
Alarm Set Threshold  
Over Temperature Alarms  
Address  
Email Message  
Notify Upon Clear  
Resend Delay  
Subject  
Trigger Enable  
Plug Access  
Plug Group Name  
Viewing  
Index-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Plug Group Access  
LDAP Group  
5-27 Privacy  
SNMPv3  
Load Shedding  
Ping-No-Answer Reboot  
Scheduled Reboot  
Plug Group Control  
Initiating a Reboot Cycle  
Web Browser Interface  
Plug Group Status Screen  
Text Interface  
Plug Name  
Plug Order  
Plug Parameters  
Boot/Sequence Delay  
Boot Priority  
7-6, 7-8, 7-14, 7-15 Product Status Screen  
Q
R
Quick Start Procedure  
Rack Mounting  
RADIUS  
Accounting Port  
Authentication Port  
Debug  
Dictionary Support  
Enable  
Fallback Local  
Fallback Timer  
Plug Name  
Primary Address  
Power Up Default  
Plug Status Screen  
Text Interface  
Pocket Brackets  
Port  
Kerberos  
Port Access  
User Accounts  
Port Connection  
Port Mode  
Primary Secret Word  
Secondary Address  
Secondary Secret Word  
Set Up  
Reading Logs  
Read Only  
SNMP Parameters  
Real Power  
Real Time Clock  
Date  
NTP Enable  
NTP Timeout  
Primary NTP Address  
Secondary NTP Address  
Time  
Serial Port  
Port Name  
Serial Port  
Port Number  
Email Parameters  
Power Configuration  
Power Cycle Alarm  
Address  
Email Message  
Subject  
Trigger Enable  
Power Efficiency  
Power Factor  
Power History Screen  
Power Inlets  
Horizontal Units  
Vertical Units  
Power Metering Status Screen  
Power Range Status Screen  
Power Ratings  
Power Source  
Power Supply Cables  
Power Up Default  
Primary Address  
RADIUS  
Time Zone  
Reboot Action  
Reboot Operating System  
Reboot Options  
Ping-No-Answer Reboot  
Scheduled Reboot  
Text Interface  
Reboot Priority  
Reboot System  
Recurrance  
Scheduled Reboot  
Remote Display  
Remote MPC Units  
Remote Port  
Configuration  
Connecting Devices  
Remote Port Connection  
Resend Delay  
Circuit Breaker Open Alarm  
Invalid Access Lockout Alarm  
Lost Communication Alarm  
Lost Voltage Alarm  
Over Current Alarms  
Over Temperature Alarms  
Ping-No-Answer Alarm  
TACACS  
Primary Host  
Primary NTP Address  
Primary Secret Word  
RADIUS  
Index-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Reset String  
Serial Port (continued)  
Port Mode  
Port Name  
Sequence Disconnect  
Stop Bits  
Modem Mode  
Restore Configuration  
Restoring Parameters  
RS232 Port  
Interface  
Apx-2 Serial Port Access  
RSA Client  
10-1 Serial Port Configuration  
Serial Port Connection  
S
Server Private Key  
Safety Information  
Saving Parameters  
Text Interface  
Scheduled Reboot  
Adding  
Service Access  
LDAP Group  
Set Parameters to Defaults  
Set Plugs to Defaults  
Text Interface  
Signed Certificate  
Site I.D.  
Text Interface  
SMTP Server  
SNMP  
Adding Users  
Configuration  
Configuration Via  
Controlling Plugs  
Controlling Plug Groups  
Deleting Users  
Modifying Users  
Operation via  
SNMP Traps  
Day  
Deleting  
Modifying  
Plug Access  
Plug Action  
Plug Group Access  
Recurrance  
Scheduled Reboot Name  
Time  
Turn On Day  
Turn On Time  
Viewing  
Search Bind DN  
Search Pind Password  
Secondary Address  
RADIUS  
Testing  
Viewing Users  
View Unit Status  
SNMPv3  
TACACS  
Secondary Host  
Secondary NTP Address  
Secondary Secret Word  
RADIUS  
Secret Word  
TACACS  
Self Signed Certificate  
Send Test Email  
Sequence Disconnect  
Network Port  
Serial Port  
Serial Port  
Authentication  
Authentication/Privacy  
Authentication Protocol  
Encryption  
Password  
Username  
SNMP Agent  
SNMP Parameters  
Access  
Authentication  
Authentication Protocol  
Enable  
Privacy  
Read Only  
SNMPv3  
Accept Break  
Access  
Administrator Mode  
Baud Rate  
Bits and Parity  
Command Echo  
Configuration  
Disconnection  
Handshake Mode  
Horizontal Units  
Inactivity Timeout  
Interface  
SNMPv3 Password  
SNMPv3 User Name  
SNMP Community  
SNMP Contact  
SNMP Location  
Version  
SNMP Trap  
SNMP Managers  
Trap Community  
Specifications  
Logoff Character  
Modem Mode  
Normal Mode  
Index-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
SSH  
Access  
Encryption  
Keys  
SSH Access  
5-2 Syslog  
Configuration  
Syslog Address  
Syslog Messages  
Testing Configuration  
SSH Port  
5-52 System Parameters  
SSL Certificate  
Common Name  
Country  
Create CSR  
Email Address  
Automated Mode  
Callback Security  
Command Confirmation  
Command Prompt  
Invalid Access Lockout  
Log Configuration  
Real Time Clock  
Locality  
Organizational Name  
Organizational Unit  
State or Province  
Upload Signed Certificate  
State or Province  
Static Route  
Site I.D.  
Temperature Calibration  
Temperature Format  
User Directory  
Voltage Calibration  
Status Screens  
Stop Bits  
Serial Port  
8-1 to 8-9 System Reboot  
T
TACACS  
Subject  
Authentication Port  
Configuration  
Enable  
Fallback Local  
Fallback Timer  
Primary Address  
Secondary Address  
Secret Word  
Circuit Breaker Open Alarm  
Invalid Access Lockout Alarm  
Lost Communication Alarm  
Lost Voltage Alarm  
Over Current Alarms  
Over Temperature Alarms  
Ping-No-Answer Alarm  
Power Cycle Alarm  
Subnet Mask  
Network Port  
SuperUser  
Network Port  
Supervisor Mode  
Supervisor Mode  
Console Port  
Network Port  
Support  
Tech Support  
Telnet  
Access  
Max. per Source  
Telnet Access  
Telnet Port  
Temperature Calibration  
Temperature Format  
Test Menu  
Text Interface  
Applying Commands to Several Plugs  
Command Set  
Initiating a Reboot Cycle  
Plug Status Screen  
Set Plugs to Defaults  
Switching Outlets Off  
Switching Outlets On  
Third Party Disconnect  
Time  
Scheduled Reboot  
Time Zone  
TLS/SSL Encryption  
Toggle All Plugs  
Sure Prompt  
Switched Outlets  
Horizontal Units  
Vertical Units  
Switching Outlets Off  
Text Interface  
Web Browser Interface  
Switching Outlets On  
Text Interface  
Web Browser Interface  
Switching Plugs Off  
Text Interface  
Web Browser Interface  
Switching Plugs On  
Text Interface  
To Address  
Email Parameters  
Trademarks  
Web Browser Interface  
Index-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Trigger Enable  
V
Circuit Breaker Open Alarm  
Invalid Access Lockout Alarm  
Lost Communication Alarm  
Lost Voltage Alarm  
Over Current Alarms  
Over Temperature Alarms  
Ping-No-Answer Alarm  
Power Cycle Alarm  
Turn On Day  
7-17 Version  
7-25 SNMP  
7-19 View  
LDAP Groups  
Ping-No-Answer Reboot  
Plug Groups  
Scheduled Reboot  
User Accounts  
Via SNMP  
Scheduled Reboot  
Turn On Time  
6-7 ViewOnly  
Voltage Calibration  
Scheduled Reboot  
6-7 Voltage Setting  
U
Unit Description  
Unit to Configure  
Load Shedding  
Power Configuration  
Universal Mounting Bracket  
Unlock Port  
W
2-1 to 2-8 Warnings and Cautions  
Web Access  
7-5 Web Browser Interface  
Initiating a Reboot Cycle  
Plug Control Screen  
Plug Group Control Screen  
Switching Outlets Off  
Switching Outlets On  
Text Interface  
Upgrade Firmware  
Upgrading Firmware  
Upload  
CRT Server Key  
Signed Certificate  
User  
Z
Zero-U Pocket Brackets  
Username  
Email Parameters  
SNMPV3  
User Accounts  
Access Level  
Access Levels  
Adding  
Command Access Levels  
Current Monitoring  
Deleting  
Editing  
Modifying  
Password  
Plug Access  
Plug Group Access  
Port Access  
Service Access  
Username  
Viewing  
User Directory  
User Search Base DN  
User Search Filter  
Index-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Weed Eater Trimmer 530086308 User Manual
Western Digital Computer Drive WD1500BLHX User Manual
Whirlpool Clothes Dryer CGM2751KQ1 User Manual
Whirlpool Ventilation Hood GZ7930XGS0 User Manual
Whirlpool Washer Dryer LA54OOXP User Manual
Whirlwind Music Mixer MIX61 User Manual
White Lawn Mower 128 476R190 User Manual
Xbrand Laptop XB 1010 XX User Manual
Zanussi Electric Heater ZBX 623 SS User Manual
Zanussi Refrigerator 113175 User Manual